Toon BoomPro 66
Storyboard Pro

Getting Started
Reference
GuideGuide

TOON BOOM ANIMATION INC.

+1 514 278 8666

4200 Saint-Laurent, Suite 1020
Montreal, Quebec, Canada
H2W 2R2

contact@toonboom.com
toonboom.com

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Legal Notices
Toon Boom Animation Inc.
4200 Saint-Laurent, Suite 1020
Montreal, Quebec, Canada
H2W 2R2
Tel: +1 514 278 8666
Fax: +1 514 278 2666
toonboom.com

Disclaimer
The content of this document is the property of Toon Boom Animation Inc. and is copyrighted. Any
reproduction in whole or in part is strictly prohibited.
The content of this document is covered by a specific limited warranty and exclusions and limit of liability under

the applicable License Agreement as supplemented by the special terms and conditions for Adobe®Flash ® File
Format (SWF). For details, refer to the License Agreement and to those special terms and conditions.

Trademarks
Toon Boom® is a registered trademark. Storyboard Pro™ and the Toon Boom logo are trademarks of Toon
Boom Animation Inc. All other trademarks of the property of their respective owners.

Publication Date
01-15-2020
Copyright © 2020 Toon Boom Animation Inc., a Corus Entertainment Inc. company. All rights reserved.

1

Table of Contents

Table of Contents
Table of Contents

2

Chapter 1: Introduction

8

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

10

Advanced Merge Storyboard Dialog Box

13Blur Dialog Box

16

Change Bitmap Layer Resolution Dialog Box

17Choose Encoding and Font Dialog Box

19

Colour Picker Window

20

Customize Captions Dialog Box

22

Default Caption Format Dialog Box

24

Directional Blur Dialog Box

25

Export Audio Dialog Box

27

Export Bitmap Dialog Box

30

Export CSV Window

37

Export to FBX Dialog Box

40

Export Layout Dialog Box

42

Export to Movie Dialog Box

47

Export Project / Selected Scenes / Tracked Scenes Dialog Box (Conformation)

52

Export to EDL/AAF/XML Dialog Box

59

Export to Harmony Dialog Box

66

Write Node Image Formats for Harmony

74

Export to PDF Window

80

Extract Storyboard Dialog Box

84

Find Sound Clips Dialog Box

86

Find Text Window

88

Flash Export Settings Dialog Box

90

Generate Auto-Matte Dialog Box

92

Import CSV Window

94

2

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Import from Final Draft Dialog Box

95

Import Images Dialog Box

99

Conformation Import Project Dialog Box

102

Import Sound Clips Dialog Box

104

Import Videos/Images as Clips

106

List Picker Dialog Box

108

Manage Tool Presets Dialog Box

109

Marker Dialog Box

111

Merge Layers Dialog Box

112

Merge Storyboard Dialog Box

114

QuickTime Movie Settings Dialog Box

117

Multiwheel Colour Window120

New Project Window

123

New Resolution Window

125

New Tool Preset Dialog Box

128

Optimize Project Dialog Box

130

Panel PDF Options Window

131

PDF Export View/Window

133

PDF Profile Dialog Box

135

Project Properties Dialog Box

153

Radial Zoom Blur Dialog Box

162

Record Sound Dialog Box

164

Record Voice Annotation Dialog Box

166

Rename Panel Dialog Box

167

Rename Scene Dialog Box

168

Rename Sequence Dialog Box

170

Render 3D Model Dialog Box

172

Scripts Manager Dialog Box

176

Select Font Dialog Box

178

Show/Hide Captions Dialog Box

180

3

Table of Contents

Smart Add Panel Dialog Box

181

QuickTime Sound Settings Dialog Box

182

Split Storyboard Dialog Box

185

Spread Layer Motion Dialog Box

187

QuickTime Standard Video Compression Settings Dialog Box

188

Toolbar Manager Dialog Box

193

Track Changes Window

194

Welcome Screen

195

WMV Settings Dialog Box

197

Workspace Manager Dialog Box

199

Chapter 3: Menus

202

Main Menus

203

Camera Menu

204

Caption Menu

206

Clips Menu

208

Edit Menu

209

File Menu

211

Help Menu

218

Layer Menu

220

Play Menu

225

Storyboard Menu

227

Tools Menu

233

View Menu

237

Windows Menu

242

View Menus

244

3D Graph View Menu

245

Point of View Menu

247

Script Editor View Menu

248

Chapter 4: Toolbars

254

Camera Toolbar

255

4

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Clips and Tracks Toolbar

256

Coordinate Toolbar

258

Edit Toolbar

259

File Toolbar

260

Layer Toolbar

261

Navigation Toolbar

263

Onion Skin Toolbar

264

Playback Toolbar

266

Script Toolbar

267

Script Editor Toolbar

268

Storyboard Toolbar

272

Text Formatting Toolbar

274

Tool Presets Toolbar

275

Tools Toolbar

276

View Toolbar

280

Workspace Toolbar

282

Chapter 5: Tool Properties

284

Brush Tool Properties

286

Camera Tool Properties

305

Centerline Editor Tool Properties

308

Close Gap Tool Properties

309

Contour Editor Tool Properties

310

Create Layer on Surface Tool Properties

312

Cutter Tool Properties

313

Dropper Tool Properties

316

Ellipse Tool Properties

317

Eraser Tool Properties

323

Layer Transform Tool Properties

341

Line Tool Properties

345

Maintain Size Tool Properties

352

5

Table of Contents

Paint Tool Properties

353

Pencil Tool Properties

357

Perspective Tool Properties

364

Polyline Tool Properties

367

Rectangle Tool Properties

372

Select Tool Properties

378

Stamp Tool Properties

386

Text Tool Properties

394

Zoom Tool Properties

397

Chapter 6: Views

398

3D Graph View

399

Camera View

401

Colour View

406

Function Editor View

407

Guides View

414

Layers View

417

Library View

420

Message Log View

422

Panel View

423

Pitch Mode View

427

Script Editor View

428

Stage View

430

Storyboard View

436

Thumbnails View

438

Timeline View

440

Tool Properties View

446

Top and Side Views

447

Chapter 7: Workspaces

450

Pitch Mode Workspace451

Thumbnails View

453

6

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Control Panel

454

Playing Back the Storyboard

455

Navigating the Camera View

456

Panel View

457

7

Chapter 1: Introduction

Chapter 1: Introduction
The Storyboard Pro Reference Guide lists every menu, button and option available in the user interface alongwith a description of their functionality. Its purpose is to be looked up when you need to understand a specificoption or functionality in the user interface, or if you want to learn about all the capabilities of a specific feature.
NOTE
For step by step instructions on how to use Storyboard Pro features, refer to the User Guide. If you
need information about a preference in the Preferences dialog box, refer to the Preferences Guide.

8

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

9Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes
While you work in Storyboard Pro, you will encounter dialog boxes from which you set parameters, options andmany other settings, depending on the task you are performing.
Windows allow you to set parameters and continue working with the window open, so you can further tweak
the settings. Here are examples of a dialog box and a window.

Here are the dialogs documented in this section:
Advanced Merge Storyboard Dialog Box

13Blur Dialog Box

16

Change Bitmap Layer Resolution Dialog Box

17Choose Encoding and Font Dialog Box

19

Colour Picker Window

20

Customize Captions Dialog Box

22

Default Caption Format Dialog Box

24

Directional Blur Dialog Box

25

Export Audio Dialog Box

27

Export Bitmap Dialog Box

30

Export CSV Window

37

Export to FBX Dialog Box

40

Export Layout Dialog Box

42

10

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Export to Movie Dialog Box

47

Export Project / Selected Scenes / Tracked Scenes Dialog Box (Conformation)

52

Export to EDL/AAF/XML Dialog Box

59

Export to Harmony Dialog Box

66

Write Node Image Formats for Harmony

74

Export to PDF Window

80

Extract Storyboard Dialog Box

84

Find Sound Clips Dialog Box

86

Find Text Window

88

Flash Export Settings Dialog Box

90

Generate Auto-Matte Dialog Box

92

Import CSV Window

94

Import from Final Draft Dialog Box

95

Import Images Dialog Box

99

Conformation Import Project Dialog Box

102

Import Sound Clips Dialog Box

104

Import Videos/Images as Clips

106

List Picker Dialog Box

108

Manage Tool Presets Dialog Box

109

Marker Dialog Box

111

Merge Layers Dialog Box

112

Merge Storyboard Dialog Box

114

QuickTime Movie Settings Dialog Box

117

Multiwheel Colour Window120

New Project Window

123

New Resolution Window

125

New Tool Preset Dialog Box

128

Optimize Project Dialog Box

130

Panel PDF Options Window

131

PDF Export View/Window

133

11

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

PDF Profile Dialog Box

135

Project Properties Dialog Box

153

Radial Zoom Blur Dialog Box

162

Record Sound Dialog Box

164

Record Voice Annotation Dialog Box

166

Rename Panel Dialog Box

167

Rename Scene Dialog Box

168

Rename Sequence Dialog Box

170

Render 3D Model Dialog Box

172

Scripts Manager Dialog Box

176

Select Font Dialog Box

178

Show/Hide Captions Dialog Box

180

Smart Add Panel Dialog Box

181

QuickTime Sound Settings Dialog Box

182

Split Storyboard Dialog Box

185

Spread Layer Motion Dialog Box

187

QuickTime Standard Video Compression Settings Dialog Box

188

Toolbar Manager Dialog Box

193

Track Changes Window

194

Welcome Screen

195

WMV Settings Dialog Box

197

Workspace Manager Dialog Box

199

12

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Advanced Merge Storyboard Dialog Box
The Merge and Replace dialog is useful if you have extracted or split your project into different project to allow
different project collaborators to work on it, but have kept a copy of the original project (or master project).
With this dialog, you can replace the original scenes in the master project with the updated scenes in theextracted project.
Optionally, you can keep a copy of the original scenes so that you can compare them. You can also customize
which scenes from the extracted projects should be imported into the master project.
NOTE
When merging projects, the video and sound clips in the master project will remain synchronizedwith the cue time of their respective panels. Clips that extend beyond the boundaries of a panel will
be synchronize with the panel in which they are cued, not the panel in which they end.

How to access the Advanced Merge Storyboard window
1. Open your master project.
2. Select File > Project Management > Merge and Replace.
The Advanced Merge Storyboard dialog box opens.

13

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Parameter

Description
Displays the list of Storyboard Pro project files selected for merging with yourcurrent file.

List of Storyboard Pro
projects

NOTE
A checkbox appears to the left of every project in the list. Checking thatcheckbox will select every scene in that project for merging into thecurrent project.

Import Project

Lets you select the Storyboard Pro project files to merge/replace with your current
file.

Remove Project

Lets you select any unwanted Storyboard Pro project files and delete them fromthe list.

Move Up/Move Down

Lets you organize the files into the order in which you wanted them to beimported in relation to your current file.
The list of scenes in the project that is currently selected in the projects list at the
top. A checkbox appears left of each scene in the list. Checking this checkbox will
make it so the scene is merged from the selected project into the current project.

Select scenes to merge

If the project being imported contains sequences, the sequences will also be in
the list, and scenes will be listed under their respective sequence. You can checkthe checkbox next to a sequence to simultaneously select all scenes in thesequence.

Select All

Checks every scene in the selected project for merging into the current project.

Deselect All

Unchecks every scene in the selected project.

Keep and move originalscenes to the end

Creates a backup of each scene in the master project that gets replaced by a scene
in the imported projects. The backup scene will be placed at the end of the
project, and its scene name will have the _orig prefix added to it.

Respect locked audio tracks

Ensures that the sound clips in locked audio tracks do not get moved to remain
synchronized with their respective panels.

Import audio changes fromsource project

Imports the changes done to the audio tracks and sound clips of the imported
projects into the current project.

14

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Only Merge Modified Panels(Track Changes)

Only merges the panels that were tracked as changed in the projects being
merged. If this option is enabled, changes made to panels that were not tracked
for changes in the imported projects will not be applied to the master project.
Replaces the artwork in the master project with the artwork in the imported
projects, but does not adjust the timing of panels and scenes in the animatic.

Replace Artwork Only

NOTE
Layer transformations and animations in the master project will still be
replaced by layer transformations and animations in the imported projects
unless the Preserve Layer Transformations in Master Project option
is enabled.

Preserve Layer
Transformations in Master
Project

With the Replace Artwork Only option enabled, layer transformations in themaster project are still replaced by the layer transformations and animations in theimported projects by default. With this option enabled, drawings in the masterproject will be replaced, but not the transformations and animations on theirlayers.

15

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Blur Dialog Box
T-SBADV-007-003
The Blur effect softens, fogs or obscures the image evenly in all directions. This effect is useful when you want tomake images cloudy and not detailed. For example, you can make a drawing object that is farther back or in the
background of your scene appear blurry due to the laws of atmospheric perspective. Other uses include thegeneral softening of objects such as snow, stars and shadows that do not naturally have a hard outline.

How to access the Blur dialog boxlSelect Layer > Apply Effect on Bitmap Layer > Blur.

Parameter

Description

RadiusSize of the blur. The larger the value, the greater the strength or reach of the blur.

Quality

Select High for a slow and accurate operation or Low for a faster operation with amore raw look.

16

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Change Bitmap Layer Resolution Dialog Box
The Change Bitmap Layer Resolution dialog box lets you change the resolution of a bitmap layer to better suitthe needs of your scene.

How to access the Change Bitmap Layer Resolution dialog box
1. From the Layers panel or the Layers view, select the bitmap layer for which you want to change theresolution.
2. Do one of the following:l

Right-click the layer and select Change Bitmap Layer.

lFrom the top menu, select Layer > Change Bitmap Layer Resolution.

Parameter

Description

Project Resolution

The project resolution of the project, displayed for reference.

Canvas Size & Pixel Density

Pixel Density

Determines the amount of pixels to store for each pixel that displays on thescreen when the drawing is not zoomed in or scaled up. For example, at 100%,
zooming in or scaling up a bitmap drawing will make it lose picture quality. If set
to 200%, bitmap drawings can be zoomed in or scaled up until they're twice their
original size without losing picture quality.

Width

The default width of the canvas when creating a bitmap drawing layer. The
percentage is relative to the width of the project. Its default value, 200%, makes
the width of the canvas twice the width of the stage.

Height

The default height of the canvas when creating a bitmap drawing layer. The
percentage is relative to the height of the project. Its default value, 200%, makes

17Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

the height of the canvas twice the height of the stage.

Resample Bitmap

When enabled, the artwork is resampled based on the new Pixel Density topreserve its currents proportions in the stage. Otherwise, increasing the pixel
density will scale down the artwork, and decreasing it will scale it up.

18

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Choose Encoding and Font Dialog Box
The Choose Encoding and Font dialog box lets you select the language encoding and embedded PDF fontwhen exporting Unicode character to a PDF document. These will be used to display the text in a PDF.

How to access the Choose Encoding and Font dialog box
1. In the Export to PDF window, click New Profile.
The PDF Profile dialog box opens.
2. Select the General tab.
3. In the Font field, click the browse [...] button.

Parameter

Description

Choose Font
Encoding
Built-in Fonts
Font

Lets you select the type of Unicode encoding for the PDF.

Lets you select any font installed on your system to use for all text in the PDF
document.

TrueType Fonts (TTF)
Lets you select a TrueType font for the PDF.
Font File

19

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Colour Picker Window
The Colour Picker window lets you select and customize colours, create solid or gradient colours, store colours in
the colour storage library and open the Multiwheel Colour window.

How to access the Colour Picker window
1. In the Colour view, make sure the Colour area is expanded by clicking the Collapse/Expand arrow.
2. Double-click on the current colour swatch.
The Colour Picker window opens.

Parameter

Description

Colour slider

Displays the colour gradation of the colour selected in the colour picking area.

Colour picking area

Displays a colour range with a cursor which you can drag to select a colour. This
display changes when you select one of the these options: H, S, V, R, B, or B.

Add Colour

Adds the selected colour to the colour storage library.

Colour Storage LibraryLets you save colours you have defined.

Multiwheel Mode

Opens the Multiwheel Colour window—see Multiwheel Colour Window on page
120.

20

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Current Colour

Displays the current colour on the left side. On the right side is the currently you
are modifying.

Colour Scale

Displays the hue selected in the colour picking and colour slider areas, and its
different values.

Dropper

Lets you select a colour from any place on your screen. Hold down the Dropperand drag to the desired colour and release to select the colour.

H, S, V

Displays the hue, saturation or value of a selected colour in the colour picking
area.

RGB

Displays the red, green or blue colour wheel.

Alpha

Lets you change the transparency level by typing in a value or dragging the slider.

Solid

Creates an even, uniform colour.

Gradient

Lets you create a linear or radial gradient.

Gradient Scale

Displays a colour range and arrows. Move the arrows to define the gradientcolours.

Gradient Preview

Displays a preview of the gradient as you move the arrows on the gradient scale.

LinearCreates a linear gradient.

RadialCreates a radial (circular) gradient.

21

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Customize Captions Dialog Box
The Customize Captions dialog box allows you to configure how the caption fields in a project you're insertingare matched with the caption fields in your current project. You can associate caption fields from the project
being inserted with caption fields in the current project, and decide whether the unmatched caption fields areadded to your project or discarded.

How to access the Customize Captions dialog box
1. In your current project, in the Timeline view, move the timeline playhead over the scene after which
you want the project to be inserted.
2. From the top menu, select File > Project Management > Insert.
The Open Storyboard Project window appears.
3. Browse to and select the *.sboard or *.sbpz file of the project you want to select and click on Open.
4. In the dialog prompting you to confirm how to manage the caption fields of the project being
inserted, click on Customize.

Parameter

Description

The list of captions being merged. The left column is for the caption fields in thecurrent project, and the right column is for the caption fields in the project being
inserted.

Captions list

Captions that are aligned horizontally will be matched, and the value of these
captions in the inserted project will be added to that caption field in the current
project. By default, captions that have the same name will already be aligned
together. Should you need to customize the way the caption fields in bothprojects are matched, keep in mind the following behaviors:l

If a caption field of one of the project being merged is aligned with one of
the caption fields in the current project, the values for that merged
project's field will be added to the current project's field it is aligned with,22

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Parameter

Description

for all the scenes that are imported from that merged project, even if thesefields don't have the same name.
For example, if the current project has a caption field named Action andthe project being merged has a caption field named Action Notes, andthey are both aligned horizontally, once the projects are merged, the valueof the Action Notes caption field for the scenes being imported will be
stored in the Action field.
l

l

l

l

If a caption field for the project getting merged is below all the fields in thecurrent project, it will be added as a new field to the current project.
If a caption field for the project getting merged is below all the fields in thecurrent project and is crossed out, it will be ignored.
If a caption field for the project getting merged is aligned with one of the
fields of the current project and is crossed out, this field will be empty for
all the scenes that are imported from that project.
If a caption field is added to the project but has the same name as anexisting caption field, it will have a suffix number.

Add Caption

If you have removed a caption from one of the project getting inserted, you canselect the removed caption and click on this button to add it back.

Remove Caption

Ignores the currently selected caption field for the inserted project. The values forthat caption field will not be imported in the current project.

Move Up

Moves the selected caption field up in the list of captions, changing which
caption field in the original project it is matched with.

Move Down

Moves the selected caption down in the list of captions, changing which caption
field in the original project it is matched with.

23

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Default Caption Format Dialog Box
The Default Caption Format dialog box lets you set the default font face and font size of all new captions added
to your project.
The Default Caption Format is automatically applied when typing captions into a caption field that waspreviously empty, but does not affect the format of existing captions or of new text typed into existing captions.
The Default Caption Format is saved in your local preferences and affects all projects.

How to access the Default Caption Format dialog box
1. From the top menu, select Captions > Captions Default Format.
The Default Caption Format dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Font

Sets the default font face for new captions.

Font Size

Sets the default font size for new captions.

24

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Directional Blur Dialog Box
T-SBADV-007-005
The Directional Blur effect creates a motion blur that pulls and smears the image from one contour edge to adifferent direction or angle. This effect is useful in creating the impression of speed, such as the streaks of colourthat follow a car travelling at high speed. The look of the blur is similar to the look achieved using Gaussian blurwhen applied with multiple iterations.

How to access the Directional Blur dialog boxlSelect Layer > Apply Effect on Bitmap Layer > Directional Blur.

Parameter

Description

LengthLength of the blur.

Width

Thickness of the blur.

Angle

The direction in which the blur is applied, in degrees. At 0°, the blur is applied
towards the right.

25

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

NOTE
You can click and drag on the dialat the right of the field to visually

set this angle.

Bidirectional

Applies the blur on both sides of the pixel.
The distance where the blur fades from the edge of the image. Select a value

Fall Off

Number of Iterations

between 0 and 1. A fall-off rate of 0 causes the blur to fade out slowly,
distributing the blur evenly from the edge of the character to the farthest edge ofthe blur. A fall-off rate of 1 causes the blur to fade out quickly, so the blur isheaviest closer to the edge of the image.
The number of times the blur is applied to the image. A higher number of
iterations creates smoother transitions between colours and increases the blur,
but also increases render time.

26

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Export Audio Dialog Box
The Export Audio dialog allows you to export your project's audio tracks into sound files. You can choose toexport a single file for all your project's audio tracks, or to export each audio track individually. You can alsochoose to export a single track for your whole project, or to separate it by scene, sequence or act.

How to access the Export Audio window
1. Select File > Export > Audio.
The Export Audio dialog opens.

Parameter

Description
Allows you to specify the directory in which to save the exported files. You canDestination Path

click on the Browse

button right of the field to browse your file system andselect the destination folder.
Allows you to enter the prefix or the pattern for the names of the exported files.
You can leave this field blank to use the default file naming pattern, type in a filename to use it as a prefix, or type a full pattern using the following variables:
File Patternl%t - Project titlel%a - Act numberl%q - Sequence number

27

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxesl%s - Scene numberl%n - Audio track number

TIP
Numbers used in file naming patterns are automatically padded by zeros
as needed. You can type a number between the % sign and the variable
letter to determine the amount of characters you want the variable to use.
For example, with the variable %4s, scene 1 would appear as scene 0001.

Options
Process Audio Tracks
Individually

Exports each audio track in your project into separate sound files.

Merge All Audio
TracksMixes down all the audio tracks in your project into a single soundtrack before
exporting it.

Process Audio Tracks
Individually andMergedExports each audio track into separate sound files, then exports another file withall the audio tracks mixed together.

Don't Break Sound

Exports audio tracks spanning for the entire length of your project. If you chose tomerge audio tracks, you will have one sound file for the entire project. If you
chose to export audio tracks separately, you will have one sound file for eachaudio track in your project.

Break Sound Per
Scene

Breaks down each exported audio track into scenes. If you chose to merge theaudio tracks, you will have one sound file for each scene in your project. If you
chose to export audio tracks separately, you will have one sound file per scene
per audio track.

Break Sound Per
Sequence

Breaks down each exported audio track into sequences. If you chose to merge theaudio tracks, you will have one sound file for each sequence in your project. If you
chose to export audio tracks separately, you will have one sound file persequence per audio track. This option is only available if your project contains
sequences.

Break Sound Per Act

Breaks down each exported audio track into acts. If you chose to merge the audio
tracks, you will have one sound file for each act in your project. If you chose toexport audio tracks separately, you will have one sound file per actper audio track.
This option is only available if your project contains acts.

28

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Sound Settings

Sample Rate

Sets the frequency rate of the exported audio files. It is recommended to export
sound files at the rate at which they were originally created. For reference, thestandard sample rate is 48.0 kHz for broadcasting and DVD.
Sets the precision level of each wavelength in the sound file. The standard bit
depth is 16 bit. Setting this to 8 bit will cut the size of audio files in half, but will
significantly impact sound quality.

Bit Depth

NOTE
On Windows, audio can only be exported in 16 bit unless QuickTime
Player is installed.

Channels

Allows you to select whether to export sound in Mono or Stereo. Stereo sounduses a separate track for the left and right speakers, which allows to simulate arealistic sound environment. Mono uses a single track for both speakers, whichsaves disk space.

Export Range
All

Exports the entire storyboard’s audio.

Selected Scenes

Select this option and click Select to open the Scenes Picker dialog box in which
you can select specific scenes to export. You can also select your scenes per
sequence if your project contains sequences.

Current Scene

Exports only the currently selected scene's audio.

Open folder after export

Storyboard Pro automatically opens the folder that contains the exported audio
files.

29

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Export Bitmap Dialog Box
The Export Bitmap window lets you export a storyboard project to bitmap files in .jpg, .tga, .psd or .png format.
The exported data includes a separate bitmap file for each panel in the storyboard.
NOTE
For .psd files, the transform and transition animations are not exported. However, camera moves
are rendered into an independent layer.

How to access the Export Bitmap windowl

Select File > Export Bitmap.

Parameter

Description

Destination Path30

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Allows you to specify the directory in which to save the exported files. You canPathclick on the Browse

button right of the field to browse your file system andselect the destination folder.
Allows you to enter the prefix or the pattern for the names of the exported files.
You can leave this field blank to use the default file naming pattern, type in a filename to use it as a prefix, or type a full pattern using the following variables:

File Patternl%t - Project titlel%a - Act numberl%q - Sequence numberl%s - Scene numberl%p - Panel number

TIP
Numbers used in file naming patterns are automatically padded by zeros
as needed. You can type a number between the % sign and the variable
letter to determine the amount of characters you want the variable to use.
For example, with the variable %4s, scene 1 would appear as scene 0001.

Setup Bitmap Export Parameters
Allows you to select an image format in which to save the exported bitmaps:l

Jpeg (*.jpg): A very compact image format with lossy compression.

lTarga (*.tga): An image format with basic lossless compression.

Bitmap FormatllPhotoshop (*.psd): The format used to store Adobe Photoshop projects.
This format is uncompressed.
Portable Network Graphics (*.png): An image format with strong losslesscompression.

Resolution

Sets the resolution to be a quarter size, half size, or full size of the current
storyboard resolution.

Image Zoom Level(%)

Sets the magnification of the image. Enter a value between 0 and 400. The default
value is 85%.

Transparent
Background

This option is only available when the Adobe Photoshop (.psd) file format isselected. By default, this option is enabled and will export .psd files with atransparent background instead of an opaque white background.

31

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Print All Camera
FramesPrints a camera frame for each camera keyframe in the panel.

If the camera is at an angle in a panel, and there is no camera movement in thatpanel, enabling this option will render the panel as if the camera was at a straightangle.

Rectify Static Camera

This option is enabled by default. This ensures that when a camera close-up isincluded in a scene, the exported image is larger so that the closest camera frame
is at least the size of the chosen resolution. This way, the image will not appear
pixelated when zooming in on the closest camera frame. If disabled, the exported
images will be the size of the chosen resolution.
In the following example, the camera zooms out, but the image is exported big
enough that the closest (smallest) camera frame is exactly the size of the export
resolution. That way, if the image is zoomed in to the closest camera frame, itdoes not look scaled:
Allow Camera Scaling

Maintain Size
Through Scene

Ensures that the elements from the exported panels retain their size across thedifferent panels of the same scene. For example, when exporting a scene where
the camera zooms in on a character through two different panels, this option will
make it so the character is the same size in both exported images. In the same
situation with this option unchecked, both bitmaps will be just big enough sothat their closest camera frame is as big as the chosen export resolution.
In the following example, the camera zooms out on the scene throughout twopanels. In the exported images, the scene elements are the same size, but theimage canvas increases in size as the camera zooms out:

32

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

NOTE
By default, exported bitmaps cannot be larger than 4096 x 4096 pixels,
which might cause this option not to work as expected when exporting
scenes with camera zooms.

By default, exported panels only cover the area covered by the camera movementsin the panel. With this option enabled, exported panels will cover the area coveredby the camera movements in all the panels in their scene combined. That way, if
all the exported panels in a scene are combined, the elements of the scene will all
be in their proper position respective to each other.
In the following example, the camera goes from 1 to 2 in the first panel, then from
Expand Render Area
to Scene Camera

Include Camera Path

2 to 3 in the second panel, but both panels are exported to cover the wholecamera movement, from 1 to 2 to 3:

Ensures the exported images include all the areas covered by the camera
movements. If this option is disabled, the exported images will cover the camera
keyframes and everything in-between, but may not include parts of the panels
that are covered by curvilinear camera movements.

33

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Export All Snapshots

Snapshot Pattern

If your project has a panel that contains several snapshots, by default, only themain snapshot in that panel will be exported. If this option is enabled, panels that
contain several snapshots will be exported as several image files, one for eachsnapshot.
When exporting all the snapshots in a panel that contains several snapshots, thisfield allows you to customize how the number of the snapshot is appended to thefile name. The # symbol represents the number of the snapshot. Its default valueis -#, which means that a dash followed by the snapshot number is appended to
the file name. For example, if exporting panel 4 of scene 16, and that panel
contains three snapshots, the exported bitmaps for that panel would be named
MyProject-16-4-1.jpg, MyProject-16-4-2.jpg and MyProject-16-43.jpg.

NOTE
Only images for panels that contain several snapshots will have asnapshot number appended to their file name.

Export Range Tab
All

Exports the entire storyboard.
Select this option to export a specific selection of scenes. Then, click on the
Select button to open the Scenes Picker dialog box, in which you can:l

Selected ScenesllType the number of a sequence or of a scene in the Sequence or Scene
fields in the Filter section, to only show matching sequences or matching
scenes in the list.
Click and drag to select a range of scenes.
Hold the Ctrl key and click on each scene you want to add to yourselection.

34

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guidell

Hold the Shift key, then click on the first scene and the last scene youwant to add to your selection, to select every scene between those twoscenes inclusively.
If your project has sequences, click on a sequence to select every scene inthat sequence.

Current Scene

Exports only the currently selected scene.

Current Panel

Exports only the currently selected panel.

Tracked Panels - [0panel]

Exports panels on which tracking changes is enabled.

Burn-In Tab
Print Scene Names
and Panel Numbers

Prints the scene names and panel numbers as an overlay on your video.

Captions Tab

Print Captions

Choose whether to not print captions (None) or select one of your project’s
captions to print into the exported movies. By default, a Storyboard Pro project
has Action Notes, Dialog, Slugging and Notes captions, but you can also choose
to print custom captions if your project has any.

Font

Select which font the captions will be printed in. By default, they will be printed in
Arial.

Height %Sets the size of caption lines relative to the height of the exported movies. For
example, if exporting a movie at 1080p with 3% Height captions, each caption
line will be 32 pixels in height.

Position

Prints the captions at either the Top Left, Top Centre, Top Right, Bottom Left,
Bottom Centre or Bottom Right of the panels. By default, captions are printed to
the Bottom Centre.

Max Lines

Sets the maximum amount of caption lines to print on each panel. If a caption
being printed requires more than the maximum amount of lines, it will be cut off
with an ellipsis (...) at the end.

35

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

NOTE
Even if captions are printed at the bottom, they will be aligned to the topof the space reserved for them, which is calculated by the amount of Max
Lines x the Height %. Therefore, if this setting is too high and captions are
printed at the bottom, they may appear closer to the middle of the picture
than to the bottom.

Text Colour

Select the font colour in which to print the captions.

Bg Colour

Select the background colour on which to print the captions. If the checkbox isunchecked, the captions will be printed directly into the rendered picture.
Otherwise, they will be printed in rectangular boxes of the chosen colour.

Open folder after
exportLets you view the location and contents of the exported folder when it is ready.

36

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Export CSV Window
The Export CSV dialog allows you to export the metadata in a storyboard into a Comma Separated Value (.csv)
format table. You can then view and edit the Comma Separated Value (.csv) file in any standard spreadsheet
editor, such as Microsoft Excel, OpenOffice Calc or Google Sheets. This can be useful if you need to analyze any
specific aspect of your project. If you export your project's captions, you can also edit them, then import theedited .csv file back into Storyboard Pro to update your project's captions. This can be useful if you want toreview and edit your storyboard's captions in bulk using a more lightweight interface.
The exported .csv file will contain one row for each exported panel. It will also have at least one column, theObject Id column, which stores a special identifier composed of 16 hexadecimal characters for each panel inyour storyboard, making sure that Storyboard Pro can identify which row belongs to which panel in yourproject. Besides the identifier, you can select which type of data gets exported for each panel.

How to access the Export CSV window
1. Select File > Export CSV.

Parameter

Description

Destination Path

Lets you specify the location and name of the folder for the storyboard project37

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

data.
CSV Export Options

Encoding

Lets you select the text encoding for the .csv file. By default, this option is set
to UTF-8.

Field Separator

Lets you select the field separator character for the .csv file, among the following
options: Comma, Semicolon, Tab or Vertical bar (pipe).

Include Column
Names

Adds an extra header row at the top which indicates the purpose of each column
in the table.

Include Sequence
Names

Adds a Sequence column which indicates the number of the sequence for eachpanel.

Include Scene Names

Adds a Scene column which indicates the number or name of each scene for eachpanel.

Include Panel Names

Adds a Panel column which indicates the number or name of each panel.

Include Transitions

Adds a column for each transition in the project, between the rows
corresponding to the two panels that are joined by the transition.

Include Scene Frame
NumberAdds a column that indicates the length of the scene in frames.

Include Panel Frame
NumberAdds a column that indicates the length of the panel in frames.

Include Captions

Adds a column for each caption type in your project, and which will indicate thecontent of each caption type for each panel.

Include Rich Text
Formatting

If your captions have any formatting, check this option to export the content of
your captions in HTML, which will preserve the formatting of your captions. If thisoption is unchecked, your captions will be exported in plain text. They will beeasier to read and edit, but if you re-import the .csv file into your project, theformatting of the captions will be lost.

Include Camera
Information

Indicates whether the camera is static or dynamic (animated) for each panel.

38

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Include Layer Names

This will add as many columns as the amount of layers in the panel that has themost layers. For each panel, the name of each layer in the panel will be
indicated. Layers at the bottom are listed in the leftmost layer column, and layers
at the top are listed in the rightmost layer column.

IncludeTracking Information

Indicates whether or not the panel is tracked, the date at which the panel started
getting tracked, and the tracking notes added to that panel, if any.

Export Range
All

Exports the entire storyboard.
Select this option to export a specific selection of scenes. Then, click on the
Select button to open the Scenes Picker dialog box, in which you can:llSelected ScenesllType the number of a sequence or of a scene in the Sequence or Scene
fields in the Filter section, to only show matching sequences or matching
scenes in the list.
Click and drag to select a range of scenes.
Hold the Ctrl key and click on each scene you want to add to yourselection.
Hold the Shift key, then click on the first scene and the last scene youwant to add to your selection, to select every scene between those twoscenes inclusively.

l

If your project has sequences, click on a sequence to select every scene inthat sequence.

Current Scene

Exports only the currently selected scene.

Current Panel

Exports only the currently selected panel.

Tracked Panels - [0panel]

Exports panels on which tracking changes is enabled.

Open document/folder after
exportOpen the .csv file in your machine's spreadsheet editor immediately after creatingit.

39

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Export to FBX Dialog Box
The Export FBX dialog box allows you export scenes, sequences or your entire animatic into animated Filmbox(.fbx) files. This can be useful if your project has 3D elements. The exported Filmbox (.fbx) file will contain all the2D and 3D elements in your animatic as well as their animation. You can them import it in a third-party
software and use it as a template to create the 3D animations for your production.

How to access the Export to FBX dialog box
1. Select File > Export > FBX.
The Export to FBX dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Destination Path
Allows you to specify the directory in which to save the exported files. You canPathclick on the Browse

button right of the field to browse your file system andselect the destination folder.

File Pattern

Allows you to enter the prefix or the pattern for the names of the exported files.
You can leave this field blank to use the default file naming pattern, type in a filename to use it as a prefix, or type a full pattern using the following variables:l%t - Project titlel%a - Act number

40

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guidel%q - Sequence numberl%s - Scene number

TIP
Numbers used in file naming patterns are automatically padded by zeros
as needed. You can type a number between the % sign and the variable
letter to determine the amount of characters you want the variable to use.
For example, with the variable %4s, scene 1 would appear as scene 0001.

Options
Export Camera Frame

Includes the camera frame's black border in the scene.
Per Scene: Exports one clip per scene.

One Clip

Per Project: Exports one clip for the entire project.
Per Sequence: Exports one clip per sequence. This option is available only if yourproject contains sequences.

Export Range
All

Includes all the scenes in your project.

Current Scene

Includes only the scene you selected when you opened this dialog box.

Current Sequence

Includes only the scenes from the sequence you selected when you opened this
dialog box. This option will only be visible if your project contains sequences.

Open folder after export

Opens the folder in which files were exported in a file browser once the export is
done.

41

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Export Layout Dialog Box
The Export Layout window lets you export some or all the scenes of your project into layout images, which canbe used to properly position scene elements when working on different aspects of the scene throughout the
production. For example, a layout can be be imported in Harmony to accelerate its set up and properly position
the elements and camera keyframes of the scene. Also, a layout exported into .psd format can serve as the baseto create the background art for the scene so that it’s properly adapted to the scene’s layout, action andcamera movements.
Layout images can be rendered with all layers combined or with one image per layer, and can optionally include
camera keyframes and movements. Layouts can be exported in .psd (with separate layers), .tga, .jpg or .png
format.

How to access the Export Layout windowl

Select File > Export > Layout.

Parameter

Description

Destination Path42

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Allows you to specify the directory in which to save the exported files. You canPathclick on the Browse

button right of the field to browse your file system andselect the destination folder.
Allows you to enter the prefix or the pattern for the names of the exported files.
You can leave this field blank to use the default file naming pattern, type in a filename to use it as a prefix, or type a full pattern using the following variables:

File Patternl%t - Project titlel%a - Act numberl%q - Sequence numberl%s - Scene number

TIP
Numbers used in file naming patterns are automatically padded by zeros
as needed. You can type a number between the % sign and the variable
letter to determine the amount of characters you want the variable to use.
For example, with the variable %4s, scene 1 would appear as scene 0001.

Options
Allows you to select an image format in which to save the layout images:lJpeg (*.jpg): A very compact image format with lossy compression.

lTarga (*.tga): An image format with basic lossless compression.

File FormatllPhotoshop (*.psd): The format used to store Adobe Photoshop projects.
This format is uncompressed.
Portable Network Graphics (*.png): An image format with strong losslesscompression.

Transparent
Background

When exporting in Photoshop (*.psd) format, enable this option to render thelayers on a transparent background instead of a solid white background.

Base Image Size

Allows you to select whether you export at the same size as your project's
resolution, at half its dimensions or at a quarter of its dimensions.

Expand Render Area

Expands the area to render into the layouts. By default, only the area of the scenethat is covered by the camera is rendered, and exported layout images are cropped
at the edges of the camera frames. If enabled, this option adds space around therender area and captures extra details outside the camera frames. By default, therender area is expanded by 10%. You can use the input field to the right of the43

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

option to change this ratio.

Scale Image Up
to Smallest Camera
Frame

Ensures that when a camera close-up is included in a scene, the exported imageis larger so that the closest camera frame is at least the size of the chosen image
size. This way, the layout does not appear pixelated when zooming in on theclosest camera frame. If disabled, the size of the exported images will be based off
the chosen Base Image Size and Expand Render Area options.

Limit Image Size

If the Scale Image Up to Smallest Camera Frame option is enabled, this ensures
images do not get scaled up too much. If enabled, images will be limited to 4096
pixels in width and height by default.

Export One Image Per
Layer

Exports each layer as a separate image file. If Print Camera Frames option isenabled, the camera frames and camera movements will be printed on each layer.
When exporting one image per layer and with camera frames, if your layers are
animated, this option allows you to combine the layer's animation with thecamera movement that is printed on it. By following the resulting camera
movement, the layer will appear to be animated just like it is in your animatic.
For example, in a scene where a drawing layer moves towards the right, and thecamera moves up, the camera movement that will be printed on the layer's layout
image will be combined with that layer's animation, and the resulting camera
movement will go up and towards the left, so that the layer itself appears to movetowards the right.

Apply Layer Motion
to Camera

Print Camera Frames

Prints the first and last camera frame of each scene into the exported layout
images. If exporting in .psd format, the camera frames will be printed on a44

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

separate layer.
If a scene contains a camera movement with more than two keyframes, this prints
each camera keyframe into the layout.
Print a Frame for
Each Camera
Keyframe

Adds the camera position label in the top-left corner of each camera frame.
Camera frames are labeled with a letter of the alphabet indicating their respective
order.
Print Camera Labels

Export Range
All

Exports the entire storyboard.
Select this option to export a specific selection of scenes. Then, click on the
Select button to open the Scenes Picker dialog box, in which you can:llSelected Scenes

l

l

l

Current Scene

Type the number of a sequence or of a scene in the Sequence or Scene
fields in the Filter section, to only show matching sequences or matching
scenes in the list.
Click and drag to select a range of scenes.
Hold the Ctrl key and click on each scene you want to add to yourselection.
Hold the Shift key, then click on the first scene and the last scene youwant to add to your selection, to select every scene between those twoscenes inclusively.
If your project has sequences, click on a sequence to select every scene inthat sequence.

Exports only the currently selected scene.

45

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Open folder after export

Opens the folder in which files were exported in a file browser once the export is
done.

46

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Export to Movie Dialog Box
The Export Movie window lets you export your storyboard and animatic as a movie file which you can share andplay back. You can export your movie file in different formats (QuickTime, SWF movie (Flash), jpeg, targa) and asimage sequences.

How to access the Export to Movie window
1. Select File > Export > Movie.
The Export to Movie window opens.

Parameter

Description

Destination Path
Allows you to specify the directory in which to save the exported files. You canPathclick on the Browse

button right of the field to browse your file system andselect the destination folder.

File Pattern

Allows you to enter the prefix or the pattern for the names of the exported files.
You can leave this field blank to use the default file naming pattern, type in a filename to use it as a prefix, or type a full pattern using the following variables:

47

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxesl%t - Project titlel%a - Act numberl%q - Sequence numberl%s - Scene number

TIP
Numbers used in file naming patterns are automatically padded by zeros
as needed. You can type a number between the % sign and the variable
letter to determine the amount of characters you want the variable to use.
For example, with the variable %4s, scene 1 would appear as scene 0001.

Export Movie Format
Allows you to specify the format in which to export the movie. You can choose
between the following formats:
l

l

l

l

Movie FormatllWindows Media Video (*.wmv): A movie format available on Windows
only.
QuickTime Movie (*.mov): A movie format available on macOS as well as
Windows if Apple QuickTime is installed.
Flash (.swf): A movie format that supports vector graphics and which canbe embedded on the web.
Jpeg (*.jpg): A sequence if images in a lossy compressed format. This
format is faster to output and requires less storage space, but does notpreserve image quality.
Targa (.tga): A sequence of images in a lossless compressed format.
Portable Network Graphics (*.png): A sequence of images in a losslesscompressed format. PNG images require less storage space than TGA
images and are commonly supported by Web browsers and consumer
software.

NOTE
The option to export to Windows Media Video is only available on
Windows, and the option to export to QuickTime Movie is only available
on machines with QuickTime Player installed.

Movie Options

When exporting in Windows Media Video (.wmv), QuickTime Movie (.mov) orFlash (.swf) format, this opens a dialog in which you can select video and audio
compression settings for the movie files.

48

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

NOTE
For more information, see QuickTime Standard Video Compression

Settings Dialog Box, WMV Settings Dialog Box and Flash Export
Settings Dialog Box

Resolution

Sets the resolution to be a quarter size, half size, or full size of the current
storyboard resolution.
Allows you to select how to separate the exported movie files:l

One ClipllInclude Transitions

Per Scene: Create one movie file for each scene in your project.
Per Sequence: Create one movie file for each sequence in your project, if
any.
Per Project: Export your whole animatic into a single video file.

Includes transitions in your export movie files.

Export Range Tab
All

Exports the entire storyboard.
Select this option to export a specific selection of scenes. Then, click on the
Select button to open the Scenes Picker dialog box, in which you can:llSelected Scenes

l

l

l

Type the number of a sequence or of a scene in the Sequence or Scene
fields in the Filter section, to only show matching sequences or matching
scenes in the list.
Click and drag to select a range of scenes.
Hold the Ctrl key and click on each scene you want to add to yourselection.
Hold the Shift key, then click on the first scene and the last scene youwant to add to your selection, to select every scene between those twoscenes inclusively.
If your project has sequences, click on a sequence to select every scene inthat sequence.

Current Scene

Exports only the currently selected scene.

Current Panel

Exports only the currently selected panel.

49

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Tracked Panels - [0panel]

Exports panels on which tracking changes is enabled.

Burn-In Tab
Print Time CodePrints the project timecode on the video as an overlay on your video.

Print Scene Names
and Panel Numbers

Prints the scene names and panel numbers as an overlay on your video.

Print Additional
Duration

Prints another time code counting the time for the current panel, scene orsequence, depending on what is selected in the Repeat drop-down.

Units

Displays additional duration information using Time Code or Frames units.

RepeatDisplays additional duration information per panel, scene or sequence.

Camera Grid Tab
Title Safe Area: Prints the Title Safe Area over the picture. By default, this area isTitle Safe Area

20% smaller than the camera frame. It is used as a guideline of the area that CRT
displays might crop out of the picture. Visual elements such as text and logos
should be placed within this area.The size of this area can be changed in the
Camera tab of the Preferences dialog.

Action Safe Area

Action Safe Area: Prints the Action Safe Area over the picture. By default, thisarea is 10% smaller than the camera frame. It is used as a guideline of the area thatCRT displays might crop out of the picture. Characters and action should beplaced within this area. The size of this area can be changed in the Camera tab of
the Preferences dialog.

4:3 Safety

Prints the title safe area and the action safe area for the 4:3 camera frame over theexported image. They can be used to position elements in projects that are meant
to be displayed in both widescreen and 4:3 proportions.

4:3 Reference

Prints the 4:3 camera frame over the exported image. This frame corresponds tothe camera frame if the aspect ratio of the picture was 4:3. It can be used toposition elements in projects that are meant to be displayed in both widescreen
and 4:3 proportions.

50

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Captions Tab

Print Captions

Choose whether to not print captions (None) or select one of your project’s
captions to print into the exported movies. By default, a Storyboard Pro project
has Action Notes, Dialog, Slugging and Notes captions, but you can also choose
to print custom captions if your project has any.

Font

Select which font the captions will be printed in. By default, they will be printed in
Arial.

Height %Sets the size of caption lines relative to the height of the exported movies. For
example, if exporting a movie at 1080p with 3% Height captions, each caption
line will be 32 pixels in height.

Position

Prints the captions at either the Top Left, Top Centre, Top Right, Bottom Left,
Bottom Centre or Bottom Right of the panels. By default, captions are printed to
the Bottom Centre.
Sets the maximum amount of caption lines to print on each panel. If a caption
being printed requires more than the maximum amount of lines, it will be cut off
with an ellipsis (...) at the end.

Max Lines

NOTE
Even if captions are printed at the bottom, they will be aligned to the topof the space reserved for them, which is calculated by the amount of Max
Lines x the Height %. Therefore, if this setting is too high and captions are
printed at the bottom, they may appear closer to the middle of the picture
than to the bottom.

Text Colour

Select the font colour in which to print the captions.

Bg Colour

Select the background colour on which to print the captions. If the checkbox isunchecked, the captions will be printed directly into the rendered picture.
Otherwise, they will be printed in rectangular boxes of the chosen colour.

Open document/folder after
exportOpens the folder in which files were exported in a file browser once the export is
done.

51

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Export Project / Selected Scenes / Tracked Scenes Dialog Box(Conformation)
The Export Project dialog box lets you export your storyboard to a third-party software using XML or AAF
format. You can then edit your project, and import the changes back into Storyboard Pro.

How to access the Export Project dialog boxlSelect File > Conformation > Export Project.

Parameter

Description

Destination Path
Allows you to specify the directory in which to save the exported files. You can clickPathon the Browse

button right of the field to browse your file system and select thedestination folder.

File Pattern

Allows you to enter the prefix or the pattern for the names of the exported files. You
can leave this field blank to use the default file naming pattern, type in a file name to52

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guideuse it as a prefix, or type a full pattern using the following variables:l%t - Project titlel%a - Act numberl%q - Sequence numberl%s - Scene numberl%p - Panel number

TIP
Numbers used in file naming patterns are automatically padded by zeros asneeded. You can type a number between the % sign and the variable letter todetermine the amount of characters you want the variable to use. For
example, with the variable %4s, scene 1 would appear as scene 0001.

Render Images On Export

When enabled, this exports the images associated with the video clips. This isenabled by default. You can disable it if you are re-exporting your sequence anddon't need to export the images again, to save time. Otherwise, disabling this option
will cause the exported sequence to be missing the image files linked to the clips.

Choose Format
FormatLets you select export format, Final Cut Pro XML or Media Composer AAF.

Options

Export One ImagePer Layer

Exports the drawing layers in your panels as separate video clips instead offlattening them together to make one clip per panel. This option is only available
when exporting in Final Cut Pro XML format.

Always Nest
LayersWhen exporting one image per layer, this will store all the layers for a single panel
into a nested clip. By default, different layers are spread on different video tracks,
except when a panel contains both camera movements and layer animations.

Print Camera
Frame

Prints the camera frames on the exported images. The first camera frame will be
printed in green, and the last camera frame will be printed in red.

53

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

If the camera is at an angle in a panel, and there is no camera movement in thatpanel, enabling this option will render the panel as if the camera was at a straightangle.
Rectify Static
CameraBy default, the resolution of each image that is exported so that, at the end of acamera zoom-in, or at the beginning of a camera zoom-out, there is no pixelation.
This means that the smallest camera frame in each panel must be at least the same
resolution of the project. Hence, panels with small camera frames will have to beexported at a bigger resolution than other panels. For example, the following panel
must be exported in a bigger resolution than the project's resolution, so that thesmallest camera frame has the same resolution as the project:

Maintain image
size throughout
sceneThis can also mean that, within a same scene, a panel that has a camera zoom-in orzoom-out will have to be exported in a bigger resolution than the other panels in thescene. With this option enabled, all the panels in any given scene are exported in thesame resolution.

54

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

NOTE
The panels will appear as expected in your video editing software regardlessof whether or not this option is enabled.

By default, exported panels only cover the area covered by the camera movements inthe panel. With this option enabled, exported panels will cover the area covered by
the camera movements in all the panels in their scene combined. That way, if all theexported panels in a scene are combined, the elements of the scene will all be in
their proper position respective to each other.

Expand Render
Area to Scene
CameraIn the following example, the camera goes from 1 to 2 in the first panel, then from 2
to 3 in the second panel, but both panels are exported to cover the whole camera
movement, from 1 to 2 to 3:

Allows you to select the image format in which to save the exported panels:l

Jpeg (*.jpg): A very compact image format with lossy compression.

lTarga (*.tga): An image format with basic lossless compression.

llBitmap Format

Photoshop (*.psd): The format used to store Adobe Photoshop projects.
This format is uncompressed.
Portable Network Graphics (*.png): An image format with strong losslesscompression.

NOTE
Since the images exported for conformation are generally not imported into
the Storyboard Pro project when you re-import your sequence, the quality ofexported images is not critical. Hence, the default image format for
conformation is Jpeg (*.jpg). Although Jpeg images do not preserve picture
quality, they are quicker to export and do not use a lot of disk space.

Export Markers at
scene beginning

Places a chapter marker at the beginning of each scene. These markers are used tofind the in-point of each scene when conforming from Final Cut Pro to Storyboard
Pro. The markers are named "Scene:" followed by the name of their respective scene,

55

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

and they have a unique scene ID and chapter marker as their comment.
Export scenes
references track

Adds an extra video track to the sequence in which images indicating the number ofthe current scene are displayed.

Export captions

Includes the captions of each panel as metadata in the exported sequence. The
captions can be edited in the sequence, and importing modified captions will update
the captions in the Storyboard Pro project.

Include Rich Text
Formatting

If you're exporting the project's captions and your captions have special text
formatting, this will export the captions in HTML instead of plain text, to preserve
their formatting. If you export your captions in plain text, then re-import them, they
will lose their formatting. However, plain text captions are easier to read and edit inthird party software.

Burn-In
Print Scene Names
and Panel
Numbers

Prints the scene names and panel numbers as an overlay on your video.

Camera Grids
Prints the Title Safe Area over the picture. By default, this area is 20% smaller thanthe camera frame. It is used as a guideline of the area that CRT displays might cropout of the picture. Visual elements such as text and logos should be placed within
this area.
Title Safe Area

NOTE
The size of this area can be changed in the Camera tab of the Preferences
dialog.

Prints the Action Safe Area over the picture. By default, this area is 10% smaller thanthe camera frame. It is used as a guideline of the area that CRT displays might cropout of the picture. Characters and action should be placed within this area.
Action Safe Area

NOTE
The size of this area can be changed in the Camera tab of the Preferences
dialog.

56

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

4:3 Safety

Prints the title safe area and the action safe area for the 4:3 camera frame over theexported image. They can be used to position elements in projects that are meant tobe displayed in both widescreen and 4:3 proportions.

4:3 Reference

Prints the 4:3 camera frame over the exported image. This frame corresponds to thecamera frame if the aspect ratio of the picture was 4:3. It can be used to position
elements in projects that are meant to be displayed in both widescreen and 4:3
proportions.

Captions

Print Captions

Choose not to print captions (None) or select one of your project’s captions to print
into the exported bitmaps. By default, a Storyboard Pro project has Action Notes,
Dialog, Slugging and Notes captions, but you can also choose to print custom
captions if your project has any.

Font

Select which font the captions will be printed in. By default, they will be printed in
Arial.

Height %Sets the size of caption lines relative to the height of the exported bitmaps. For
example, if exporting bitmaps at 1080p with 3% Height captions, each caption line
will be 32 pixels in height.

Position

Prints the captions at either the Top Left, Top Centre, Top Right, Bottom Left,
Bottom Centre or Bottom Right of the bitmap. By default, captions are printed to the
Bottom Centre.
Sets the maximum amount of caption lines to print on each panel. If a caption being
printed requires more than the maximum amount of lines, it will be cut off with anellipsis (...) at the end.

Max Line

NOTE
Even if captions are printed at the bottom, they will be aligned to the top of
the space reserved for them, which is calculated by the amount of Max Linesx the Height %. Therefore, if this setting is too high and captions are printed
at the bottom, they may appear closer to the middle of the picture than tothe bottom.

Text Colour

Select the font colour in which to print the captions.

Bg Colour

Select the background colour on which to print the captions. If the checkbox isunchecked, the captions will be printed directly into the rendered picture. Otherwise,57

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

they will be printed in rectangular boxes of the chosen colour.

Notify Flix

When new XML data is exported, a message is sent to Flix so it will automatically
update its asset database. Note that Flix must be installed on your computer.

Open folder after
exportOpens the folder in which files were exported in a file browser once the export is
done.

58

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Export to EDL/AAF/XML Dialog Box
The Export to EDL/AAF/XML window allows you to export your animatic into a video editing sequence which
you can import in Non-Linear Editing (NLE) software such as Apple Final Cut Pro, Adobe Premiere, Avid
Xpress, Avid Media Composer or Sony Vegas.
The timing, motions, and sound clips in your project are preserved.

How to access the Export to EDL/AAF/XML window
1. Select File > Export > EDL/AAF/XML.
The Export to EDL/AAF/XML window opens.

Parameter

Description

Destination Path

Path

Allows you to specify the directory in which to save the exported files. You can

59

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

click on the Browse
button right of the field to browse your file system andselect the destination folder.
Allows you to enter the prefix or the pattern for the names of the exported files.
You can leave this field blank to use the default file naming pattern, type in a filename to use it as a prefix, or type a full pattern using the following variables:%t - Project title

File Patternl%a - Act numberl%q - Sequence numberl%s - Scene numberl%p - Panel number

TIP
Numbers used in file naming patterns are automatically padded by zeros
as needed. You can type a number between the % sign and the variable
letter to determine the amount of characters you want the variable to use.
For example, with the variable %4s, scene 1 would appear as scene 0001.

Export Type
Lets you elect the format in which to store the timing information (timecode forpanels and audio tracks). The format will be chosen depending on the destination
application:lGenerate EDL file: Can be imported in Final Cut Pro, Avid
Media Composer and Adobe Premiere.

NOTE
Due to limitations with the EDL format,
only the first four audio tracks in yourproject can be exported, and sound clips
that are used multiple times in the projectwill only appear one time in the exported
sequence.

l

Generate AAF file: Can be imported in Avid Media
Composer, Avid Xpress, Sony Vegas and Adobe Premiere.

60

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

NOTE
Due to limitation with the AAF format,
Slide-in and Slide-out transitions will be
converted to Dissolve transitions, Clock
Wipe transitions will always be exported
as 12 o’clock (0 degree) clockwisetransitions, and Edge Wipe transitions
will be exported as either Horizontal,
Vertical or Corner Wipe transitions.

lGenerate XML file: Can be imported in Final Cut Pro and
Adobe Premiere.

NOTE
If your editing system is not mentioned above, check its
specifications to verify which format can be imported.

Generate EDL, AAF,
XML File

Generates an EDL, AAF, or XML file.

Options
Movie clips can be exported in Windows Media Video (*.wmv) format on
Windows and in QuickTime Movie (*.mov) format on either Windows or Mac OS
if QuickTime Player is installed. This option can not be changed if only one movie
format is available for export.
Movie Format

NOTE
Not all editing systems support importing Windows Media Video files.
Check with your software’s documentation to see which movie file types
are supported.

Video Config

Click this button to configure the video settings. When exporting in QuickTime,
this allows to set the video codec, framerate and quality. When exporting in
WindowsMedia Video allows to set the video bit rate and variable bit ratequality.The resolution drop-down right of the Video Config button can be used todefine the output resolution, since you might not always need to export thestoryboard at full resolution. You can select Full, Half or Quarter of a project’s
resolution.

One Movie Clip Per

Exports more than one QuickTime movie clip per scene (which might contain61

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Panelmore than one panel) e.g. to obtain better granularity during editing since thestoryboard will have smaller movie clips.

Generate Video Files

If you only need the EDL, AAF or XML files to be generated, deselect this option
so no video files are rendered.
When enabled, the project’s sound files are copied to the same directory as the
EDL/XML/AAF files and the video files when exporting. Sound clips that are used
several times in the project will only be copied once and linked to several times in

Copy Audio Files

the EDL/XML/AAF sequence. Disabling this option can be useful if you are
overwriting a previous EDL/XML/AAF export of your project and have not madechanges to the sound clips in your project, as it will make the export faster.

NOTE
When this option is unchecked, the project’s audio tracks and their editing
data will still be exported into the EDL/XML/AAF sequence. Only theactual sound files will be missing.

Export Range Tab
All

Exports the entire storyboard.
Select this option to export a specific selection of scenes. Then, click on the
Select button to open the Scenes Picker dialog box, in which you can:llSelected Scenes

l

l

l

Type the number of a sequence or of a scene in the Sequence or Scene
fields in the Filter section, to only show matching sequences or matching
scenes in the list.
Click and drag to select a range of scenes.
Hold the Ctrl key and click on each scene you want to add to yourselection.
Hold the Shift key, then click on the first scene and the last scene youwant to add to your selection, to select every scene between those twoscenes inclusively.
If your project has sequences, click on a sequence to select every scene inthat sequence.

Current Scene

Exports only the currently selected scene.

Current Panel

Exports only the currently selected panel.

62

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Tracked Panels - [0panel]

Exports panels on which tracking changes is enabled.

Burn In Tab
Print Time CodePrints the project timecode on the video as an overlay on your video.

Print Scene Names
and Panel Numbers

Prints the scene names and panel numbers as an overlay on your video.

Print Additional
Duration

Prints another time code counting the time for the current panel, scene orsequence, depending on what is selected in the Repeat drop-down.

Units

Displays additional duration information using Time Code or Frames units.

RepeatDisplays additional duration information per panel, scene or sequence.

Camera Grid Tab
Prints the Title Safe Area over the picture. By default, this area is 20% smaller
than the camera frame. It is used as a guideline of the area that CRT displays
might crop out of the picture. Visual elements such as text and logos should beplaced within this area.
Title Safe Area

NOTE
The size of this area can be changed in the Camera tab of the Preferences
dialog.

Prints the Action Safe Area over the picture. By default, this area is 10% smaller
than the camera frame. It is used as a guideline of the area that CRT displays
might crop out of the picture. Characters and action should be placed within thisarea.
Action Safe Area

NOTE
The size of this area can be changed in the Camera tab of the Preferences
dialog.

4:3 Safety

Prints the title safe area and the action safe area for the 4:3 camera frame over theexported image. They can be used to position elements in projects that are meant

63

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

to be displayed in both widescreen and 4:3 proportions.

4:3 Reference

Prints the 4:3 camera frame over the exported image. This frame corresponds tothe camera frame if the aspect ratio of the picture was 4:3. It can be used toposition elements in projects that are meant to be displayed in both widescreen
and 4:3 proportions.

Captions Tab

Print Captions

Choose whether to not print captions (None) or select one of your project’s
captions to print into the exported movies. By default, a Storyboard Pro project
has Action Notes, Dialog, Slugging and Notes captions, but you can also choose
to print custom captions if your project has any.

Font

Select which font the captions will be printed in. By default, they will be printed in
Arial.

Height %Sets the size of caption lines relative to the height of the exported movies. For
example, if exporting a movie at 1080p with 3% Height captions, each caption
line will be 32 pixels in height.

Position

Prints the captions at either the Top Left, Top Centre, Top Right, Bottom Left,
Bottom Centre or Bottom Right of the panels. By default, captions are printed to
the Bottom Centre.
Sets the maximum amount of caption lines to print on each panel. If a caption
being printed requires more than the maximum amount of lines, it will be cut off
with an ellipsis (...) at the end.

Max Lines

NOTE
Even if captions are printed at the bottom, they will be aligned to the topof the space reserved for them, which is calculated by the amount of Max
Lines x the Height %. Therefore, if this setting is too high and captions are
printed at the bottom, they may appear closer to the middle of the picture
than to the bottom.

Text Colour

Select the font colour in which to print the captions.

Bg Colour

Select the background colour on which to print the captions. If the checkbox isunchecked, the captions will be printed directly into the rendered picture.
Otherwise, they will be printed in rectangular boxes of the chosen colour.

64

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Open folder after export

Opens the folder in which files were exported in a file browser once the export is
done.

65

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Export to Harmony Dialog Box
The Export to Harmony dialog allows you to export your animatic into a set of Harmony scenes. After theexport, you can open the scenes Toon Boom Harmony right away and kickstart the production of youranimation project. If you are working with Harmony Server, you can export a package of scenes that can beimported into your database using Control Center. The resulting Harmony scenes will be the same length as
the scenes in your Storyboard Pro project, they will contain each of their panels so that you may animate overthem, and they will contain their respective part of the animatic's soundtrack.
You can choose to export your animatic in rendered frames, which will not be editable in Harmony and can only
be used as reference, or to export the drawings, 3D objects and camera movements of each scene in yourproject directly into the Harmony scenes, allowing you to reuse its elements in Harmony. If you are rendering
your animatic, you can choose whether you want to export one scene for the whole project, for each sequenceor for each act, whereas if you want to export original scenes, you can only export one Harmony scene for eachscene in your animatic.
TIP
If you want to exclude some elements from getting exported to Storyboard Pro, you can selectlayers in the Layers view and uncheck the Export To: Toon Boom option for these layers.

How to access the Export to Harmony dialog
1. In the top menu, select File > Export > Export to Harmony.

66

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

The Export to Harmony dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Destination Path
Allows you to specify the directory in which to save the exported files. You canPathclick on the Browse

button right of the field to browse your file system andselect the destination folder.
Allows you to enter the prefix or the pattern for the names of the exported files.
You can leave this field blank to use the default file naming pattern, type in afile name to use it as a prefix, or type a full pattern using the following
variables:
File Patternl%t - Project titlel%a - Act numberl%q - Sequence numberl%s - Scene number

67

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

TIP
Numbers used in file naming patterns are automatically padded byzeros as needed. You can type a number between the % sign and thevariable letter to determine the amount of characters you want thevariable to use. For example, with the variable %4s, scene 1 would
appear as scene 0001.

Export Type

FormatLets you select whether to export your animatic into Harmony Offline scenes,
Harmony Database scenes or Animate/Animate Pro scenes.

VersionWhen exporting Harmony Offline or Harmony Database scenes, lets you selectwhether to export scenes that are compatible with Harmony version 7.8 orwith Harmony version 9.2 or Higher.

Export Style
Renders the animatic into a sequence of bitmap images that are assembled into
the exported Harmony scenes. This ensures that the content of your animaticis accurately rendered in Harmony, especially if you intend to use an older
version.
Resolution: Allows you to select the resolution of rendered frames relative tothe project resolution between the following options: Full Size, Half Size or
Quarter Size.
Generate One Scene: Allows you to select how to separate the project into
Harmony scenes:
Rendered Animaticl

Per Scene: Generates one scene for each scene in your project.

l

Per Sequence: Generates one scene for each sequence in your project.

l

Per Act: Generates one scene for each act in your project.

Optimize Still Images: When there is no animation or camera movement for acertain time span, a single drawing is rendered and its exposure is rendereduntil there is movement. If this option is disabled, one frame is rendered forevery frame in your animatic, regardless of if there is movement or not.
Animatic on Top: If you generate scenes based on sequences or acts, thisoption becomes available. When enabled, the animatic is rendered and placed

68Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

as the top layer and column in Harmony or Animate.
Exports the animatic directly into Harmony scenes without rendering it. This
preserves the layers, drawings and camera movements so that they can beused in Harmony.
Nest Panels in Symbols: Upon export to Harmony or Animate, the panel'scontent will be nested inside symbols. Instead of having several layers in yourroot timeline, you will have a single one. You will need to enter the symbol to
Original Scene

edit its content.
Add Camera Reference Layer: Adds a layer containing the different camera
frames on top of the other layers to use as a reference in Harmony andAnimate.
Apply Transformation on Drawings: Applies transformation on the first andlast position of each panel. The in-between animation will be lost.

Export Range Tab
All

Exports the entire storyboard.
Select this option to export a specific selection of scenes. Then, click on the
Select button to open the Scenes Picker dialog box, in which you can:llSelected Scenes

l

l

l

Current Scene

Type the number of a sequence or of a scene in the Sequence or Scene
fields in the Filter section, to only show matching sequences ormatching scenes in the list.
Click and drag to select a range of scenes.
Hold the Ctrl key and click on each scene you want to add to yourselection.
Hold the Shift key, then click on the first scene and the last scene youwant to add to your selection, to select every scene between those twoscenes inclusively.
If your project has sequences, click on a sequence to select every scene
in that sequence.

Exports only the currently selected scene.

Sounds Tab

69

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxesll

ProcessingllKeep Original Files: Copies the sound clips from your project into theexported scenes, without mixing them.
Process Audio Tracks Individually: Creates a mixed sound file for eachaudio track and stores each sound file into its own sound layer in theexported scene.
Merge All Audio Tracks: Creates a single sound file with all the audio
tracks merged and stores it into a single sound layer in the exported
scene.
Process Audio Tracks Individually and Merged: Creates a single soundfile for each audio track and stores each sound file into its own soundlayer, then adds an extra sound layer with all the audio tracks merged
together. .

Allows you to enter the prefix or the pattern for the names of the exported files.
You can leave this field blank to use the default file naming pattern, type in afile name to use it as a prefix, or type a full pattern using the following
variables:

File Patternl%t - Project titlel%a - Act numberl%q - Sequence numberl%s - Scene numberl%n - Sound track number

TIP
Numbers used in file naming patterns are automatically padded byzeros as needed. You can type a number between the % sign and thevariable letter to determine the amount of characters you want thevariable to use. For example, with the variable %4s, scene 1 would
appear as scene 0001.

Sample Rate

Sets the frequency rate of the exported audio files. It is recommended to export
sound files at the rate at which they were originally created. For reference, thestandard sample rate is 48.0 kHz for broadcasting and DVD.

Bit Depth

Sets the precision level of each wavelength in the sound file. The standard bit
depth is 16 bit. Setting this to 8 bit will cut the size of audio files in half, butwill significantly impact sound quality.

70

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

NOTE
On Windows, audio can only be exported in 16 bit unless QuickTime
Player is installed.

Channels

Allows you to select whether to export sound in Mono or Stereo. Stereo sounduses a separate track for the left and right speakers, which allows to simulate arealistic sound environment. Mono uses a single track for both speakers, whichsaves disk space.

Burn-In Tab
Print Time CodePrints the project timecode on the video as an overlay on your video.

Print Scene Names andPanel Numbers

Prints the scene names and panel numbers as an overlay on your video.

Print Additional
Duration

Prints another time code counting the time for the current panel, scene orsequence, depending on what is selected in the Repeat drop-down.

Units

Displays additional duration information using Time Code or Frames units.

RepeatDisplays additional duration information per panel, scene or sequence.

Camera Grid Tab
Prints the Title Safe Area over the picture. By default, this area is 20% smaller
than the camera frame. It is used as a guideline of the area that CRT displays
might crop out of the picture. Visual elements such as text and logos shouldbe placed within this area.
Title Safe Area

NOTE
The size of this area can be changed in the Camera tab of thePreferences dialog.

Action Safe Area

Prints the Action Safe Area over the picture. By default, this area is 10%
smaller than the camera frame. It is used as a guideline of the area that CRT
displays might crop out of the picture. Characters and action should be placed
within this area.

71Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

NOTE
The size of this area can be changed in the Camera tab of thePreferences dialog.

4:3 Safety

Prints the title safe area and the action safe area for the 4:3 camera frame overthe exported image. They can be used to position elements in projects that aremeant to be displayed in both widescreen and 4:3 proportions.

4:3 Reference

Prints the 4:3 camera frame over the exported image. This frame corresponds
to the camera frame if the aspect ratio of the picture was 4:3. It can be used toposition elements in projects that are meant to be displayed in bothwidescreen and 4:3 proportions.

Scene Options Tab
When enabled, you can use the options below to set the parameters of theWrite node for the exported Harmony scenes, so that you won't have to
configure the Write node for each exported scene individually in Harmony.
Custom Write NodeParameters

If this option is disabled, the Write node in the exported Storyboard Pro scenes
will have the following default options:lDrawing Folder: frameslDrawing Filename: final-lDrawing Type: TGA

The path to the folder in which to save the rendered frames. This path can beabsolute or relative to the scene's folder. For example, the default path for
rendered frames is frames, which means the images are saved in the frames
subfolder of the scene folder. If you want to select an absolute path, you canclick on the Browse

button at the right of the text field and select the folder

in which your scenes should export their frames.
Image Render Path

You can type a simple path, so that every exported scene has the same image
render path, or you can define a different image render path for each scene bytyping in a pattern using the following variables:l%t - Project titlel%a - Act numberl%q - Sequence numberl%s - Scene number

72

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

The prefix for the file name of each exported frame. Frames will be named withthis value, followed by the frame number and their image type extension. It is
recommended to leave the hyphen (-) at the end of the prefix to separate theprefix from the frame number.

Image Filename

Image Format

Open folder after export

You can type a simple prefix, so that it is the same for all the exported scenes,or you can define a different prefix for each scene by typing in a pattern using
the following variables:l%t - Project titlel%a - Act numberl%q - Sequence numberl%s - Scene number

The image format in which the rendered frames will be saved.
Opens the folder in which files were exported in a file browser once the export
is done.

73

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Write Node Image Formats for Harmony
When exporting Harmony scenes from your Storyboard Pro project, you can choose to customize theparameters of the Write node which will create the rendered frames of your scenes. One of the most complex
parameters for a scene's Write node is the Image Format, as it has a very extensive set of options.

Most available formats are named after their file extension, but some also contain suffixes indicating how
they're encoded. For example, while PNG is exported with three colour channels—red, green and blue—andencoded at 8 bits per channel by default, PNG4DP is a variant of PNG with four channels—red, green, blue
and alpha (transparency)—as well as double precision, which means each colour channel is encoded in 16 bits
instead of 8 bits.
Here is a list of all the image formats supported for rendering with Write nodes in Harmony
FormatSpecification

Description
Toon Boom Vector Graphic (*.tvg)
Toon Boom's proprietary format for storing vector drawings.

TVG

NOTE
To export TVG files, your Write node must be connected to avector drawing layer or to a vector composite node. The
exported TVG files will contain the vector and bitmap
drawing information, but will ignore effects anddeformations.

74

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

TGA

Full colour

TGA1

Greyscale

TGA3

Full colour

TGA4

Full colour withtransparency

SGI

Full colour / 8 bits perchannel

SGI1

Greyscale / 8 bits perchannel

SGI3

Full colour / 8 bits perchannel

SGI4

Full colour withtransparency / 8 bits
per channel

SGIDP

Full colour / 16 bits perchannelSGIDP3Full colour / 16 bits perchannelSGIDP4

Full colour withtransparency / 16 bits
per channel

PSD

Full colour / 8 bits perchannelTruevision TGA/TARGA (*.tga)
A standard image format with lossless compression and support fortransparency.
TGA files use more disk space than PNG files, but rendering in TGA isfaster.

Silicon Graphics Image (*.sgi)
A highly capable format with lossless compression as well as support
for double precision and transparency.

Photoshop Document (*.psd)
PSD1

PSD3

Greyscale / 8 bits perchannel

An Adobe Photoshop proprietary format used for image editing.
PSD files exported by Harmony contain a single background layer
with the rasterized image.

Full colour / 8 bits perchannel75

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

PSD4

Full colour withtransparency / 8 bits
per channel

PSDDP

Full colour / 16 bits perchannel

PSDDP1Greyscale / 16 bits perchannel

PSDDP3Full colour / 16 bits perchannel

PSDDP4

Full colour withtransparency / 16 bits
per channel
Y'UV frame (*.yuv)
A legacy format optimized for NTSC television. The image informationis encoded in the Y'UV color space, which means Luma (Y') and
Chrominance (UV).

YUV

NOTE
YUV images must be exported in NTSC resolution (720 x 540),
or they will not be legible.

PAL frame (*.pal)
A legacy format optimized for PAL television.
PAL

NOTE
PAL images must be exported in PAL resolution (768 x 576),
or they will not be legible.

Toon Boom Scan Files (*.scan)
A Toon Boom proprietary format used by Scan to store scanned
image information along with its registration (peg) information. SCAN
files are in gresycale.

SCAN

PNG

Full colour / 8 bits per

Portable Network Graphics (*.png)

76Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

channel

PNG4

Full colour withtransparency / 8 bits
per channel

PNGDP

Full colour / 16 bits perchannelPNGDP3Full colour / 16 bits perchannelPNGDP4

Full colour withtransparency / 16 bits
per channel

A highly portable image format with high lossless compression as
well as support for transparency and double-precision. PNG is
typically used for Web applications, graphical user interfaces andimage sharing.
Rendering in PNG takes more time than rendering in TGA or in
uncompressed image formats, but saves a lot of disk space.

Jpeg (*.jpg)
A very compact image format with lossy compression. It is typicallyused for Web pages and photo sharing. Because it does not preserve
image quality, it is recommended to never render in Jpeg format
unless you are exporting stills for a Web page or are making quick

JPG

render tests.
BMP

Full colour

BMP4

Full colour withtransparency

OPT

Full colour

OPT1

Greyscale

OPT3

Full colour

OPT4

Full colour withtransparency

Bitmap (*.bmp)
A standard uncompressed image format commonly used on Microsoft
operating systems.

Toon Boom OPT image (*.opt)
A legacy Toon Boom proprietary format that stores raw image datawith lossless compression.

Toon Boom VAR image (*.var)
VAR

A legacy Toon Boom proprietary format that stores raw image datawith lossless compression in greyscale.

77

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Tagged Image File Format (*.tiff)
An image format with many compression and encoding settings. It is
often used for image exchange in visual arts and publishing.

TIF

TIFF images exported by Harmony are uncompressed, encoded on a
per-pixel (interleaved) basis in PC byte order.

DPX

8 bits per channel / Fullcolor / RGB channel
order

DPX3_88 bits per channel / Fullcolor / RGB channel
order

DPX3_1010 bits per channel /Full color / RGB
channel order

DPX3_12

12 bits per channel /Full color / RGB
channel order

DPX3_16

16 bits per channel/ Full color / RGB
channel order

DPX3_10_
INVERTED_CHANNELS

10 bits per channel /Full color / BGR
channel order

DPX3_12_
INVERTED_CHANNELS

12 bits per channel /Full color / BGR
channel order

DPX3_16_
INVERTED_CHANNELS

16 bits per channel /Full color / BGR
channel order

Digital Picture Exchange (*.dpx)
A professional photo format that supports various different
approaches to storing colour information, which can be used forstoring, exchanging and editing raw information recorded by cameras.
It is commonly used in film production.

OpenEXR (*.exr)
EXR

A highly capable deep image format. Each pixel in an EXR file isexported with its Z-depth information. Additionally, if a pixel is semi-78

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

transparent, the color and depth information of pixels further back isstored along with it. If your scene has multiplane or 3D elements, thisformat can be used for compositing your animation with othergraphical elements in 3D animation software.
Portable Document File (*.pdf)

PDF

Typically, PDF files are used to store, archive, share and print
documents. However, Harmony uses the PDF format for its capability
to store bitmap images and vector graphics.
If the write node is connected to a vector drawing layer or to a vector
composite, the exported PDF files will contain the image as a vector
graphic. It will ignore bitmap layers, effects and deformations.
Otherwise, the PDF files will contain the rendered image as a bitmap.
Deep Texture (*.dtex)
A commonly used deep image format. Each pixel in an DTEX file isexported with its Z-depth information. Additionally, if a pixel is semitransparent, the color and depth information of pixels further back isstored along with it. If your scene has multiplane or 3D elements, thisformat can be used for compositing your animation with othergraphical elements in 3D animation software.

DTEX

NOTE
Exporting in Deep Texture requires RenderMan to beinstalled on the machine and the path to RenderMan properly
configured in Harmony. For more information, see the Setting

3D Renderer Paths topic of the User Guide.For more
information, see the Setting 3D Renderer Paths topic of theHarmony User Guide.

79

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Export to PDF Window
The Export to PDF window lets you export a storyboard project as a PDF file or share electronically.

How to access the Export to PDF window
1. Select Export > PDF.

Parameter

Description

Destination Path

Lets you specify the name and location of the PDF file you are creating.

PDF Export Parameters

3 Panels Horizontal

This is a classic layout of a printed storyboard. It consists of three panels per
page, including captions, in an horizontal arrangement.

80

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

3 Panels Vertical

This is a classic layout of a printed storyboard. It consists of three panels per
page, including captions, in a vertical arrangement.

Full Page

This layout consists of one large panel per page, including captions.

Overview 2x4 Panels

This layout consists of a total of eight panels per page, organized on two rows offour, with captions in the middle.

Overview 4x3 Panels

This layout consists of a total of 12 panels per page, organized in three rows offour. No caption is included.

Typical JapaneseFormatThis layout consists of a total of five panels by page, aligned on the left side of
the page. Captions and duration are aligned in two consecutive rows on the rightside. Note that your PDF reader and system may require an additional font
package in order to display the PDF file properly.

Alternate Vertical
LayoutThis layout consists of a total of 5 panels per page, aligned on the left side of thepage. Captions are organized on the right size of each panel. This export also
includes a cut and a duration column, and displays the duration of each scene at
the beginning of every new one.

Overview 8x10This layout consists of a total of 80 panels per page, organized in ten rows offour. No caption is included.

Alternate JapaneseFormatThis layout consists of a total of 5 panels per page, aligned on the left side of thepage. This export includes vertical columns for the dialog, action, sluggin, notes,
and time (duration) column which is displayed near the end of each scene(optionally). The scene name appears near the top of the first panel of a scene.
The caption titles appear at the top and do not repeat at each panel. The total
duration appears at the bottom of the page.

New Profile

Creates a completely new layout.

Duplicate Profile

Makes a copy of the selected layout from the list.

Edit Profile

Lets you edit the selected layout from the list.

Delete Profile

Deletes the selected layout from the list.

Document Security

81Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Need Password
Protection

Adds password protection to the PDF file.

Master Password

Lets you enter an administrator password. The owners of this password will not
be bound by document security. The password must have a minimum of six
characters.

User Password

Lets you enter a user password. The owners of this password are bound to theprotection options you define. The password must have a minimum of six
characters.

Confirm

Lets you re-enter the master and user passwords to validate them.

Printable

Gives the user permission to print the storyboard.
Gives users the following PDF permissions:

Edit All•

Changing the Document•

Document Assembly•Filling of Form Fields•

Signing•

Creation of Template Pages

Gives users the following PDF permissions:
Copy•

Content Copying•

Content Copying for Accessibility

Gives users the following PDF permissions:
Edit

Remember Protection
Settings•

Commenting•

Filling of Form Fields•

Signing

Keeps your settings as the default.

Export Range
All

Exports the entire storyboard.

82

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Select this option to export a specific selection of scenes. Then, click on the
Select button to open the Scenes Picker dialog box, in which you can:llSelected ScenesllType the number of a sequence or of a scene in the Sequence or Scene
fields in the Filter section, to only show matching sequences or matching
scenes in the list.
Click and drag to select a range of scenes.
Hold the Ctrl key and click on each scene you want to add to yourselection.
Hold the Shift key, then click on the first scene and the last scene youwant to add to your selection, to select every scene between those twoscenes inclusively.

l

If your project has sequences, click on a sequence to select every scene inthat sequence.

Current Scene

Exports only the currently selected scene.

Current Panel

Exports only the currently selected panel.

Tracked Panels - [0panel]

Exports panels on which tracking changes is enabled.

Open document after export

Opens the PDF file after export.

83

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Extract Storyboard Dialog Box
The Extract Storyboard Dialog Box lets you divide a storyboard into several parts. Each export portion of thestoryboard will be saved as a different file. You can choose to save an intact copy of the entire storyboard or
divide the project into separate files.
IMPORTANT
If you want to keep the extracted scenes in the original project, and later import the changes madeto the extracted projects back into the original project using the Merge and Replace dialog, it ishighly recommended to lock you project's scene and panel numbers before splitting your project. To
do this, in the top menu, select Storyboard > Lock Scene and Panel Names.

How to access the Extract Storyboard dialog box
1. Select File > Project Management > Extract.

The Extract Storyboard window opens.

Parameter

Description

ScenesThe list of scenes in your project. You can select one or several scenes in this list,
and decide to save the selected scenes into their own project.

Extract Selected
Scenes

Prompts you to select the location and project name in which to save the scenesthat are selected in the Scenes list. Once you are done, a new item containing therange of scenes that you selected will be added to the Projects list below.

84

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

NOTE
This adds a project to extract to the list of projects, but the projects are
not actually extracted until you click the OK button.

Projects

Remove Selected
Projects

Remove extracted scenes
from current project

Displays the list of projects which you have chosen to extract. This list willcontain a new item every time you select scenes in the Scenes list, then choose alocation and name for them with the Extract Selected Scenes button.
Removes the project that is currently selected in the Projects list from the list. Use
this button if you made a mistake in the scenes and projects you want to extractand need to try again.
Removes the extracted scenes from the project. If you want to keep the entire
storyboard project intact as a master project, uncheck this option.

85

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Find Sound Clips Dialog Box
The Find Sound Clips dialog box allows you to search through your project's audio tracks for its sound clips. You
can search using the full name or part of the name of a sound clip, including its extension. You can iterate
through the sound clips that match your search string, or simultaneously select all matching sound clips.
When iterating through matching sound clips, it cycles through audio tracks vertically, from top to bottom, thenfrom left to right. For example, if three matching sound clips are cued at the same time and a fourth one is cued
much later, it will go through the matching sound clips that are cued at the same time first, from the top one tothe bottom one, then to the clip cued later.

How to access the Find Sound Clips dialog box
1. Do one of the following:l

In the top menu, select Clips > Find Sound Clips.

lRight-click anywhere in one of your project's audio tracks, then select Find Sound Clips.

The Find Sound Clips dialog box appears.

Paramter

Description

SearchThe search string to use for finding sound clips. Clips will match if part or all of their clip namematches the search string.
If checked, sound clips will only match the search string if their name is in the same case as thesearch string.

Case Sensitive

For example, the search strings "sound clip" or "SOUND CLIP" would only match a clip named"Sound Clip.wav" if the Case Sensitive option is unchecked. If it is checked, only the searchstring "Sound Clip" would match with that clip name.

86Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Paramter

Scroll Verticallyon FindFind All

Description

By default, when clicking on the Previous or Next button, the Timeline view will only scroll
horizontally to the position of the sound clip it finds. If this option is selected, the Timeline view
will also scroll vertically to display the matching sound clip.
If your project has a lot of audio tracks and the Timeline view in your workspace hasn't been
expanded to display them all at the same time, you might need to scroll up or down to find amatching sound clip, since the matching sound clip might be in an audio track that is not
currently visible.
Simultaneously select all the sound clips that match the search criteria, without moving thetimeline playhead or scrolling the Timeline view.
Search for a matching sound clip before the starting search position. If a sound clip is found,the Timeline view will scroll to the sound clip, it will become selected, and the timeline playhead
will be moved to the beginning of the sound clip.

Previous

NOTE
If no sound clip is selected, it will start searching from the position of the timeline
playhead. If a sound clip is selected, it will start searching from the position of that soundclip.

Search for a matching sound clip after the starting search position. If a sound clip is found, theTimeline view will scroll to the sound clip, it will become selected, and the timeline playhead will
be moved to the beginning of the sound clip.
Next

NOTE
If no sound clip is selected, it will start searching from the position of the timeline
playhead. If a sound clip is selected, it will start searching from the position of that sound
clip.

Close

Close the dialog box.

87

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Find Text Window
The Find Text window lets you find a specific part of your text. This can become very handy when you have alarge number of captions and text in your project.

How to access the Find Text Windows
1. In the Panel or Storyboard view, select any caption field.
2. Do one of the following:‣

Click the Caption Menu

button and select Find Text in Captions.

‣

Select Caption > Find Text in Captions.

‣

Press Ctrl + Shift + F (Windows) or ⌘ + Shift + F (Mac OS X).

The Find Text in Captions dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Find

Lets you type in the word to search.

Replace

Lets you type in the word that will replace the word you are searching.

Case sensitive

The case of the word is included as a search factor.

Text field

This is where information about the search is displayed.

Direction
Forward andBackward

Searches for the word in the forward or backward direction.

88

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Find

Locates the first word found in the search and displays it in the Storyboard or
Panel view. The word is highlighted in blue.

Replace

Replaces the searched word with the word you specified in the Replace field.

Replace All

Replaces all instances of the word you are searching and replaces it with theword you specified in the Replace field.

89

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Flash Export Settings Dialog Box
The Flash Export Settings dialog box lets you compress and set the video quality of the movie you areexporting.

How to access the Flash Export Settings dialog box
1. Select File > Export > Movie.
The Export to Movie window opens.

2. In the Movie Format drop-down, select Flash (*.swf).
3. Click Options.
The Flash Export Settings dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

90

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Protect from ImportProtects the movie from being imported into another application and have its
assets extracted.

Compress

Applies standard lossless compression to the exported Flash file, to make it use
less disk space.

JPEG Quality

Allows you to set the JPEG compression quality of bitmap images in the exported
Flash file. All bitmap images in a Flash movie are encoded in JPEG format to save
space. Increasing this setting will increase the quality of bitmap images in theexported movie, and decreasing this setting will make it use less disk space.

91

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Generate Auto-Matte Dialog Box
The Generate Auto-Matte dialog box enables you to quickly fill in sketch objects, hiding anything that is behindthe object.

How to access the Generate Auto-Matte dialog box
1. Do one of the following:l

In the top menu, select Layer > Generate Auto-Matte.

l

In the layer panel, right-click on a layer and select Generate Auto-Matte.

Parameter

Description

Radius

The radius used to analyze the drawing to generate its matte. The default value is
200 and its value can range between 1 and 9999. A lower setting will create amore precise matte but may make the generation slow and the resulting matte too
detailed for its purpose. A higher setting will make a more approximate matte.

Matte Colour

The colour to fill the matte with. By default, this is set to Current, which is thecurrently selected colour in the Colour view. You can select Custom in the dropdown, then click on the colour swatch to select a different colour.
If checked, a new layer will be created under the source layer and the matte will be
stored in that layer. The new layer will have the name of the source layer followed
by _Matte. If unchecked, the matte will simply be added to the source drawing in
its source layer, behind the existing artwork.

Create Matte on New Layer

NOTE
When creating a matte on a new layer, all of the source layer's properties(ie: alignment, export options, opacity) as well as its transformations andanimations are copied onto the new layer.

Copy Strokes to

If checked, the contours of the source drawing will be copied onto the matte, as

92

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Destination

invisible strokes. This separates the matte into different sections that you can fillwith different colours, based on the outlines of the drawing.

93Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Import CSV Window
The Import CSV window lets you update your spreadsheet if there are major changes, such as the dialogue.
Working this way allows you to import the updated CSV into Storyboard Pro to update all caption fields.

How to access the Import CSV window
1. Open the Storyboard Pro project you want to update.
2. Select File > Update Captions from CSV.
The Import CSV window opens.

Parameter

Description

Folder location

Lets you locate the .csv file.

ReportDisplays the caption fields that were updated. Any captions you modify in the*.csv file are also updated in the caption fields of your Storyboard Pro
project.CSV files exported from Storyboard Pro are UTF-8. CSV files can be
modified in Microsoft Excel if all the characters are part of the Latin character set.
If non-Latin characters are used, the CSV files can be edited using Open
Office.CSV files exported from Storyboard Pro can be edited in either Microsoft
Excel or Open Office. Excel does not display non-English characters properly andwill not recognize them when importing to Storyboard Pro.

94

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Import from Final Draft Dialog Box
The Import from Final Draft dialog box allows you to import a Final Draft script and generate a new Storyboard
Pro project with it, with empty scenes and panels automatically generated based on your script's structures,and the script's action notes and dialogues automatically copied to their respective panel's caption fields.

For example, you can import a Final Draft script and, among other things:lCreate a new scene in your project for each Scene Heading element in your script.

lCreate a new panel in your project for each Action element in your script, and copy the action into thatpanel's Action Notes caption.

lCreate a new panel in your project for each combination of Character and Dialogue elements or for eachcombination of Character and Parenthetical elements in your script, and copy the character's name andtheir dialogue or parenthetical into the panel's Dialog caption.

lCreate a new transition in your project for each Transition element in your script.

lCreate a new act in your project for each New Act element in your script.

How each type of element in your script translates into a structuring element or caption in your Storyboard Pro
project is entirely configurable.
NOTE
For more information on how to create a new project with a Final Draft script, refer to the User
Guide.

How to access the Import from Final Draft dialog box
1. In the top menu, select File > New from Final Draft Script.
The Import from Final Draft dialog box appears.

95Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

NOTE
You cannot access this dialog box from the Welcome screen. Therefore, you must either
open an existing project or create a new project before you can access this dialog box
from the top menu.

Parameter

Description

The path to the Final Draft script you are importing.
Script file

You can click on the

Browse button on the right to open a dialog box that will allow you tobrowse for and select your script.

Scriptelements
list

The list of all element types included in your Final Draft script. These may include Action, Character,
Dialogue, Scene Heading, Shot, Transition, End of Act, New Act, General, and any other type ofelement, including custom elements.
You can select an element in this list, then configure what Storyboard Pro will do with each
instance of this type of element it finds in your script in the Element Options section of this dialog.

Element Options
What to do each time an element of the selected type is found in your script.
When you import a Final Draft script as a new Storyboard Pro project, Storyboard Pro goes throughyour script from top to bottom and, for every element in your script, it performs the action you
selected for that element type, so as to create the structure of your project.
For example, you can select Scene Heading in the Elements list, then select New Scene in theaction drop-down, so that Storyboard Pro generates a new scene in your Storyboard Pro project foreach Scene Heading element it finds in your script.
lActionNone: Does not create anything in your project for this type of element.

NOTE
Even if an element is not configured to perform any action, its text can still be storedin captions. If you select a caption in the Destination caption field drop-down, its
text will be stored in that caption field, but for the last panel that was generated.

l

New Act: Creates a new act in your project whenever an instance of this element isencountered in your script. The act is named after the text content of this element.
Typically, this action should be selected for New Act elements.

l

New Sequence: Creates a new sequence in your project whenever an instance of this96

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Parameter

Description

element is encountered in your script.
l

New Scene: Creates a new scene in your project whenever an instance of this element isencountered in your script.
Typically, you should select this action for Scene Heading elements.

l

New Panel: Creates a new panel in your project, whenever an instance of this element isencountered in your script.
Typically, this action should be selected for Action elements, as well as Character elements,
as they are usually used to signify that a character is about to speak.

l

New Transition: Creates a new transition in your project whenever an instance of thiselement is encountered in your script.
Typically, this action should be selected to Transition elements.

NOTE
A transition is always followed by a new scene in Storyboard Pro.

l

Combinesuccessive
elements

IncludeElement
Numberwhen
available

Destination
captionfield

New Scene Prefix: Sets the prefix to add to the name of every ensuing scene. The name ofevery scene created after this element will start with the text in this element, followed by its
scene number

If this option is enabled for the selected element type, when Storyboard Pro finds several
consecutive elements of this type in your script, it will only perform the selected action in the
Action drop-down for the first of these consecutive elements.
For example, if you configure Action elements to generate new panels, by default, a new panel will
be generated for every Action element in your script. However, if you also enable this option for
Action elements, then consecutive Action elements will only generate a single panel, and their text
content will be added to the same caption field, separated by paragraph breaks.
In Final Draft, it is possible to number scenes, or any type of element for that matter. If this option isenabled for an element type that is numbered in your Final Draft script, Storyboard Pro will add thatelement's number before the element's text when importing it into a caption field.
For example, if your Character elements are numbered in your script, you set each Character element
to be imported into your project's Dialogue caption fields, and you enable this option for Character
elements, each character name that is added to a panel's Dialogue caption field will be preceded byits character number.
The caption field in which to import the element's text.
For example, it is typical to import Character, Dialogue and Parenthetical elements into the Dialog
captions, and the Action elements into the Action Notes captions.

97

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Parameter

Description

NOTES
l

l

If the selected element is configured to create a new panel, then its text will be
stored in the captions for that new panel. Likewise, if the selected element isconfigured to create a new scene, sequence or act, its text will be stored in thecaptions for the first panel in the scene, sequence or act. Otherwise, it will be
stored in the captions for the last generated panel.
If several consecutive elements are set to be imported into the same caption field,
their text will be added to that same caption field in the order in which they appear
in the script, separated by paragraph breaks.

Allows you to instantly create a caption field for your project, so that you can import specific script
elements into caption fields that are not created by default.

Addcaptionfield

For example, Storyboard Pro has four default caption fields: Dialog, Action Notes, Slugging andNotes. You could choose to store Scene Heading elements into the Notes caption of theirrespective panel, or you may want to store Scene Heading elements into a caption field of theirown, which you could name "Scene Heading" or "Setting". This button allows you to create suchcustom caption fields for your project on the fly.
To create a new caption field, simply click on this button and, in the dialog that appears, type thename of the new caption and click OK.

TIP
If you accidentally created a caption field that you don't want to use, you can leave it in for
now and delete it from your project later.

Save asdefault
rules

If this option is checked, when you click on Import, the current configuration will be saved, and will
be reloaded next time you attempt to create a project from a Final Draft script.

ImportImports the Final Draft script, then opens the New Project dialog. In this dialog, you can set thename, location and resolution of your new project. Once you confirm the information for the new
project, Storyboard Pro will generate a new project using your Final Draft script. It will create
scenes, panels and, depending on the settings you chose, sequences and acts based on the
structure of your script, and will copy snippets of your script into each panel's captions, as you
configured it to do.

Close

Dismisses the dialog and returns to the currently open project.

98

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Import Images Dialog Box
The Import Images dialog box lets you import an image into your project as layers or scenes. The imported
image will be vectorized in colour and fit the camera frame.

How to access the Import Images dialog box
1. Do one of the following:lSelect Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Storyboard Pro > Preferences (macOS).

l

Press .

2. In the User Preferences dialog box, select the Import/Export tab.
3. Select the Display Vectorize Options Dialog option.

4. Select File > Import > Images as Layers.
5. In the browser that opens, select an image to import.
The Import Images dialog box opens.

99Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

The preview area displays the original image on the left and the resulting image on the right. The
preview of the resulting image automatically updates each time you modify a parameter.

Parameter

Description

Import Options
As Bitmap Layer

Preserves the exact look of the imported images and imports it in a bitmap layer.

Colour to Vector
Layer

Preserves the exact look of the imported images and imports it in a vector layer.

Gray Scale to Vector
Layer

Imports the selected images as a gray scale in a vector layer.

Imports the images as black line art.
Threshold (%): Filters out noise in your images. Noise can be dirt or faintsmudges on your scanned images. For example, if your value is set to 70%, allcolour values below 70% are converted to white and ignored in the final image. If
your value is set to 100%, only completely black lines will be kept.
Black and White to
Vector Layer

Expand: Enter a value between 1 and 100 to thicken lines or the outer edges ofthe bitmap. Use this option if your line art is too fine or pale so that their visibility
is increased in the software.
Smooth: Enter a value between 1 and 5 to set the smoothness level. Greatersmoothness equals less jaggedness and imperfections, but at a greater loss todetail.

Resampling Options
Original Size

The original dimensions of the imported image.

Maxiumum SizeEnter a specific maximum size for your imported image to be scaled down to. The
original ratio of the image will be preserved during the operation. You can see thefinal values resulting from the scaling process in the Scale Size fields. Note thatyou can not use these fields to scale up an image.

Scaled Size

Displays the final size the image will be scaled after it is imported in your project.

100

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

SourceDisplays the source image you imported.

Preview

Displays a preview of the image when adjusting its parameters.

Save as default

Saves the current settings. Every time you open this dialog box, the new default
parameters will automatically be set. The import images commands will still use
this new default even if you deselect the Display Vectorize Options Dialog
preferences.

Do not show this dialog
again

Deselects the Display Vectorize Options dialog option in the Preferences dialog
box directly from here.

101Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Conformation Import Project Dialog Box
The Import Project dialog allows you to import a sequence which you exported for conformation, edited in athird party video editing software and re-exported for import in Storyboard Pro. You can import a sequence inFinal Cut Pro XML Interchange Format (.xml), or in Advanced Autoring Format (.aaf).
NOTES
lRefer to your video editing software’s documentation to learn how to export the animatic
project in XML or AAF format.

l

It is recommended to only import a sequence which was originally exported from the same
project via Storyboard Pro. If you import a video editing sequence that was not originally
exported from your project, the panels in your sequence will be imported as bitmap images.

How to access the Import Project window
1. In your original storyboard project, select File > Conformation > Import Animatic Project.

Parameter

Description

You can click on the Browse
Sequence

button next to the Sequence field to browse forand select the AAF or XML sequence which you exported from your video editing
software.

Options

Process Audio

Changes to audio tracks, new audio tracks, deleted audio tracks, as well as

102

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Parameter

Descriptionchanges to sound clips, their in and out points, their volume envelope, deleted
sound clips and new sound clips in the imported sequence will be conformed
into your Storyboard Pro project. Uncheck this option if you do not wish to makeany changes to your project's audio tracks and sound clips.
Changes to panels such as their cue time, their length, their order, deleted panels,
new panels, transitions, camera movements and, in the case of XML sequences,

Process Videolayers and layer animations in the imported sequence will be conformed into your
Storyboard Pro project. Uncheck this option if you do not wish to make anychanges to your project's storyboard and animatic, but only to the audio tracks or
captions.

TIP
You can import audio tracks composed from scratch in a video editing
software by exporting them into an XML or AAF sequence, then importing
the sequence via this dialog, with the Process Video option unchecked.

Changes to the panel captions in the imported sequence will be conformed into
your Storyboard Pro project.

Process Captions

NOTE
If you exported your captions without Rich Text Formatting, and madechanges to them, they will lose their formatting when the changed
captions are imported into your project.

ReportWhen you click on the Import button, this will display information about eachstep of the conformation process, as well as any error it encounters in theprocess, if any.

ImportOnce you have selected the XML or AAF sequence and the options you want,click on the Import button to import the sequence and apply to changes that weremade to it to your Storyboard Pro project.

Close

Dismiss this dialog box.

103

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Import Sound Clips Dialog Box
The Import Sound Clips dialog box lets you import sound clips.
You can import sound clips (.wav, .aif, .aiff, or .mp3) into an audio track at the first frame or at the current frame.
If the sound clip does not already exist in your project, Storyboard Pro copies the file from its present location to
the audio folder in your storyboard project folder. You must work in the Timeline view.
IMPORTANT
It is not recommended to work .mp3 files as it is a compressed format. Long .mp3 files may notproperly sync with the action in your project.

How to access the Import Sound Clips dialog box
1. In the Timeline view, select the audio track in which you want to import sound clips.
2. Do one of the following:l

In the top menu, select File > Import > Sound Clip.

l

Right-click on the audio track in which you want to import sound clips, then selectImport Sound Clips.

lRight-click on the empty space below the tracks in the Timeline view, then selectImport Sound Clips.

The Import Sound Clips dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Source Sound Clips

Allows you to browse for and select the sound files to import as sound clips.

104

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Destination
New Audio Tracks

Determines in which audio track the sound clips are added.
Adds the imported sound clips onto their own new audio tracks.
Adds the imported sound clips to the currently selected audio track.

Current Audio Track

NOTE
This option is unavailable if no audio track is selected.

Position

Determines at which frame in the timeline the new clips are added.

First Frame

Adds the imported sound clips at the first frame of the project.

Current Frame

Adds the imported sound clips just after the timeline cursor.
When importing in an existing audio track, this decides what happens if theclips are imported where sound clips are already present.

Import Rule

NOTE
These options are unavailable if no audio track is selected.

Overwrite ExistingSound Clip

If there are existing sound clips where the imported clips are supposed to be
added, the existing clips will be overwritten.

Fill Next Available
FramesIf there are existing sound clips where the new clips are supposed to be added,
the clips will be trimmed just before the existing clips.

Set as default and don't show
dialog again

If this option is enabled, the next time you want to import sound clips,
Storyboard Pro will prompt you to browse for the sound files to import, anduse the currently selected options without displaying this dialog.

105

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Import Videos/Images as Clips
The Import Videos/Images as Clips dialog allows you to import still images or movie files into video tracks in yourprojects. Video tracks are independent from your animatic. They can be put above the storyboard track todisplay video and image clips over the elements in the storyboard, or underneath the storyboard track todisplay its clips behind the storyboard.
Movie files can be imported as video clips to be played in your projects. Still images can be imported as static
video clip which can be made to last any amount of time.
You can import any image file supported by Storyboard Pro as a video clip. You can also import movie files in
QuickTime Movie (.mov) or MPEG-4 (.mp4, .m4v) format which are encoded with the H.264. On Windows only,
you can also import Windows Media Video (*.wmv) files, and on macOS only, you can also import QuickTime
Movie (.mov) files encoded in Apple ProRes.

How to access the Import Sound Clips dialog box
1. Do one of the following:l

In the top menu, select File > Import > Videos/Images as Clips.

lRight-click on the video track in which you want to import clips, then select Import
Videos/Images as Clips.

lRight-click on the empty space below the tracks in the Timeline view, then select Import
Videos/Images as Clips.

The Import Video Clips dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Source Files

Allows you to browse for and select the image or movie files to import as clips.

Destination

Determines in which video track the clips are added.

106

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Parameter

New Video Tracks

Description

Adds the imported video clips onto their own new video tracks.
Adds the imported video clips to the currently selected video track.

Current Video Track

NOTE
This option is unavailable if no video track is selected.

If you are importing image clips, this determines the amount of frames each image
clip will span over.

Clips Duration

Since image clips are just still images being displayed for a set amount of time,
you must decide their duration in the animatic. If you are importing movie files,
the duration of the video clip will be the duration of the original movie file and thisfield will be ignored.
The value of this option is in frames. For example, if you want the image clip tolast for 1 second, and the frame rate of your project is 24 frames per second, set
this option to 24.
When importing in an existing video track, this decides what happens if the clips
are imported where videos clips are already present.

Import Rule

NOTE
These options are unavailable if no video track is selected.

Overwrite ExistingSound Clip

If there are existing video clips where the imported clips are supposed to be
added, the existing clips will be overwritten.

Fill Next Available
FramesIf there are existing video clips where the new clips are supposed to be added, theclips will be trimmed just before the existing clips.

107Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

List Picker Dialog Box
The List Picker dialog box lets you select specific captions for export to a PDF document.

How to access the List Picker dialog box
1. In the Panel PDF Options dialog box, make sure the Export All Captions option must be deselected,
then click the Browse button in the Caption List field.

108

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Manage Tool Presets Dialog Box
The Manage Tool Presets dialog box lets you import, export, delete, and update existing tool presets. Anychanges you make to the tool presets are reflected in the Tool Presets toolbar.

How to access the Manage Tool Presets dialog box
1. In the Tool Presets toolbar, click the Manage Tool Presets

button.

Parameter

Description

List of tool presets

Name of the currently selected tool preset.

ImportLets you import tool presets that other Storyboard Pro artists created.

ExportLets you export tool presets to share with other Storyboard Pro artists.

Deletes the selected tool presets.

Name

Name of the currently selected tool preset.

Icon

Lets you select an icon to associate with the selected tool preset or upload your
own.

109

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

ShortcutLets you set a keyboard shortcut to quickly access your preset. By default, theshortcuts are unassigned. To assign a keyboard shortcut, select Edit >Preferences > Shortcuts > Tool Presets (Windows) or Storyboard Pro >Preferences > Shortcuts > Tool Presets (macOS).

ColourIncludes the current colour in the new tool preset.
Lets you select a drawing layer to be used on the current panel when the tool
preset is clicked. When selecting the preset, if the assigned layer exists, it will beLayerselected, if not, it will be created. When changing panels, depending on yourglobal navigation setting, it will look for the layer. If it does not exist, the first layer
will be selected. Select the Layer option, assign a layer to the tool preset, anddecide whether the layer is vector or bitmap.

Draw Behind

When this option is selected, saves the specified Draw Behind option to the tool
preset. When deselected, the current Draw Behind status is unchanged when thetool preset is clicked

Auto Flatten

When this option is selected, saves the specified Auto-Flatten state to the tool
preset. When deselected, the current Auto-Flatten state is unchanged when thetool preset is clicked

Tool Preview

Displays the size and colour of the tool preset.

110Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Marker Dialog Box
The Marker dialog box enables you to change the previously-set or default parameters of a marker.

How to access the Marker dialog boxlSelect Storyboard > Markers > Edit Marker.

Parameter

Description
Express the duration of the marker in time code. The default value is 00:00:00.00.

Duration

This parameter will not appear in the marker’s tooltip until the default value ischanged.

ColourSets the colour of the marker. The default value is red. Once this parameter ischanged, every marker added afterwards will have this colour until a new colour is
set.

Note

Gives a name to the marker. The note can represent an action, noise, object andso on, that happens at the time marked by the marker. This parameter will notappear in the marker’s tooltip unless something is entered in the text field.

111

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Merge Layers Dialog Box
The Merge Layers dialog box lets you combine selected layers. Using the Merge Layers dialog box gives you
more control over the way you are merging layers than the Merge Down and Merge Selected Layers
commands. Among other things, you can pick a name for the resulting layer, specify whether it is a vector or
bitmap layer, select the source layers, and more.
NOTElWhen merging layers, the animation on all layers being merged is discarded.

l

If you quickly merge a bitmap layer with a vector layer, the resulting layer will be a bitmap layer.

l

Layers containing a 3D object cannot be merged.

l

The artwork in hidden layers is not added to the merged artwork.

How to access the Merge Layers dialog box
1. Select the layers to merge.
2. Do one of the following:l

Right-click and select Merge Layers.

lSelect Layer > Merge Layers.

The Merge Layers dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

112

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

New Layer
Name

Name of the new layer.

Vector Layer

Makes the merged layer a vector layer. If there are bitmap layers in your selection,
they will be converted to vector rectangles with a bitmap texture inside them.

Bitmap Layer

Makes the merged layer a bitmap layer. If there were vector layers in yourselection, they will be converted to bitmap.

Bitmap Canvas SizeIf your merged layer is bitmap, set the Bitmap Canvas Size parameters.

Resolution Factor

Determines the amount of pixels to store for each pixel that displays on thescreen when the drawing is not zoomed in or scaled up. For example, at 100%,
zooming in or scaling up a bitmap drawing will make it lose picture quality. If set
to 200%, bitmap drawings can be zoomed in or scaled up until they're twice their
original size without losing picture quality.

Width Factor and
Width

The default width of the canvas when creating a bitmap drawing layer. The
percentage is relative to the width of the project. Its default value, 200%, makes
the width of the canvas twice the width of the stage.

Height Factor andHeight

The default height of the canvas when creating a bitmap drawing layer. The
percentage is relative to the height of the project. Its default value, 200%, makes
the height of the canvas twice the height of the stage.

Source Layers
Delete Source Layers

Deletes the source layers.

Remove Invisible
LayersRemoves invisible or hidden layers. This option is available only if the Delete
Source Layers option is selected. Whether you decide to delete them or not,hidden layers will not be merged, even if selected from the list.

113

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Merge Storyboard Dialog Box
The Merge Storyboard dialog box lets you reassemble a storyboard project that was split or extracted into
several files. By merging several projects into one, you can have one final Storyboard Pro project.

How to access the Merge Storyboard dialog box
1. Select File > Project Management > Merge.
The Merge Storyboard window opens.

Parameter

Description

List of Storyboard Pro
projects

Displays the list of Storyboard Pro projects selected for merging into your current
project.

Import Project

Allows you to browse for and select a Storyboard Pro project to add to the list of
projects to merge.

Remove Project

Removes the selected project from the list of projects to merge.

Move Up

Moves the selected project up in the list of projects to merge.

Move Down

Moves the selected project down in the list of projects to merge.

114

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Allows you to make sure the caption fields in the projects being merged areproperly matched with the caption fields in your project. The left column is for thecaption fields of your current project. They cannot be modified from this dialog.
The other columns are for the caption fields of the projects getting merged.
In most cases, the caption fields for the projects being merged will match andStoryboard Pro will automatically align caption fields that have the same nametogether. In the case of exceptions, you can reorganize the caption fields of the
projects being merged, minding that the following behaviours will take place:l

If a caption field of one of the project being merged is aligned with one of
the caption fields in the current project, the values for that merged
project's field will be added to the current project's field it is aligned with,for all the scenes that are imported from that merged project, even if thesefields don't have the same name.
For example, if the current project has a caption field named Action andthe project being merged has a caption field named Action Notes, andthey are both aligned horizontally, once the projects are merged, the valueof the Action Notes caption field for the scenes being imported will be
stored in the Action field.

Captions list

l

l

l

l

If a caption field for the project getting merged is below all the fields in thecurrent project, it will be added as a new field to the current project.
If a caption field for the project getting merged is below all the fields in thecurrent project and is crossed out, it will be ignored.
If a caption field for the project getting merged is aligned with one of the
fields of the current project and is crossed out, this field will be empty for
all the scenes that are imported from that project.
If a caption field is added to the project but has the same name as anexisting caption field, it will have a suffix number.

Add Caption

If you have removed a caption from one of the projects getting imported, you canselect the removed caption and click on this button to add it back.

Remove Caption

Ignores the currently selected caption field for the project it is under. The values
for that caption field and project will not be imported in the current project.

Move Up

Moves the selected caption field up in the list of captions, changing which
caption field in the original project it is matched with.

Move Down

Moves the selected caption down in the list of captions, changing which caption
field in the original project it is matched with.

Force scene numbering

By default, if any scene being merged to the current project has the same name asa scene that is already in the project, it will have a suffix letter added to it. With

115

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

this option enabled, all scenes in the project will be re-numbered sequentially.

Start scene base name

If the Force scene numbering option is selected, enter a number in this field. The
number you enter will be assigned to the first scene in the resulting project.

Use project name as scene‘sprefixScenes that are added to the current project from other projects will have theirproject name as a suffix, so you can easily identify which projects they came fromand to avoid naming conflicts.

Create new audio tracks

Imports the audio tracks from the other projects by adding them as new audio
tracks to the current project. If this option is unchecked, the sound clips of otherprojects will be inserted in the current project's existing audio tracks and new
audio tracks will only be created if the merged projects have more audio tracks
than the current project.

116

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

QuickTime Movie Settings Dialog Box
The QuickTime Movie Settings dialog box allows you to configure the video and audio compression settings
when exporting a QuickTime Movie (.mov) file. It uses Apple QuickTime's interface.

NOTE
On Windows, Apple QuickTime must be installed to be able to export QuickTime Movie (.mov) files.

How to access the QuickTime Movie Settings dialog box
1. In the top menu, select File > Export > Movie.
The Export to Movie dialog box opens.

117Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

2. Click Movie Options.
The Movie Settings dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Video

118

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Settings

Opens the Standard Video Compression Settings dialog box. This is where you
can set the video compression settings for the movie you will export—see
QuickTime Standard Video Compression Settings Dialog Box on page 188.

FilterOpens the Choose Video Filter dialog box, where you can select from a range offilters to apply to your video export.

Size

Opens the Export Size Settings dialog box. This dialog is available because of theway the Apple QuickTime interface is designed, but its settings are not taken inaccount by Storyboard Pro. The size of the exported video is determined by
Storyboard Pro.

Sound

Settings

Opens the Sound Settings dialog box. This is where you can you set the soundcompression settings for the movie you will export—see QuickTime Sound
Settings Dialog Box on page 182.
If this option is enabled, the video will be optimized to start playing while it isdownloading, as videos do in web browsers and web-based streaming
applications.
lPrepare for Internet
Streamingll

Fast Start: The video plays as soon as enough data required to start
playback has been downloaded.
Fast Start - Compressed Header: Same as Fast Start, except the header iscompressed for an even faster start. Requires QuickTime 3.0 or later.
Hinted Streaming: Allows you to optimize the movie file for streaming
through QuickTime Server Software. Click on the Settings button toconfigure how hints are created in your movie file.

119Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Multiwheel Colour Window
The Multiwheel Colour window lets you select and customize colours, create solid or gradient colours, store
colours in the colour storage library, open the Colour Picker window and undo actions.

How to access the Multiwheel Colour window
1. In the Colour view, make sure the Colour area is expanded by clicking the Collapse/Expand arrow.
2. Double-click on the current colour swatch.
The Colour Picker window opens.
3. Click Multiwheel.
The Multiwheel Colour window opens.

Parameter

Description

Single Wheel Mode

Opens the Colour Picker window—see Colour Picker Window on page 20.

Current Colour

Displays the current colour on the left side. On the right side is the currently you120

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

are modifying.
Colour slider

Displays the colour gradation of the colour selected in the colour picking area.

Colour picking area

Displays a colour range with a cursor which you can drag to select a colour. This
display changes when you select one of the these options: H, S, V, R, B, or B.

Dropper

Lets you select a colour from any place on your screen. Hold down the Dropperand drag to the desired colour and release to select the colour.

Colour Scale

Displays the hue selected in the colour picking and colour slider areas, and its
different values.

Add Colour

Adds the selected colour to the colour storage library.

Colour Storage LibraryLets you save colours you have defined.

Alpha

Lets you change the transparency level by typing in a value or dragging the slider.

Solid

Creates an even, uniform colour.

Gradient

Lets you create a linear or radial gradient.

Gradient Scale

Displays a colour range and arrows. Move the arrows to define the gradientcolours.

Gradient Preview

Displays a preview of the gradient as you move the arrows on the gradient scale.

LinearCreates a linear gradient.

RadialCreates a radial (circular) gradient.

View
Undo List

Shows or hides the Undo list.

HSV Wheels

Shows or hides the HSV colour wheels.

RGB Wheels

Shows or hides the RGB colour wheels.

121

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Undo List

Displays a list of actions you can undo by clicking a swatch in the list.

HSV

Displays the hue, saturation or value of a selected colour in the colour picking
area.

RGB

Displays the red, green or blue colour wheel.

122

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

New Project Window
The New Project window lets you create a new project. If a project is already open and you want to create a
new one, use the File menu. Note that the content of the project directory will appear when you save theproject for the first time.

How to access the New Project window
1. Do one of the following:lSelect File > New.

l

In the File toolbar, click the NewlPress Ctrl + N (Windows) or ⌘ + N (Mac OS X).

button.

The New Project dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Project Name

The name of the storyboard project. This name will appear as the file name.

Project Directory

The location of your new project.

Project Title

The name of the project. It is a good idea to use the same name for the project
name and project title.

Project Subtitle

The titles that will appear on the appropriate pages of PDF exports.

Camera Size

Displays a list of resolutions for you to choose from for your project.

123

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Width
HeightFrame Rate

The parameters of the resolution you chose from the Camera Size menu. Note thatyou cannot change these parameters.

Field of View

Add

Opens the New Resolution window from which you can create a custom
resolution.

RemoveRemoves a custom resolution from the Camera Size menu.

124

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

New Resolution Window
The New Resolution window lets you create a custom resolution. Your new resolution will appear in the Camera
Size menu of both the New Project window and Welcome screen.

How to access the New Resolution window
1. In the Welcome screen or New Project window, click the Add

button to add a new resolution to

the list.
The New Resolution box opens.

Parameter

Description

Resolution Name

This is name you give the custom resolution. Your new resolution will appear in the Camera
Size menu of both the New Project window and Welcome screen.

Resolution
WidthThis is the width of the resolution that will be created.

HeightThis is the height of the resolution that will be created.

AspectRatio

Displays the ratio between the horizontal and vertical dimensions of the scene. For example,
if the scene width and height are the same value, this ratio equals 1. The standard aspectratio for widescreen televisions is 1.777. For legacy displays, it is 1.333.

Field of View
Horizontal

Adjusts the image's size so that its width matches the scene's width, without affecting its

125Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

aspect ratio.

Fit

Adjusts the image's size so that its height matches the scene's height, without affecting its
aspect ratio.

VerticalFit

CustomFov

After selecting this option, enter a value, in degrees, of the angle that you want the camera
cone to be. Increasing this value will make the camera cone wider (the angle is more obtuse).
Widening the FOV will make the grid and all elements appear farther away. Decreasing thedefault value will create the opposite effect.

Frame Rate

PresetAllows you to select a frame rate for your scene among one of many commonly used preset
frame rates.

126

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

NOTE
The standard framerate for film production is 24 frames per second. However,televisions in some countries play at 25 frames per second. Some productions may use
23.976 frames per second to preserve compatibility with legacy standard displays.

FramesperSecondAllows you to type in the frame rate for your scene.

127Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

New Tool Preset Dialog Box
The New Tool Preset dialog box lets you create a new tool preset. You will need to select a tool, adjust theproperties, and then create a tool preset for it. Once you have created a tool preset, you can make adjustments
to fine-tune it, as well as create a keyboard shortcut for it. All tool presets are displayed in the Tool Presets
toolbar.

How to access the New Tool Preset dialog box
1. In the Tool Presets toolbar, click the Manage Tool Presets

button.

Parameter

Description

Name

Name of the currently selected tool preset.

Icon

Lets you select an icon to associate with the selected tool preset or upload yourown.

ColourIncludes the current colour in the new tool preset.

ShortcutLets you set a keyboard shortcut to quickly access your preset. By default, theshortcuts are unassigned. To assign a keyboard shortcut, select Edit >Preferences > Shortcuts > Tool Presets (Windows) or Storyboard Pro >Preferences > Shortcuts > Tool Presets (macOS).

128

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Layer

Lets you select a drawing layer to be used on the current panel when the tool
preset is clicked. When selecting the preset, if the assigned layer exists, it will beselected, if not, it will be created. When changing panels, depending on yourglobal navigation setting, it will look for the layer. If it does not exist, the first layer
will be selected. Select the Layer option, assign a layer to the tool preset, anddecide whether the layer is vector or bitmap.

Draw Behind

When this option is selected, saves the specified Draw Behind option to the tool
preset. When deselected, the current Draw Behind status is unchanged when thetool preset is clicked

Auto Flatten

When this option is selected, saves the specified Auto-Flatten state to the tool
preset. When deselected, the current Auto-Flatten state is unchanged when thetool preset is clicked

Tool Preview

Displays the size and colour of the tool preset.

129Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Optimize Project Dialog Box
The Optimize Project dialog box allows you to flatten all drawings in your project, remove unused files andreduce the texture size.
NOTE
Strokes drawn with different colours will not be flattened together.

How to access the Optimize Project dialog box
1. Select File > Optimize Project.
The Optimize project dialog box opens.

IMPORTANT
Performing projects optimizations will clear the Undo list. The operations performed by this dialog
cannot be reversed.

Parameter

Description

Remove unused elementsfrom the projectAs you create a storyboard you will delete panels or layers, update drawings,
unlink sounds, and so on. Some of these files are kept for backup purposes, butthey take up space and increase the size of your project on your hard drive. This
option removes these unwanted elements.

Flatten drawings in the
project

Flattens all the brush or pencil line strokes of all the vector drawings in yourproject. This means that all overlapping strokes will no longer be editable assingle strokes, but only as whole, drawn objects.

Reduce texture resolution of
all drawings in the project

Reduces the resolution of bitmap textures in drawings that have an unnecessarily
high pixel density.

130

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Panel PDF Options Window
The Panel PDF Options window lets you set the export options to apply to selected panels in your storyboard.

How to access the Panel PDF Options window
1. Select Windows > Panel PDF Options.

Parameter

Description

Options

Export to PDF

Exports the selected panel. This option is enabled by default. Deselect this option
if you do not want to export this particular panel.

Force New Page

Starts panel on a new page.

Full Page

Prints panel on a full page.

Image
Maximum Height for Full
Page

ExpandLets you set the maximum image height for a full page panel. Applies to landscapeorientation only. 0 = No Limit.
Displays camera motion (such as pan, tilt, or zoom) in the image across several

panels.

131

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Zoom Level (%)

Size, in percentage, that the panel will appear within its frame.

Caption & Sketch

Export All Captions

This option is enabled by default. All captions from this panel will be exported to
PDF. If you want to select specific captions to export, deselect this option anduse the Caption List option to make your selections.
This option is unavailable when the Export All Captions option is enabled. When

Caption List

available, click the Browse button to open the List Picker for selecting specificcaptions to export.
Adapts the box to the text and spreads it across the next panel if necessary.

Spread Captions

When this option is deselected, caption text is cut if it is too long or big for the
space available in the box.

Caption Font Scale(%)

Select the scale, in percentage, the text will appear in the captions of this panel.

Shrink Text to Fit

Shrinks captions if they do not fit in the panel.

Export Sketch

Exports the sketch caption field of this panel.

Preview

Creates a quick PDF of the page containing the selected panel(s), using thecurrent default PDF export profile for the other panels.

Restore All from Profile

Returns the options to the current default PDF export profile.

132

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

PDF Export View/Window
The PDF Export view/window lets you export a storyboard project as a PDF file.

How to access the PDF Export view/window
1. Select Windows > PDF Export.

Parameter

Description

ProfileDrop-down Menu

Lets you select a profile for the export.

Edit

Opens the PDF Profile dialog box from which you can edit a selected profile.

Export RangeAll

By default, the export range is set to All, which means your entire storyboard
project will be exported.

Selected Scenes

Select this option and click Select to open the Scenes Picker dialog box in which133

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

you can select specific scenes to export.
Current Scene

Exports only the currently selected scene to PDF.

Current Panel

Exports only the selected panels to PDF.

Tracked Panels

Exports panels that are marked as tracked. The number of tracked panels willappear beside the option.

AnalysisStarts the analysis of your PDF options.

Analyse

Filters

If no issue is encountered, the list will remain empty and the word Done! willappear beside the Analyse button.
If issues are encountered, they will appear in the list area. The scene, panel, andpage numbers will be indicated, as well as a description of the problem found.

A menu will lets you select the type of issues you want the analysis to display.
Options include: Text Overflow, Text Overlap, and Camera Pan issues.

Select All
Restore Ignored

Resets an ignores issue and removes the red X beside it in the list.

IgnoreRemoves an issue from the list of issues encountered during the PDF analysis.

Preview

Generates a PDF preview of the selected scene(s). If you select more than one
panel in a scene, the complete scene will be previewed.

ExportExports a PDF file of your storyboard.

134

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

PDF Profile Dialog Box
The PDF Profile dialog box allows you to create or modify a PDF profile, which is a set of options for exporting astoryboard as a PDF document.
The PDF Profile dialog contains the following tabs, each of which contains a specific type of options:lGeneral Tab on page 135lPage Tab on page 137l

Cover Tab on page 139lPanels Tab on page 140lCaptions Tab on page 145l

Header Tab on page 148lFooter Tab on page 150

How to access the PDF Profile dialog box
1. Do one of the following:l

From the PDF Export view or window, click Edit.

l

Access Top Menu > File > Export > PDF. In the Export to PDF dialog box, click.

l

Access Top Menu > File > Export > PDF. In the Export to PDF dialog box, click

andselect Edit Profile.

General Tab
The General tab lets you set up a personalized layout for your PDF.

135

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Parameter

Description

Name

Lets you enter a a name for your custom layout or edit the existing name.

Description

Lets you enter a short description of the layout. This description only appears in
the PDF Profile dialog box.

Icon

Lets you Select an image file representing the custom layout you are creating; itwill be displayed in the profile list. For best results, your image should be 45x45
pixels.

Unit

Lets you select the unit of measurement (points, mm, cm or inches) used in thePage, Panels, Header and Footer tab of the PDF Profile dialog box. The unit
measurement is used for margin, spacing, height and width of a panel, header orfooter.
Lets you select any font installed on your system to use for all text in the PDF
document.

Font

To export Unicode characters to your PDF document, click the [...] button to
select the language encoding and the embedded PDF font that will be used todisplay the text in the PDF document.

Font Size

Lets you define the size of the font.

Duration in Feet

Lets you set the duration value in feet. The foot measurement was used mostly bytraditional animators. In the XSheet, a foot contains 16 frames.

Render Image in B/WCreates a black and white PDF instead of colours.

136

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Page Tab

Parameter

Description
Select the type of page you want to print on:
l

11x17

l

A3

l

A4

l

Legal

l

Letterl

CustomPage Format

If you select Custom, fill in the desired width and height.

Custom Width

Lets you enter the desired width of your PDF. The value will be written in a way toreflect the set unit type in the General tab of the PDF Profile dialog box.

Custom HeightLets you enter the desired height of your PDF. The value will be written in a way
to reflect the set unit type in the General tab of the PDF Profile dialog box.
Lets you set the PDF to portrait or landscape orientation.
Options include:

Orientationl

0 degreel

90 degreesl

180 degrees

137Chapter 2: Dialog Boxesl

270 degrees

Lets you set the titles used in the main table.

Display Table Title

Use a semicolon (;) to separate each entry. You can also specify the font size after
a title. If you write more titles than the number of columns in the storyboard, thePDF will only use those written first. The font size value must be written after thetitle and a coma.
If you want to make sure that each title respects the naming of the captions, you
can write <caption_titles> as the title. This entry will affect all of the captions inthe storyboard.
For example: Cut;Picture,15;Caption,15;Time

RotationLets you set the degree of clockwise rotation of the storyboard on the printed
page.

Pages Per Sheet

Lets you select the number of storyboard pages to print on each sheet.

Reverse Page Layout

Lets you reverse the position of the captions in relation to the panels.

Top Margin

Lets you enter the distance from the top page edge. The value will be written in a
way to reflect the set unit type in the General tab of the PDF Profile dialog box.

Bottom Margin

Lets you enter the distance from the bottom page edge. The value will be written
in a way to reflect the set unit type in the General tab of the PDF Profile dialog
box.

Left Margin

Lets you enter the distance from the left page edge. The value will be written in a
way to reflect the set unit type in the General tab of the PDF Profile dialog box.

Right Margin

Lets you enter the distance from the right page edge. The value will be written in a
way to reflect the set unit type in the General tab of the PDF Profile dialog box.

Background Image

Lets you select an image to use as a watermark on all pages, except the cover.

138

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Cover Tab

Parameter

Description

Show CoverLets you insert a cover as the first page of the PDF.

Background Image

Lets you select an image (.bmp, .jpg or .png) to use as a watermark on the cover.

Show Title

Displays the project title defined in the storyboard properties.

Show Subtitle

Displays the project subtitle defined in the storyboard properties. You can find theproperties in the Top Menu > Storyboard > Properties.

Show Duration

Displays the duration (as a time code or frame) of the selected storyboard panels.

Show Date

Displays the date of export.

Include Note

Lets you include a revision note on the cover page.

Show Filename

Displays the filename of the PDF on the cover.

139

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Panels Tab

Parameter

Description

Number of Rows

Defines the number of panel rows displayed per page.

Panel Vertical Spacing

Defines the vertical spacing between panels. The value will be written in a way toreflect the set unit type in the General tab of the PDF Profile dialog box.

Panel Horizontal Spacing

Defines the horizontal spacing between panels. The value will be written in a way
to reflect the set unit type in the General tab of the PDF Profile dialog box.

Number of Columns

Defines the number of panel columns displayed per page.

Show Panel Image

Displays each panel’s visual content.

Frame Panel Image

Displays a rectangle around the panel’s visual content on each page.

Image Zoom Level (%)

Displays the image in the panel at a percentage of the original size.

140

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Image Resolution (DPI)

Defines the DPI value of the exported images in the PDF storyboard. The default
value is 150. A higher value increases the sharpness of the images, as well as the
final file size of your PDF.

Maximum image height for
fullpage panel (Landscape
only - 0 = No Limit)

Defines the maximum height a panel can have when it is full page.

Start Scene on New Page

Makes each new scene start on a new page.

Start Sequence on New Page

Makes each new sequence start on a new page.

Start Act on New Page

Makes each new act start on a new page.

Show Panel Header

Displays each panel’s shot name, panel number, and duration as a header.

Frame Panel Header

Displays a rectangle around the panel header on each page.

Display Total Number ofPanels

Displays the total number of panels in the scene in the panel header.

Display Scene Duration

Displays the duration of each scene.

Display Panel Duration

Displays the duration of each panel.

Display Sequence Name

Displays the name of the sequence.

Display Act Name

Displays the name of the act. This option is grayed out by default. To activate it,enable the option called Enable Acts in the General tab of the Preferences dialog
box.
Displays the sequence name as part of the scenes’ names. For example, if scene
18 appears in the second sequence, it will be written like this: 2-18.

Use Sequence Name as
Scene Name Prefix

This option can also be set at the same time as Use Act Name As Scene Name
Prefix. If so, the prefix for the act will appear before the prefix for the sequence.
Thus, if scene 18 from the second sequence is in the first act, it will be written like
this: 1-2-18.

Use Act Name as Scene
Name Prefix

Displays the act name as part of the scenes’ names. For example, if scene 18
appears in the first act, it will be written like this: 1-18.

141Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

This option can also be set at the same time as Use Sequence Name As Scene
Name Prefix. If so, the prefix for the sequence will appear after the prefix for theact. Thus, if scene 18 from the second sequence is in the first act, it will be
written like this: 1-2-18.
Display Selected Caption

Displays the content of the selected caption.

Expand Panels

Displays camera motion (such as pan, tilt, or zoom) in the image across several
panels.

Fit Camera Path

Ensures the camera movement is included in a single panel space.

Rectify Static Camera

If the camera in a panel is at an angle and there is no camera movement in thepanel, it will be rendered as if the camera was straight, preventing it from taking
extra space in the storyboard.

Show Transition

Displays transition information (Transition type and duration).

Display "No Panel" on Board

Replaces the panel’s image with an X and the text “No Panel” above it. This isused when there is not enough space to display a panel on the same page. The
panel with the image is normally displayed on the next page or the nearest one
with enough space to show the image on.

Render Scene Layout Panel

When a scene has a camera movement, this adds an extra thumbnail for thescene's layout before the thumbnails for the scene's panels. This thumbnail
contains the camera movement for the entire scene, as well as the artwork in thefirst panel of that scene.

Maximize Panel Height

Displays the panel at the maximum of its height.

Maintain Size Throughout
Scene

Keeps every panel of your printed storyboard the same size.

In and Out Thumbnails for
3D Panels

Renders an in thumbnail and an out thumbnail for the 3D panel, as if the user
would have added a snapshot at both ends of the panel.

Transition as Panel

Displays a transition as a panel.

Display Panel on Right

When using the Vertical profile, displays images on the right side of the page
instead of the left.

142

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Frame Snapshots

When a panel contains snapshots, this renders the snapshots as framed by thecamera at the time of the snapshot. This means that the thumbnail is renderedfrom the camera's point of view, that artwork outside the camera frame is notrendered, and that the camera movements are not rendered over the artwork.
Displays the camera frame and camera path on the PDF export.

NOTE
Enabling this option is required for the following options to have an effect:

Render Camera

Display Camera KeyframeslDisplay Camera KeyframeslDisplay Hash Marksl

Display Camera Labell

Display 4:3 Areal

Display 4:3 Safe Areal

Display Safe Area

Prints the different camera keyframes on the exported images. The actual camera
keyframes on each panel are rendered instead of just the in and out frames. To see
this change, enable the Render Camera option.
Displays the hash marks below each camera frame, which indicate the aspectratio of the camera and the position of the horizontal limits of the 4:3 area

Display Hash Marks

Display Camera Label

Prints the In and Out camera labels of your camera moves to your storyboard. But
if the Display Camera Keyframes option is selected, In and Out will be replaced byletters (A, B, C, and so on), representing each camera keyframe. To see thischange, enable the Render Camera option.

Display Camera Mask

Covers everything outside of the camera frames and the camera's trajectory with a143

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

solid colour.

Mask Color

The colour of the camera mask.
Prints the Title Safe Area over the picture. By default, this area is 20% smaller
than the camera frame. It is used as a guideline of the area that CRT displays
might crop out of the picture. Visual elements such as text and logos should beplaced within this area.

Display Title Safe Area

NOTE
The size of this area can be changed in the Camera tab of the Preferences
dialog.

Prints the Title Safe Area over the picture. By default, this area is 20% smaller
than the camera frame. It is used as a guideline of the area that CRT displays
might crop out of the picture. Visual elements such as text and logos should beplaced within this area.
Display Action Safe Area

NOTE
The size of this area can be changed in the Camera tab of the Preferences
dialog.

Display 4:3 Area

Prints the 4:3 area on each panel of your storyboard which has a camera
movement. To see this change, enable the Render Camera option.

Display 4:3 Safe Area

Prints the 4:3 safe area on each panel of your storyboard which has a camera
movement. To see this change, enable the Render Camera option.

144

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Captions Tab

Parameter

Description

Captions List

Includes every caption in the PDF. You can deselect this option to activate thebrowsing button. Click the Browse button to display a list of all the captions.
Select the ones to export.

Show Empty Captions

Includes the empty captions of your project in the PDF.

Include Revision Notes

Adds revision notes as a new caption. Revision notes can only exist on panels
that were marked as changed.

Trim Captions

Removes empty lines after captions.
Lets you decide how captions are framed. Options include:lBox: Displays a black rectangle around captions on each page.

lLine Above: Displays a line above each caption.

l

No Frame: No frames will be displayed around captions.

Frame Captions

145

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Caption Font

Lets you select the font for the caption.

Caption Font Size

Lets you define the size of the font.

Caption Font Scale (%)

Determines the scale factor used when converting a font to a PDF font (screen
resolution versus print resolution).

Min Caption Font Size

Lets you set the minimum font size to use when shrinking captions.

Shrink Text to Fit

Reduces size of captions if they do not fit in the panel.

Specific Font for Caption
Names

Enables the Caption Title Font and Caption Title Font Size options.

Caption Title Font

Lets you select the font for the caption title.

Caption Title Font Size

Lets you set the size of the font for the caption title.

Output Caption in Plain Text

Ignores text formatting, such as bold, italics, that may be in the caption fields inthe interface.
Prints the Sketch captions to your storyboard. This option needs to be enabled togive access to:lShow Empty SketchlSketch Height PolicylSketch HeightlSketch Render Method

Show Sketch

Show Empty Sketch

Prints the Sketch captions even if they are empty. To see this change, enable theShow Sketch option.
Sets the height rule for the Sketch captions:lSketch Height PolicyllAutomatic Height: Lets Storyboard Pro automatically define the height ofeach Sketch panel depending on the available space in the current layout.
Evenly Distributed: Keeps the same size of sketch boxes throughout thestoryboard. Otherwise, the caption boxes are set to fit the content of eachsketch independently.
Fixed Height: Keeps the same height throughout the storyboard.

146

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guidel

Max Height: Enables the Sketch Height field in which you can define themaximum height you want your Sketch caption to follow.

To see this change, enable the Show Sketch option.

Sketch Height

Defines the maximum height a Sketch caption can be. Set the Select Max Heightin the Sketch Height Policy to make this option available.The value will be written
in a way to reflect the set unit type in the General tab of the PDF Profile dialog
box.
To see this change, enable the Show Sketch option.
Sets the rule of how your sketch will appear in the Sketch caption.
lSketch Render MethodllCrop: The sketch will keep its original aspect and be cropped if it does not
fit the current Sketch caption size.
Fit: The height of the sketch will fit the height of the caption, any
exceeding part on the width may be cropped.
Stretch: The sketch will be resized to fit inside the caption field and will
not be cropped.

To see this change, enable the Show Sketch option.
Adapts the box to the text or sketch and spreads it across the next panel if
Spread Captions & Sketch

Distribute Evenly

necessary. When this option is deselected, the caption text or a sketch that is toolong or big for the space available in the box will be cut.
Keeps the same size of caption boxes throughout the storyboard. When thisoption is deselected, the caption boxes are set to fit the content.

147

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Header Tab

Parameter

Description

Display Header

Displays a header on each page (except the cover). The header includes the
project title, project subtitle, and project episode defined in the storyboard
properties.

Header HeightLets you enter the size of the footer for each page except the cover. The value will
be written in a way to reflect the set unit type in the General tab of the PDF Profile
dialog box.

Header Logo

Lets you select an image (.bmp, .jpg or .png) to display on the header. Scale thelogo to match header's height.

Position of Logo

Sets the position of your logo in the header.

Show Title

Displays the project title defined in the storyboard properties. You can find theproperties in the Top Menu > Storyboard > Properties.

Show Subtitle

Displays the project subtitle defined in the storyboard properties. You can find theproperties in the Top Menu > Storyboard > Properties.

Show Filename

Displays the filename of the PDF on the cover.

Show Page Number

Displays a page number in the header on each page (except the cover). Affects

148

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

the following options:l

Use Sequence Name as Page Number Prefixl

Use Act Name as Page Number PrefixlShow Total Page NumberlStart Page Numberl

Sub Page Number

Displays the sequence name as part of the page number. For example, if thepanels (or at least the first panel) on page 25 are in the third sequence, the page
number will appear as Page 3-25.
Use Sequence Name as Page
Number Prefix

This option can also be set at the same time as Use Act Name As Page Number
Prefix. If so, the prefix for the act will appear before the prefix for the sequence.
Thus, if the panels from page 25 are also in the first act, the page number section
will display as: Page 1_3-25. In this example, the underscore is used after the act
number because it is followed by the prefix of the sequence.
Displays the act name as part of the page number. For example, if the panels (or atleast the first panel) on page 25 are in the first act, the page number will appear as
Page 1-25.

Use Act Name as Page
Number Prefix

This option can also be set at the same time as Use Sequence Name As Page
Number Prefix. If so, the prefix for the act will appear before the prefix for thesequence. Thus, if the panels from page 25 are also in the third sequence, thepage number section will display as Page 1_3-25. In this example, the underscoreis used after the act number because it is followed by the prefix of the sequence.

Show Total Page Number

Shows the current page number, as well as the total number of pages of thestoryboard. To see this change, enable the Show Page Number option. For
example, if this option is enabled, Page 3/7 will display, but if this option isdisabled, Page 3 will display.

Start Page Number

Defines the first number to start the page numbering. To see this change, enable
the Show Page Number option.

Sub Page Number

If you already printed your storyboard, but have recently added new panels or a
new scene to your project, using this option allows you to create a PDF of the
new panels or new scenes in your storyboard that can be inserted into theexisting print without causing issues with the page numbers.
This option does the following:l

Makes the page number displayed in the corner of the page always display
the number in the Start Page Number field, without incrementing.

149

Chapter 2: Dialog BoxeslAdds a "sub page number" after the page number, which actually
increments with every page.

For example: Let's say you have a storyboard printed out, but a new scene wasadded to the Storyboard Pro project, and this new scene is to be inserted at page
100 of the original printed storyboard. Instead of reprinting the whole storyboard,
you can simply print out the scene. In this case, you could set the Start Page
Number option to 100, and then type -1 in the Sub Page Number field. This
would result in each page in the PDF for the new scene to be numbered likeso: 100-1, 100-2, 100-3, etc. With the pages numbered in this way, the printed
PDF can be inserted at page 100 of your original printed storyboard, without
affecting the existing page numbers.

TIP
This option can also use letters to number sub-pages. In the previous
example, setting this option to a would result in pages numbered likeso: 100a, 100b, 100c, etc.

Frame Page Number

Displays a rectangle around the page number in the header on each page.

Font

Lets you select any font installed on your system for the footer text in the PDF
document.

Font Size

Lets you define the size of the font.

Footer Tab

Parameter

Description

Display Footer

Displays a footer on each page (except cover). The footer includes the project
copyright, defined in the storyboard properties.

150

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Footer HeightLets you enter the size of the footer for each page except the cover. The value will
be written in a way to reflect the set unit type in the General tab of the PDF Profile
dialog box.

Footer Logo

Lets you select an image file (.bmp, .jpg or .png) to use as the logo in the footer.
Scale the logo to match footer's height.

Font

Lets you select any font installed on your system for the footer text in the PDF
document.

Font Size

Lets you define the size of the font.

Show Title

Displays the project title defined in the storyboard properties.

Title Font

Lets you select the font for the title in the footer.

Title Font Size

Lets you set the font size for the title in the footer.

Show Filename

Displays the filename of the PDF on the cover.

Show Page Duration

Displays the duration per page. For example, (03:11).

Labeling Tab

NOTE
Add %1 at the end of the label to place the label and corresponding number on the same line.

151Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Parameter

Description

Page

Lets you enter a substitute for the word page.

Title

Lets you enter a substitute for the word title.
Lets you enter a substitute for the word act.

Act

This option is grayed out by default. To activate it, enable the Enable Acts
option in the General tab of the Preferences dialog box. Then, select the
Display Act Name option in the Panels tab of the PDF Profile dialog box.
Lets you enter a substitute for the word sequence.

Sequence

To see this change, select the Display Sequence Name option in the Panels
tab of the PDF Profile dialog box.

Scene

Lets you enter a substitute for the word scene.

Panel

Lets you enter a substitute for the word panel.
Lets you enter a substitute for the word transition.

Transition

To see this change, select the Transition As Panel option in the Panels tab of
the PDF Profile dialog box.

DurationLets you enter a substitute for the word duration.
Lets you enter a substitute for the words no panel.

No PanelTo see this change, select the Display "No Panel" on board option, in the
Panels tab of the PDF Profile dialog box.

152

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Project Properties Dialog Box
The Project Properties dialog box lets you change the property settings in your project.

How to access the Project Properties dialog box
1. Do one of the following:‣

Select Storyboard > Project Properties.

‣

Press Alt + Return.

Settings Tab
In the Settings tab, you can define the project naming scheme and start time for the current project.

153

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Parameter

Description
Project Title: By default, the Project Name already appears is this field if noproject title was entered during the creation of this project. The Project Nameis the name of the Storyboard Pro project file. The Project Title is the title thatwill appear in all PDF renders. They can, and often should, be the same.

NOTE
Special characters (!"/$) cannot be used for project names because
they interfere with the operating system. However, they can be usedin the project title.

Title Info
Project Subtitle: The name of the project subtitle which appears in the proper
places in all PDF renders.
Project Episode: The episode number. If you want the word “Episode” toappear next to the number, you must include it in the field as well. The
information entered in this field will appear after the Project Subtitle in all
PDF renders.
Project Copyright: The copyright date. This can be the month and year orjust the year. This information will appear at the bottom of the page in all
PDF renders.

154Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Project Start Time: This time is important when generating an EDL (Editing
Decision List) of your project. EDLs are generally used by third party editing
software, such as Final Cut Pro. The EDL determines how the panels of yourproject are distributed in the timeline of the third party software. The
numerical value you enter in this field also appears as the start time in theTimeline view.
Film Size: When working on a 3D scene, the film size determines the focal
length of the camera. You should use the same value as that used in the 3D
software used to create the 3D elements. A value of 1.417 is equivalent to35mm film.
Metrics

Project Field Chart: Sets the field standard for the project.

3D ModelsDefault Scale Factor: The default scale factor to apply to a 3D model when it
is imported into your project. You can enter a decimal value between 0 and 1
to make newly imported 3D models appear smaller than their original size, ora decimal value greater than 1 to make 3D models appear bigger than their
original size.

Project Resolution Tab
In the Project Resolution tab, you can define the project resolution, aspect ratio, field of view and frame rate forthe current project:155

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Parameter

Description
Lets you define the project resolution. Your project resolution should match
the format of the production for which you are creating the storyboard.
HDTV: High Definition Television delivers a higher quality image thanstandard television because it has twice the standard number of scanninglines per frame. To take advantage of the superior quality, your output device
must be compatible with HDTV technology to make this resolution setting
useful.
HDTV_Vertical: The "vertical resolution" of HDTV_Vertical refers to how thedrawing grid is fit into the camera frame. When working with 12 or 16 fielddrawing grids, the grid is a different aspect ratio from the camera frame.
When you fit vertically, you fit the grid with the top and bottom of thecamera frame.

NOTE
The HDTV_Vertical format is ideal when importing images into an
HD project.

Resolution
film-1.33: Applies to a wide screen film format that conforms to the standard
4:3 pixel aspect ratio.
film-1.66: Applies to a wide screen film format that conforms to the 16:9
pixel aspect ratio in which the pixel's width is greater than its height.
film-1.66_Vertical: This is essentially the same as film-1.66. Refers to how
the drawing grid is fit into the camera frame. When working with 12 or 16
field drawing grids, the grid is a different aspect ratio from the camera frame.
When you fit vertically, you fit the grid with the top and bottom of thecamera frame.

NOTE
The film-1.66_Vertical view is ideal for importing images into film
projects.

NTSC: The standard analog television broadcasting system that was used inmost of the Americas, Japan, South Korea, Taiwan, Burma, and some Pacific156

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guideisland nations and territories. It conformed to the North American standards
on how rectangular pixels were displayed for computer and televisionscreens. This format has been replaced in most regions with HDTV.
PAL: An analog television encoding system that was used in broadcast
television systems in large parts of the world, such as Western Europe, Asia,
Australia, most of Africa and some North American countries. This
resolution worked best with the European format for television andcomputer screens, as the rectangular pixels are displayed at a different
orientation. This format has been replaced in most regions with HDTV.
Low: This format is ideal for videos destined for the web, where size and fast
download of a video file might take precedence over quality.
Width: The width of the project, in pixels.
Height: The height of the project, in pixels.
Resolution

Aspect Ratio: The aspect ratio describes the number of pixels wide theproject is divided by the height. Storyboard Pro always works with square
pixels. An aspect ratio of 1:1 indicates that the camera frame is square, andhas the same number of pixels defining the width as it does defining theheight. The aspect ratio is defined automatically when you enter values forthe width and height of the camera frame.
Defines how the camera frame fits with the drawing grid in your scene.
When working in 3D, a different custom FOV might be more common, so
this can be set here as the default FOV for the scenes in your project. The
FOV can be adjusted for individual 3D scenes, in order to switch out thecamera lens.

Field of View
Horizontal Fit: Fits the drawing grid to the width of the camera frame.
Vertical Fit: Fits the drawing grid with the top and bottom of the camera
frame.

Frame Rate

Lets you set the frame rate for the project. The higher the frame rate, forexample 30 fps, the smoother your animation will look, but the heavier it will
be. The lower the frame rate, for example 12 fps, the choppier your animation
may look, but the lighter it will be.

157

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Bitmap Resolution Tab
In the Bitmap Resolution tab, you can define the default resolution for textured brushes in vector drawing
layers, as well as the default size and resolution of canvases for bitmap drawing layers.
NOTE
This will not affect the pixel density and canvas size of existing drawings in your project.

Parameter

Description

Project Resolution

The project resolution of the project, displayed for reference.

Default Texture Pixel Density for Vector Layers

Pixel Density

Determines the amount of pixels to store in textured brush strokes for eachpixel that displays when the drawing is not zoomed in or scaled up. For
example, at 100%, zooming in or scaling up textured brush strokes will makethem lose texture quality. If set to 200%, textured brush strokes can bezoomed in or scaled up until they're twice their original size without losing
picture quality.

Default Canvas Size & Pixel Density for Bitmap Layers

158

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Width

The default width of the canvas when creating a bitmap drawing layer. The
percentage is relative to the width of the project. Its default value, 200%,
makes the width of the canvas twice the width of the stage.

Height

The default height of the canvas when creating a bitmap drawing layer. The
percentage is relative to the height of the project. Its default value, 200%,
makes the height of the canvas twice the height of the stage.

Lock/Unlock

Pixel Density

When enabled, changing either the Width or the Height property will update
the other property to preserve their proportions.
Determines the amount of pixels to store for each pixel that displays on thescreen when the drawing is not zoomed in or scaled up. For example, at
100%, zooming in or scaling up a bitmap drawing will make it lose picture
quality. If set to 200%, bitmap drawings can be zoomed in or scaled up until
they're twice their original size without losing picture quality.

Naming Tab
In the Naming tab, all options affect the Panel window. The changes you make in this tab override your
Storyboard Pro preferences and affect the current project only. Your default preferences remain in effectfor any new projects you create.

159

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Parameter

Description

Override Naming Preference
for this Project

When selected, current preferences for this project are overridden, and all theoptions on this tab become active.
Automatically Add Leading Zeros to Names: Automatically adds a zero
before the scene or sequence name.
Increment Name By:
Incremental Naming on Copy:
Min. Number of Characters: Determines the minimum number of charactersthe scene names will contain when using leading zeros.

Scene/Sequence Naming
Rules

Resolution Suffix: Lets you set the suffix pattern to use when a suffix is
added to a new scene when the name is already in use. You can choose thepunctuation mark preceding the suffix from the first drop-down menu:None:
Suffix appears immediately following the name of the scene. For example:
12A._: Suffix appears after an underscore. For example: 12_A..: Suffix
appears after a period. For example: 12.A.You can choose which type of
suffix to use:Auto: Uses an upper case alphabetical suffix. Once the suffix
reaches Z, it will start again at A, preceeded by a number. Example: 12_A,
12_B, (...), 12_1A, 12_1B, and so on.Numerical: Uses a numerical suffix. For
example: 12_1, 12_2, and so on.Uppercase: Uses an upper case alphabeticalsuffix. For example: 12_A, 12_B, and so on.Lowercase: Uses a lower casealphabetical suffix. For example: 12_a, 12_b, and so on.
Reset Scene Name on New Sequence: By default, this option is enabled.
Whenever you create a new sequence, the scene naming scheme is reset.
For example, the naming will be as follows: Seq 1, Scene 1, Seq 1, Scene 2,
Seq 2, Scene 1. When disabled, the scene number always increments. For
example, Seq 1, Scene 1, Seq 1, Scene 2, Seq 2, Scene 3.
Allow Custom Panel Names: Activates the Panel field so you can enter in acustom name for all panels.
Display Total Number of Panels in Panel Name: Displays a counter at theend of the Panel field which indicates the total number of panels in theselected panel’s scene.

160

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Enable Acts: Displays the Act field, along with the Act number.
Panel Auto-increment Rule: By default, panel names are named numerically.
This option lets you select from three other alphabetical increment rules. The
difference between each of them is the behaviour once you reach panel Z.
Resolution Suffix: Lets you set the suffix pattern to use when a suffix is
added to a new scene when the name is already in use. You can choose thepunctuation mark preceding the suffix from the first drop-down menu:None:
Suffix appears immediately following the name of the scene. For example:
12A._: Suffix appears after an underscore. For example: 12_A..: Suffix
appears after a period. For example: 12.A.You can choose which type of
suffix to use:Auto: Uses an upper case alphabetical suffix. Once the suffix
reaches Z, it will start again at A, preceeded by a number. Example: 12_A,
12_B, (...), 12_1A, 12_1B, and so on.Numerical: Uses a numerical suffix. For
example: 12_1, 12_2, and so on.Uppercase: Uses an upper case alphabeticalsuffix. For example: 12_A, 12_B, and so on.Lowercase: Uses a lower casealphabetical suffix. For example: 12_a, 12_b, and so on.

161

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Radial Zoom Blur Dialog Box
T-SBADV-007-007
The Radial Zoom Blur effect creates blurs around a centre point, simulating the look of a zooming or rotatingcamera.

How to access the Radial Zoom Blur dialog boxlSelect Layer > Apply Effect on Bitmap Layer > Radial Zoom Blur.

Parameter

Description

Focus(x) and (y) Axis

Lets you set the x and y coordinates individually for the centre.

BlurrinessAmount of blur applied to the layer.

162

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Direction

Presets

Lets you select preset blur types. A set of preset radial, zoom, and spiral blurs areavailable to get you started. You can then adjust the type to customize the blur.

CustomLets you select a custom blur direction. Create your own blur by entering a value
for the direction of the blur lines.

Bidirectional

Applies the blur on both sides of the pixel.

163

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Record Sound Dialog Box
The Record Sound dialog box lets you record sound directly in Storyboard Pro and insert it on the Timeline.

How to access the Record Sound dialog box
1. In the Timeline view, add a new audio track if needed.
2. Position the play head at the frame you want your recording to begin and select the audio track you
want to record your sound guide in.
3. Do one of the following:

Icon

l

In the top menu, select File > Import > Record Sound.

l

In the Sound toolbar, click on Record Sound

Parameter.

Description

Record Sound Clip

Start recording

Lets you record, play/stop and name your sound recording.

Stop recording or
playing

Play recording

Clip name164

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Icon

Parameter

Description

Target Audio Track
New Audio Tracks

Places the recorded sound clips on a new audio track.

Current Audio Track

Places the recorded sound clips on the current audio track.

Target FrameFirst Frame

Places the recorded sound clips starting on the first frame.

Current Frame

Places the recorded sound clips starting on the current frame.

Overwrite ExistingSound Clip

By default, when you recorded a sound, it will replace sounds that exist in thetarget frames.

Fill Next Available

Places the sound clip into the first available empty frames after any existing

Framessound selection.

Import Rule

165

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Record Voice Annotation Dialog Box
The Record Voice Annotation dialog box lets you create vocal annotations using a microphone connected toyour computer and Storyboard Pro.

How to access the Record Voice Annotation dialog box
1. In the Thumbnails view, select the panel on which you want to record a voice annotation.
2. Display the Panel view.
The Voice Annotation section appears as part of the panel.

3. Click the Record Voice Annotation

button.

The Record Voice Annotation dialog box opens.

Icon

Tool Name

Description

RecordRecords your voice annotations. Be sure to verify
that your microphone is functioning properly.

Stop or Play

Stops or plays the recording.

Play Recorded Sound

Plays the voice annotations you recorded.

166

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Rename Panel Dialog Box
The Rename Panel dialog box lets you renamed a selected sequence . You can also rename Panel in the Panelview.

How to access the Rename Panel dialog box
1. In the Thumbnails view, select a panel to rename.

2. Select Storyboard > Rename Panel.
The Rename Panel dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

New Name

The new name of the panel.

Renaming Rule for Subsequent Panel
Current Pane lOnly

Renames only the selected panel.

Renumber Panels

Renumbers the current panel, as well as all the panel that follow.

Renumber Selected
Panel

Renumbers the first selected panel of a multiselection, as well as all the following
panel that are part of the multiselection.

Renumber Prefix Only

Renumbers the panel's numerical prefixes beginning at the selected panel. The
new name must be a numerical value.

Renumbered Panel Names

Displays the current and new names for all the panels that will be affected by therenaming process.

167

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Rename Scene Dialog Box
The Rename Scene dialog box lets you renamed a selected scene. You can also rename scenes in the Panelview.

How to access the Rename Scene dialog box
1. In the Thumbnails view, select a scene to rename.
2. Select Storyboard > Rename Scene.
The Rename Scene dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

New Name

The new name of the scene.

Renaming Rule for Subsequent Scene
Current Scene Only

Renames only the selected scene.

Renumber Scenes

Renumbers the current scene, as well as all the scenes that follow.

Renumber Selected
ScenesRenumbers the first selected scene of a multiselection, as well as all the following
scenes that are part of the selection.

Renumber Prefix Only

Renumbers the scenes' numerical prefixes beginning at the selected scene. The

168

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

new name must be a numerical value.

Reset Panel Name

Resets all panel names according to the current panel time automatic increment
rule.

Renumbered Scene Names

Displays the current and new names for all the scenes that will be affected by therenaming process.

Do not show this dialog

Prevents this dialog box from automatically opening every time you move scenes

automaticallyaround.

169

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Rename Sequence Dialog Box
The Rename Sequence dialog box lets you renamed a selected sequence . You can also rename scenes in the
Panel view.

How to access the Rename Sequence dialog box
1. In the Thumbnails view, select a sequence to rename.
2. Select Storyboard > Rename Sequence.
The Rename Sequence dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

New Name

The new name of the sequence.

Renaming Rule for Subsequent Sequence
Current Sequence
Only

Renames only the selected sequence.

Renumber Sequences

Renumbers the current sequence, as well as all the sequencethat follow.

Renumber Selected
Sequence

Renumbers the first selected sequence of a multiselection, as well as all thefollowing sequence that are part of the multiselection.

Renumber Prefix Only

Renumbers the sequence's numerical prefixes beginning at the selectedsequence. The new name must be a numerical value.

170

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Renumbered Sequence
Names

Displays the current and new names for all the sequence that will be affected by
the renaming process.

171

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Render 3D Model Dialog Box
The Render 3D Model dialog box allows you to set up how a 3D model should be positioned before rasterizing
into a 2D layer, so it can be imported into a 2D scene.

NOTE
For information on how to use this dialog, see the User Guide.

How to access the Render 3D Model dialog box
1. Make sure the current scene is a 2D scene.
2. In the Thumbnails or Timeline view, select the panel to which you want to add a 3D object.
3. In the Library view, select the 3D Models library.
4. In the list of 3D models, select the model you wish to add to the current panel.
5. Drag and drop the 3D model from the Library view to the Stage or Camera view:l

To insert it between two specific layers, drop it between those layers in the Layer panel ofthe Stage or Camera view.

l

If you want to insert it over all the other layers, you can drop it directly in the Stage or Cameraview.

The following dialog box appears:

172

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

6. Click on Render to 2D.
The Render 3D Model dialog appears.

Parameter

Description

The preview area displays the 3D model as it will be rendered in the stage. Black bars display
around the area to mark parts of the areas that are outside of the camera frame.
In this area, you can:lEither click and drag on the vertical slider to the right or scroll the mouse wheel up or
down to adjust the distance between the camera and the model.

lHold Ctrl + Shift (Windows) or Shift + ⌘ (Mac OS X), then click and drag on thepreview area to rotate the camera.

Preview Areal

Hold Spacebar, then click and drag on the preview area to pan the camera laterally.

173

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Parameter

Description

Camera
The angle of the camera cone used to render the 3D model. A wide angle will render themodel with less perspective, and a narrow angler will render it with exaggerated perspective.
Focal
LengthNOTE
Increasing this setting will also decrease the perceived size of the 3D model, anddecreasing it will increase its perceived size. You must then adjust the camera's
distance from the model or the model's scaling to compensate.

Transformation
The position of the 3D model relative to the center of the stage:l

X: The horizontal position of the 3D model, from west to east.

l

Y: The vertical position of the 3D model, from south to north.

l

Z: The position of the 3D model relative to the camera, from near to far.

Translation

The angle of the 3D model relative to its default angle:l

X: The rotation angle of the model around the horizontal axis.

l

Y: The rotation angle of the model around the vertical axis.

l

Z: The rotation angle of the model around the z-axis.

Rotation

The size of the 3D model relative to its default size:
Scalingl

Lock Scaling Axis: When enabled, you can use the X scaling field to set the scalingof the 3D model on all axes, preserving its proportions.

174

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Parameter

Descriptionl

X: The horizontal scaling of the model.

l

Y: The vertical scaling of the model.

l

Z: The scaling of the model on the z-axis.

Fit Model to View

Click on this button to automatically adjust the model's Truck, Translation X and Translation
Y parameters so that the model fits inside the camera field and is positioned in its centre.

Render to Scene

Rasterize the 3D model into a bitmap layer and add it to the current panel.

CancelDismiss this dialog and do not import the 3D model.

175

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Scripts Manager Dialog Box
The Scripts Manager dialog box lets you select a script, customize it and add it to the Script toolbar for quickly
running a script. You can also execute a selected script.

How to access the Scripts Manager dialog box
1. Select Windows > Toolbars > Scripting.
The Script toolbar displays.

2. Click the Manage Scripts

button.

The Scripts Manager dialog box displays.
Parameter

Description

Files

A list of JavaScript files you can execute in Storyboard Pro and add to the
Scripting toolbar.

Functions

A list of functions of the selected JavaScript file.

In Toolbar

Functions in the Scripting toolbar.

176

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

ArrowsLeft/Right: Lets you add or remove a selected function from the Scripting
toolbar.
Up/Down: Lets you reorder the functions in the Scripting toolbar.

ExecuteRuns the selected function.

Customize Icon

Lets you select an icon to represent the selected function that will be added
to the Scripting toolbar.

Customize Tooltip

Lets you add a tooltip to the button to identify and describe the function .

177

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Select Font Dialog Box
In the Pitch Mode workspace or view, the Show/Hide Captions dialog box lets you format text in caption fields.
By default, the selected caption field has a black background and a gray font. You can change the colours andthe font.

How to access the Select Font dialog box
1. Select one of the following:‣

Pitch Mode Workspace: Select Windows > Workspace > Workspace > Pitch Mode.

‣

Pitch Mode View: Select Windows > Pitch Mode View.

The Select Font dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Font

Lets you select the font in which to display the text.

Font Style

Lets you set the style of selected text.

Size

Allows you to set the size of the selected text.

Effects

Lets you strike out and underline selected text.

178

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

SampleShows a preview of the selected font and the parameters you set.

Writing System

Changes the selected text to a different writing sytem.

179

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Show/Hide Captions Dialog Box
The Show/Hide Captions dialog box lets you determines which captions to display and hide.

How to access the Show/Hide Captions dialog box
1. Select Caption > Show/Hide Captions.
The Show/Hide Captions dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Dialogue, Action Notes,
Slugging and Notes

Lets you display selected captions. Deselected captions are hidden.

180

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Smart Add Panel Dialog Box
The Smart Add Panel dialog box lets you create a new, duplicated panel that contains specific elements thatyou select.

How to access the Smart Add Panel dialog box
1. In the Thumbnails view, select the panel that contains the elements you want duplicate into thenew panel.
2. Do one of the following:lSelect Storyboard > Smart Add Panel.

l

In the Storyboard toolbar, click the Smart Add Panelbutton.

The Smart Add Panel dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Panel layers to duplicate

Lets you select the layers that contain elements you want to copy into the newpanel.

Add default layer if missing

Creates the default layers in the new panel if they are not part of the Smart Add
Panel selection list.

181

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

QuickTime Sound Settings Dialog Box
The Sound Settings dialog box lets you set the audio compression settings when you want to export a
QuickTime Movie (.mov) file.

NOTE
On Windows, Apple QuickTime must be installed to be able to export QuickTime Movie (.mov) files.

How to access the Sound Settings dialog box
1. In the top menu, select File > Export > Movie.
The Export to Movie dialog box opens.

2. Click Movie Options.
The Movie Settings dialog box opens.

182

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

1. In the Sound section, click Settings.
The Sound Settings dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Compressor

Lets you select a compression type. The default setting is None. This exports youraudio as is without performing any lossy compression or conversion, preserving
its fidelity. Other compressors can be used if you need your movie's audio track to
be exported in a specific format, or if disk space or download speed is critical, butthey may impact the quality of your movie's soundtrack negatively.

Rate

Lets you select the audio rate at which to export. It is best to export your audio at
a rate that matches the rate of your original sound files. For example, if your file
has an audio sample rate of 48 kHz and you choose a conversion rate of 22.05
kHz, the sound will play at the same speed, but higher frequencies will be
missing, making it sound muffled. For reference, the standard sound quality is 48
kHz for broadcasting and DVD. Lower rates are liable to impact the quality of yourmovie's soundtrack negatively, but they can be useful if disk space or download
speed is critical.

Size

Lets you select the encoding size. Also known as Bit Depth, this determines the183Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Parameter

Description

amount of precision used to record each wavelength in the audio track. The
standard size is 16-bit. If you choose 8-bit, the amount of disk space the audio
track of your movie file requires is halved, but the audio quality will besignificantly lower.
Lets you decide whether to use the Mono or Stereo channel mode. Stereo soundhas a separate audio track for the left and the right speakers, allowing to make theUseorigin of each sound realistically match the origin of their corresponding action. If
you choose Mono, the audio track in the exported movie file may use less disk
space, but both the left and right channels will be merged into a single track.

184

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Split Storyboard Dialog Box
The Split Storyboard dialog box allows you to separate the current project into two different projects, which
can be shared and edited independently. You can choose to export one half of the project into a different
project and keep the other half in the current project, or you can choose to split the current project into two
new projects and keep the current project as an original copy.

IMPORTANT
If you intend to split your project into two new projects, then import the changes made in the two
new projects into the original project using the Merge and Replace dialog, it is highly recommended
to lock you project's scene and panel numbers before splitting your project. To do this, in the top
menu, select Storyboard > Lock Scene and Panel Names.

How to access the Split Storyboard dialog box
1. In the Timeline, move the timeline playhead to the panel where you want the split to take place.
NOTE
You can choose in which project the current panel will go later.
2. Select File > Project Management > Split.

Parameter

Description

Export before selected panel

Exports all panels before the selected panel into a new project.

Path

Include selected

Using the Browse

button, you can browse to the location where you want tosave the first half of the project, and type in its project name.

Includes the selected panel in the first half of the project.

185

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

panel
Export after selected panel

Path

Include selectedpanel

Remove exported panelsfrom current project

Exports all panels after the selected panel into a new project.

Using the Browse

button, you can browse to the location where you want tosave the second half of the project, and type in its project name.

Includes the selected panel in the second half of the project.

Removes the panels you selected to export from the current project. If you do notselect this option, the current project will preserve a copy of the panels getting
exported into new projects.

186

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Spread Layer Motion Dialog Box
The Spread Layer Motion dialog box lets you spread the current layer motion across all panels in the same shotor a specified number of adjacent panels after the current panel in the same shot.
A new layer will be added and the drawing will be duplicated for those panels that do not have the same namein the defined range.

How to access the Spread Layer Motion dialog box
1. Select a layer
2. Do one of the following:‣

Select Layer > Spread Layer Motion.

‣

In the Layer toolbar, click the Spread Layer Motion
to the Layer toolbar by customizing it.
The Spread Layer Motion dialog box opens.

187

button. You may have to add this button

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

QuickTime Standard Video Compression Settings Dialog Box
The Standard Video Compression Settings dialog box lets you configure the video compression settings whenexporting a QuickTime Movie (.mov) file.

NOTE
On Windows, Apple QuickTime must be installed to be able to export QuickTime Movie (.mov) files.

How to access the Standard Video Compression Settings dialog box
1. In the top menu, select File > Export > Movie.
The Export to Movie dialog box opens.

188

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

2. Click Movie Options.
The Movie Settings dialog box opens.

1. In the Video section, click Settings.
The Standard Video Compression Settings dialog box opens.

189Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Parameter

Description

Allows you to select the codec to use for the video stream of your movie file. The
availability of codecs may vary between machines. If you are unsure of which
codec is best fit for you, it is recommended to use H.264 for maximum portability,
and to use Animation if quality is more important.
Compression TypeNOTEThe Animation codec, among a few others, allows you to set the colour
depth to Millions of Colors+, which supports transparency.

MotionFrame Rate

Key Frames

The amount of frames per second for the video stream. Leave this setting toCurrent to use your project's frame rate.
Some codecs compress the video by recording a limited amount of keyframes,
which are frames in which the entire picture is encoded, pixel by pixel and, inbetween, recording deltas, which are frames that are only defined by theirdifference with the previous frame. This significantly reduces the size of themovie file. However, the less keyframes a movie has, the more it is likely to
encounter decoding errors, and the harder it is for players to scrub or jump to a
specific time in the video. This option allows you to decide when keyframes areinserted in the video stream.
Automatic: Lets the encoder decide when keyframes should be inserted.

190

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Parameter

Description

Every ... frames: Allows you to set the exact interval, in frames, at which
keyframes should be inserted.
All: Encodes every frame as a keyframe. This option will significantly impact filesize, but will make it easier to scrub through the video without causing any
rendering error.

NOTE
If you are using the H.264 codec, you must set the Key Frames option toAll, or you will get an error message when you confirm the compression
settings.

Frame Reordering

Encodes frames in a different order than the one at which they are meant to be
displayed. This allows for more efficient compression, but may not be compatible
with some players.

Compressor
Allows you to set the colour depth for your video. A lower colour depth will
Depth

Quality

reduce the size of the video stream but will have significant impacts on picture
quality.
Lets you choose a quality setting for the video compression. A higher quality
setting will increase the size of the movie file, but will look better. A lower quality
setting will reduce the size of the movie file, but will cause blurriness andcompression artifacts to appear in the picture.
Allows you to choose between the following scan modes:llScan Mode /Interlaced

Interlaced: Frames are encoded starting with their odd-numberedscanlines, then their even-numbered scanlines.
Progressive: Frames are encoded whole, from the highest scanline to thelowest scanline.

NOTE
Some codecs will display a drop-down allowing you to select Interlaced or
Progressive, while others will simply have an Interlaced checkbox.

Aspect Ratio

Allows you to select one of the following aspect ratios:

191

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Parameter

FilterDescriptionl4:3: For output on standard definition displays.

l

16:9: For output to widescreen displays.

When exporting with the PNG compression type, this determines the algorithmwith which each pixel is encoded relative to other pixels. Leaving this option to
Best will export in the most space-efficient filter, without compromising picture
quality. Picking a filter may increase rendering speed a bit, at the expense of somedisk space.

Data Rate
Automatic

Lets the encoder use the optimal bit rate for your compression settings.
Allows you to specify the encoding bit rate.

NOTE

Restrict To

This setting will override other compression settings, so that the specified
bit rate is respected.

Optimize the encoding to be responsive depending on the intended viewing
method:l

Optimized Forll

CD/DVD-ROM: Optimizes the bit rate for a video that will be played using
an optical disc player.
Download: Optimizes the bit rate for a file that is going to be downloaded,then viewed from the user's hard drive.
Streaming: Optimized the bit rate for a video that will be streamed fromthe web and played as the video is being downloaded.

192

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Toolbar Manager Dialog Box
The Toolbar Manager dialog box lets you customize a selected workspace, create a new workspace, andorganize and rename a workspace.

How to access the Toolbar Manager dialog box
1. Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl+click (macOS) on any button in a toolbar and select Customize.
The Toolbar Manager dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Available Tools

Displays a list of the available tools you can add to the toolbar.

Default

Resets the toolbar to the default tools available for this toolbar.

ArrowsLets you organize the list by moving a selected item up or down the list, as well as
add and remove items from a toolbar.

Toolbar

Displays the tools available in the selected toolbar.

193Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Track Changes Window
The Track Changes window lets you track changes by date. If a storyboard becomes very large, it may be easierto track changes made on a specific date.

How to access the Track Changes windowl

Select Storyboard > Track Changes > Track Changes by Date.

Parameter

Description

From and To

Lets you define a particular time range in which to track changes. If you want totrack changes done on one specific day, place that day’s date in both the Fromand To fields. Click the From button and select the first date. Only the dates atwhich a change occurred will be available. The other dates will appear dimmed.

Information display

The first line displays the number of panels found in the storyboard that havebeen modified during the defined time range, and the panel that is currently
selected.The second line displays information about the currently selected panel,such as which scene it is part of, the name of the panel, and the date it was lastmodified.

Mark as Changed

Marks the currently selected panel as being edited on the current date; this is thedefault option. Click the button to activate it.

Mark as Scene Changed

Marks the scene of the currently selected panel as being edited on the current
date.

Mark All as Changed

Marks all the storyboard panels as being edited on the current date.

Previous and Next

Navigates from one modified panel to the next.

194

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Welcome Screen
When you open Storyboard Pro for the first time, two dialogs appear. The first one provides links for:l

Learning how to use Storyboard Pro.

l

Details on what's new in this version of Storyboard Pro.

l

Joining the Toon Boom Forum, where you can exchange with other Storyboard Pro users, ask questions,and get answers to your questions.

When you close the first Welcome screen, the second one displays, in which you can create and open projects.

195Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

TIP
Once in the main application window, you can return to the Welcome Screen by selecting Help >Show Welcome Screen from the top menu.

196

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference GuideWMV Settings Dialog Box
The WMV Settings dialog box lets you set the video and audio settings when exporting a Windows MediaVideo movie.

The WMV Settings dialog box is accessed through the Export to Movie dialog box. It can also be accessed fromthe Export to EDL/AAF/XML dialog box. In the latter case, it will not have sound options, since audio is notexported into video files when exporting EDL/AAF/XML sequences.

NOTE
The option to export to Windows Media Video is only available on Windows.

How to access the WMV Settings dialog box when exporting movies
1. From the top menu, select File > Export > Movie.
The Export to Movie dialog box opens.
2. Set the Movie Format to Windows Media Video (*.wmv).
3. Click on Movie Settings.

How to access the WMV Settings dialog box when exporting EDL/AAF/XML files
1. From the top menu, select File > Export > EDL/AAF/XML.
The Export to EDL/AAF/XML dialog box opens.
2. Set the Movie Format to Windows Media Video (*.wmv).
3. Click on Video Config.

197

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Parameter

Description

Video
Variable Bit Rate
Quality

Lets you choose a quality setting ranging from 5 to 100 for the video stream. The
higher the quality of the export, the larger the resulting file.

Sound
Lets you choose among preset combinations of audio sample rates, sample sizes
and channel modes for the audio stream:llSample rate: Available sample rates are 8000 Hz, 16000 Hz, 22050 Hz
and 44100 Hz. The default setting is 22050 Hz. It is best to export youraudio at a rate that matches the rate of your original sound files. For
example, if your file has an audio sample rate of 48000 Hz and you choosea sample rate of 22050 Hz, the sound will play at the same speed, buthigher frequencies will be missing, making it sound muffled. For
reference, the standard sound quality is 44000 kHz for films, and 48000
kHz for DVD. Lower rates are liable to impact the quality of your movie'saudio track negatively, but they can be useful if disk space or download
speed is critical.
Sample size: Also known as Bit Depth, this determines the amount ofprecision used to record each wavelength in the audio track. The standard
size is 16-bit. If you choose 8-bit, the amount of disk space the audio
track of your movie file requires is halved, but the audio quality will besignificantly lower.

ProfilelChannel mode: Stereo sound has a separate audio track for the left and theright speakers, allowing to make the origin of each sound realisticallymatch the origin of their corresponding action. If you choose Mono, theaudio track in the exported movie file may use less disk space, but boththe left and right channels will be merged into a single track.

NOTE
Exporting in 8-bit audio requires Apple QuickTime to beinstalled.

198

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Workspace Manager Dialog Box
The Workspace Manager dialog box lets you customize a selected workspace, create a new workspace, andorganize and rename a workspace.

How to access the Workspace Manager dialog box
1. Do one of the following:lSelect Windows > Workspace > Workspace Manager.

lSelect Windows > Toolbars > Workspace and in the Workspace toolbar, click theWorkspace Manager

button.

Parameter

Description

Available Workspaces

Displays a list of the available workspaces.

Duplicate Selected
Workspace

Copies the selected workspace.

Delete Workspace

Deletes the selected workspace.

ArrowsLets you organize the list by moving a selected item up or down the list, as well as
add and remove items from a selected workspace.

RenameLets you rename the selected workspace.

199

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Toolbar

Displays the toolbars available in the selected workspace.

200

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

201

Chapter 3: Menus

Chapter 3: Menus
In Storyboard Pro, you can access the commands from the following three types of menus:
Top Menu: Located at the top of the Storyboard Pro interface, the top menu contains most of the commands.
Depending on the view you are working in and the selected element, some commands are available and othersnot.
View Menus: Some views have their own menu containing commands specifically related to that view. To
access a view menu, click the View Menu

button in the top-right corner of a view.

Contextual Menus: Each view has a contextual menu containing commands for recurring actions. To access acontextual meu, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl+click (macOS) anywhere in a view.

202

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Main Menus
The following is a list of the top menus that are documented in this section:

203

Chapter 3: Menus

Camera Menu
The Camera menu lets you enhance your animatics by adding camera movements to the scenes. An example ofa camera movement would be if you wanted the camera to go from a wide shot and then zoom in to a close up.

How to access the Camera menu‣

At the top of the interface, select Camera.

Command

Description

Copy Camera from Selected Panels

Copies a selected camera keyframe from a selected panel.

Paste and Fit Camera on Selected
Panels

Pastes a copied camera keyframe in a selected panel.

Align Camera Keyframe with Stage View
Position

Fits the camera frame to the current space available in the Stage view
while retaining its original ratio. This is very useful in 3D scenes.

Align Camera Keyframe at Beginning of
Panel
Align Camera Keyframe at Current
Frame
Align Camera Keyframe at the End of
Panel
Remove Camera Keyframes at Current
Frame

Deletes the camera keyframe at the current location of the red
playhead.

Remove Selected Camera Keyframes

Deletes the selected camera keyframes.

Reset Selected Camera Keyframes

Reset Camera

Removes all the keyframes in your scene and reverts them back to theoriginal Static Camera.

Keyframes Sync Mode204

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

None

Makes your keyframes remain exactly where they are when you change
the panel duration. You will lose keyframes that are not within therange of the scene.

Relative to Camera
Relative to Shot

205

Chapter 3: Menus

Caption Menu
The Caption menu lets you add captions to panels and the Storyboard view. In addition, it enables you todelete, rename, format and search captions.

How to access the Caption menu‣

At the top of the interface, select Caption.

Command

Description

Add Caption to Storyboard

Lets you add captions to the Storyboard view. In the Storyboard view,by default, there is only one caption field which is called Script.

Add Caption to Panels

Lets you add a new caption for your panels. In each panel, there are
two caption fields: Dialogue and Action Notes.
Lets you add drawn indications to a panel’s caption just like in a
traditional storyboard. First, you must add a Sketch caption to yourpanel.

Add Sketch to Current PanelNOTE
You cannot add a sketch caption to the Storyboard view.

Delete Caption

Panel: Dialogue

Panel: Action Notes

Storyboard: Script

Removes a caption you no longer need. You can remove captions fromthe panels or storyboard.

NOTE
If you remove a caption that has text or a sketch, they willboth be removed permanently.

Rename Caption

206

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Panel: Dialogue
Panel: Action Notes

Lets you rename a caption you no longer need. You can rename
captions in the panels or storyboard.

Storyboard: Script

Format Captions

Once you have imported, dragged and dropped, or typed some text
into your storyboard captions, you can use the Format Captions
window to enhance it.

Find Text in Captions

Lets you search captions to find a specific part of your text. This isuseful when you have a large number of captions and text in yourproject.

Save Captions Layout as Default

Lets you save your current caption combination and layout. You cansave it as the default caption layout for any future Storyboard Pro
projects. The next project you create will automatically have this layout
by default.

Show/Hide Captions

Shows or hides captions to streamline your project visually.

Captions Default Format

Lets you set the default caption font and font size for new captions
that are added to the project.

207

Chapter 3: Menus

Clips Menu
The Sound menu lets you add sound to your storyboard.

How to access the Sound menu
1. At the top of the user interface, select Sound.

Command

Description

Find Sound Clips

Allows you to search for sound clips in your project by their clip name.
The Timeline view will automatically focus on matching sound clips.

Split Clip at Current Frame

Splits the selected video or sound clip at the current frame, separating
it into two independent clips.

Show Waveform

Displays a waveform inside the audio clip, allowing you to see where
the audio peaks so you can sync the action with it.
Displays a volume envelope throughout the sound clip. By default, thisenvelope is a straight line in the middle of the clip, indicating that theShow Volume Envelope

volume of the clip is neutral all throughout. You can add keyframes tothe envelope, and move them up or down to modulate the volume ofthe sound clip as it plays.

Show Sound Clip Name

Displays the name of the audio file inside each sound clip.

Overwrite Clips

Enable this option to be able to move a video or sound clip overanother video or sound clip. The part of the target clip that mesheswith the clip being moved will be cut out.

208

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Edit Menu
The Edit menu lets you repeat and undo actions, cut/copy/paste selected objects, select and manipulate objects,
and access the Preferences dialog box.

How to access the Edit menulFrom the top menu, select Edit.

Command

Description

Undo

Removes the last change made to your project. Storyboard Pro
supports multiple undo, so you can undo changes you made in theorder you made them.

Redo

Redoes an operation you have undone. This command is active only
after you use the Undo command.

Cut

Removes selected objects. You can then paste the object or its
properties to another object.

Copy

Copies selected objects and properties.

Paste

Places an object you cut or copied into the location you select in aview.

DeleteRemoves selected objects.

Select All

Selects all drawing objects in the current drawing window in the
Drawing, Timeline and Camera views. This helps you manage multiple
objects as one when moving them.

Select All Panels in Act

Lets you select all panels in an act.

Select All Panels in Scene

Lets you select all panels in a scene.

Select All Drawings in Scene

Lets you select all drawings in a scene.

Deselect All

Deselects all selected objects in the Drawing and Camera views.

209

Chapter 3: Menus

Group Drawing Selection

Groups selected drawing objects in the Camera or Drawing view.

Ungroup

Ungroups a selected group in the Camera view.

Preferences

Opens the Preferences dialog box where you can set your preferences
for Storyboard Pro.

210

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

File Menu
The File menu lets you open, close, save, optimize, import and export files.

How to access the File menulFrom the top menu, select File.

Command

Description

New

Creates a new project while closing any scene already open. The New
Project dialog box opens, asking for directory, name, and resolution
information.

New from Final Draft Script

Uses your Final Draft script to create a new Storyboard Pro project.
This saves you time as it handles the creation of scenes and panels, aswell as inserting all the text in the proper captions automatically.
You can create a project from Harmony scenes. Before you do this, inHarmony, you must mark the frames you want to use as panels in yourproject. Frames must be marked in an annotation column called "EM".

New from Harmony Scenes

For each marked frame, a panel is created in Storyboard Pro. If you
don't mark your frames, the first frame of each Harmony scene will be
used.
You must group all your different Harmony scenes in one folder.
Storyboard Pro will create one scene per Harmony scene. If yourHarmony scene contains several EM markers in the annotation column,
Storyboard Pro will create multiple panels within the scene.

Open

Displays the Open Project dialog box where you can browse for a
project file. You can open a new project from the current one and theprevious project will close.

Open Recent

Displays a list of the most recently opened projects.

Clear

Clears the list of recently opened projects.

Close

Closes the currently opened project, but does not close the Storyboard
Pro application.

Save

Saves all changes made to the opened project, drawings, palettes, and211

Chapter 3: Menus

palette lists. If you are working on an unpacked project, your changes
are saved to the local cache.
Saves the current file with a different name and at a different location.
Saves the current state of a project as another project. The Save As
window prompts you for a new name and a different location for thisproject before saving it. This will create a complete project directory forthe new project.
Save AsNOTE
The project name cannot exceed 23 characters. To use longer
names, select the Disable project name length limitation
option in the Preferences dialog box.

You can also save a project as a single file by saving it as an .sbpz file.

Save and Pack

Saves an unpacked project and rezips it to the original zipped project
file.

Project Management

Split

Divides a storyboard into two parts. Each part can be saved as adifferent file. You can save the first half of the project, the last half ofthe project, or both. You can also preserve the original project intact orremove the panels from the original project. The selected panel
determines the point of division.

Extract

Dvides a storyboard into several parts. Each export will be saved as adifferent file. You can save an intact copy of the entire storyboard or
you can divide the project into separate files.

Merge

After dividing a storyboard project by splitting or extracting it, you canreassemble all the files into a single project file. Using the Mergecommand, you can bring several projects into one final Storyboard Pro
project.

InsertAfter splitting a storyboard project, you can reintegrate the scenes
from a separate project file.

Merge and Replace

Once the various parts of your project are complete and you are readyto bring it all back into the master project, you can easily merge andreplace the changed scenes. To merge and replace scenes, you must

212

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

keep a copy of your master project intact.
What is the difference between merging and merging/replacing? Whenmerging a project, two projects are combined into one; each projectappears sequentially in the Thumbnails and Timeline views. A merge
and replace integrates scene changes back into the master project; any
scenes that were changed are replaced with the new one. As an
option, you can keep a copy of the original files for verification
purposes.

NOTE
When merging projects, the sounds in the master project will
now move in order to sync with the panels. Because thesounds will follow panels based on their name, it is important
to lock scene and panel names before distributing thedifferent scene's extracts, in order to preserve them.

Restore and Open Backup

Backup Storyboard

Lets you locate a previously backed up version of a project and opensit.
Creates a compressed version of your project. Backing up your work
provides a safety net against corrupted files and allows you to haveseveral versions of your project at different stages, in case you everwant to go back and work from an earlier point in the production.

Optimize Project

Create Optimized Drawings

Opens the Optimize Project dialog box from which can remove unused
elements, flatten all drawings and reduce the texture resolution in the
project. This will reduce the file size of a project and increase thespeed at which you can work on a project.
When using any of the playback options in Storyboard Pro, thesoftware has to calculate the positioning of all the *.tvgs (Toon Boom
vector graphics), the file format that is created from all your drawing
strokes. This calculation tends to slow down the rate of playback.
There is, however, a way to circumvent this problem.
There is a a second file format, the *.tvgo (Toon Boom vector graphic
optimized) that has all the pixel position information precalculated.
Using these drawings should significantly speed up playback.

Regenerate All Thumbnails

Lets you get the most up-to-date thumbnails in the Thumbnails view.
As you draw, a series of small images (thumbnails) is generated. These
thumbnails are automatically refreshed based on the refresh duration
you set in the Preferences dialog box (Advanced tab, Delay Before
Updating Thumbnails parameter).

213

Chapter 3: Menus

You can update thumbnails immediately. This removes all cached
thumbnails in the Thumbnails and Timeline views, and forces new
thumbnails to be regenerated.
ImportImages as Scenes

Let you import one or several images and automatically create a newscene for each. This is useful if you have a series of bitmap images thatyou need to include, such as backgrounds or scanned storyboards.
The supported image formats include: .bmp, .jpg, .omf, .opt, .pal, .png,.psd, .scan, .sgi, .tga, .tif, .tvg, and .yuv.
As you build a scene, you may want to use bitmap images forbackgrounds and overlays. You may also want to import an image as areference for a vector drawing you want to create.
With Storyboard Pro, you can import a variety of bitmap formats (.jpe,.jpeg, .jpg, .opt, .pal, .png, .psd, .omf, .scan, .sgi, .tga, .tvg, .yuv) which
you can combine with vector-animated content to create rich andunique graphic styles.

Images as Layers

You can import a single image (or multiple images located in the same
folder) into a new layer.

IMPORTANT
Storyboard Pro does not support import of 8-bit CMYK or 16bit RGB or CMYK format .psd files. You can currently import
only 8-bit RGBA format .psd files.

Allows you to import images or movie files into clips in video tracks,
which are independent from your animatic and can be made to appear
over or underneath the elements in your storyboard.

Videos/Images as Clips

Movie files can be imported as video clips to be played in yourprojects. Still images can be imported as static video clip which can bemade to last any amount of time.
You can import any image file supported by Storyboard Pro as a video
clip. You can also import movie files in QuickTime Movie (.mov) or
MPEG-4 (.mp4, .m4v) format which are encoded with the H.264. On
Windows only, you can also import Windows Media Video (*.wmv)
files, and on macOS only, you can also import QuickTime Movie (.mov)files encoded in Apple ProRes.

Sound Files

Allows you to import sound files (.wav, .aif, .aiff or .mp3) as sound214

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

clips into an audio track.

Record Sound

Allows you to record a sound clip using your workstation's recording
device directly into an audio track in your project.

ExportLets you export a storyboard project to bitmap files in .psd (withseparate layers), .tga, .jpg or .png format. A separate bitmap file is
Bitmap

Layoutexported for each panel in the storyboard. When exporting .psd files,
animations and transitions are not exported, but camera movements
are rendered into an independent layer.In the case of a .psd file,transform and transition animations are not exported. However,camera moves are rendered into an independent layer.
Lets you export scenes into layout images, which can be used to set
up animation scenes or to create background art based on the scenelayout and camera movements. Layout images can be rendered with alllayers combined or with one image per layer, and can optionally
include camera frames and movements. Layouts can be exported in.psd (with separate layers), .tga, .jpg or .png format.
Lets you export the current frame into a .jpeg, .psd, .tga or .png image.
Note that .psd files will contain each layer in the panel, named by theirlayer name.

Current Image

NOTE
No caption or camera frame will be exported in the image file.

CSV

EDL/AAF/XML

Lets you the data in a storyboard project in comma separated value(.csv) file format. You can view this data in any application that
supports comma separated value files, such as Microsoft Excel. If you
do not have Microsoft Excel installed, you can save the .csv file to yourcomputer and open the file in another application.
Once a storyboard is complete, you can send it to a Non-linear Editing(NLE) system to complete the animatic in a real editing suite with adirect return on TV or use it as a pre-editing map to replace thestoryboard scenes with the final materials (shot in live action orrendered from a 2D or 3D software).
You can export your storyboard project and preserve the timing,
motions, and sounds edited with Storyboard Pro, directly to Apple215

Chapter 3: Menus

Final Cut Pro 7 or Adobe Premiere using the EDL or XML formats, or to
Avid Xpress, Sony Vegas or Adobe Premiere using the AAF format.

Movie

Lets you export your storyboard and animatic as a movie file to shareand play back easily for an efficient timing reference. You can export
your movie file in different movie formats (Windows Media Video,
QuickTime or Flash) and as image sequences (.jpeg, .tga or .png).
Lets you export your storyboard project as a .pdf file which you can

PDF

Audio

later print or share electronically. This is where you will find the way to
set up your visuals to represent a classic storyboard on paper. An
extensive number of options, settings and customizing is possible
while exporting to PDF.
Allows you to export your project's audio into one or several soundfiles. You can choose to export a single file for all your project's audio
tracks, or to export each audio track individually. You can also choose
to export a single track for your whole project, or to separate it byscene, sequence or act.
Allows you to export your animatic into a set of Harmony scenes.
After the export, you can open the scenes Toon Boom Harmony rightaway and kickstart the production of your animation project. If you are

To Harmony

FBX

working with Harmony Server, you can export a package of scenesthat can be imported into your database using Control Center. The
resulting Harmony scenes will be the same length as the scenes inyour Storyboard Pro project, they will contain each of their panels sothat you may animate over them, and they will contain their respective
part of the animatic's soundtrack.
Lets you export your storyboard project in FBX format, which allows
you to store any motion data (from element motion or Camera
angles/zooms), as well as the 2D and 3D elements in your scene. Once
exported to FBX, you can open the storyboard elements in a thirdparty 3D application and continue to work on them.
These elements should only be exported to FBX when you are finishedwith them in Storyboard Pro. Normally, you would not bring theelements back into Storyboard Pro.

Conformation

Export Project

Allows you to export your Storyboard Pro project for conformation.
You can export your project in a format compatible with Final Cut Pro

216

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

7 or Avid Media Composer. You can then make edits to your project in
the intended software, and conform it back into Storyboard Pro to
integrate the changes made in the video editing software.

Export Selected Panels

Lets you export the selected panels for conformation, instead of theentire project.

Export Tracked Panels

Lets you export tracked panels for conformation, instead of the entire
project.
Once you have imported your project’s conformation (XML or AAF)
into the-third party software and finished editing it,, you will need toexport it once again as an XML or AAF file to bring it back into your
Storyboard Pro project. This option allows you to import the resulting
XML or AAF file back into the project and apply the changes made in
the editing software to your animatic.

Import Animatic Project

NOTES
l

l

Refer to your third party software’s documentation tolearn how to export the animatic project in an XML or
AAF file format.
You can only reimport a modified conformation XML
or AAF file into the original project from which it was
first exported.

Update Captions from CSVLets you update the captions in your project. If you generate a .csv
sheet (comma separated values) from your project, you can update thefile, then import it into Storyboard Pro. Doing so will update all caption
fields automatically. You must first generate the CSV from your current
project.

Quit

Closes the application.

217

Chapter 3: Menus

Help Menu
The Help menu lets you display the Storyboard Pro documentation, Welcome screen and end user license
agreement, as well as access the Toon Boom website, and identify the product name and version number.

How to access the Help menulAt the top of the interface, select Help.

Command

Description

Online Help

Opens the Storyboard Pro Help system, complete with instructions on
how to use the system. This requires an internet connection.

Getting Started

Opens the Storyboard Pro Getting Started Guide (in PDF format) in abrowser window. Requires Acrobat Reader.

Storyboard Pro on the Web

Opens the Toon Boom website, which features a Support andCommunity > Forum section.
The Customer Experience Improvement Program allows Toon Boom toCustomer Experience Improvement
Programcollect usage information. The data does not contain any personallyidentifiable information and cannot be used to identify you. The data
will consist of a basic hardware description, a project summary andusage information. The information is used only for software
improvement purposes, as well as for sharing with third parties for thesame reason.
This program is enabled by default but is voluntary. If you prefer not toparticipate, you can opt out when you first launch the software, byusing a global preference, or by a command line argument.

Show End User License Agreement

Displays the End User License Agreement.

Check for Updates

Checks for updates to Storyboard Pro.

Debug Mode

When enabled, information is logged in the Message Log view about
the preview generated in the Camera view, each time the preview isrefreshed. In OpenGL preview mode, summary information is logged
about the amount of nodes to process and the time it takes to generate
the preview. In Render Preview mode, detailed information about eachcomposite and effect that is processed is logged.

218

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

About

Identifies the product name and version number.

219

Chapter 3: Menus

Layer Menu
The Layer menu lets you manipulate layers, create new layers, change the resolution, and reset thetransformation and pivot.

How to access the Layer menulAt the top of the interface, select Layer.

Command

Description

New

Vector Layer

Bitmap Layer

Adds a vector drawing layer to the current panel, in which you candraw with the whole suite of vector drawing tools available
in Storyboard Pro. Most of the artwork in vector layers is made ofvector shape information, which is lightweight and scalable.
Adds a bitmap drawing layer to the current panel, in which you candraw using the bitmap drawings tools available in Storyboard Pro.
Artwork in bitmap layers is saved as a grid of pixels, each of whichstoring their colour information. It is not scalable and is moreheavyweight, but may be better suited for textured artwork.

Group Layer

Adds a group layer to the current panel. Groups can contain one orseveral layers, and even other groups. If you manipulate or animate agroup, all of its elements will be subjected to the same transformations
as the group itself.

Copy Layers

Copies the currently selected layers to the clipboard, so that you canpaste the copies in the same panel or into a different panels.

Paste Layers

Pastes the layers copied with the Copy Layers command into thecurrent panel.

Duplicate Layers

Instantly creates a copy of the selected layer and puts it in the current
panel.

Rename Layers

Allows you to rename the selected layer.

Delete Layers

Deletes the selected layer.

220

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Change Layer Opacity

Allows you to set the opacity level of the selected layer.

Change Vector Layer Brush Resolution

Allows you to set the pixel density of textured brush strokes on theselected vector layer. Since textured brush strokes have bitmap
textures inside them, it may be necessary to increase their pixel density
before you start drawing, if you intend to scale up to layer or to zoom
in on it. Otherwise, the textures in the brush strokes is liable to appear
pixelated.

Change Bitmap Layer Resolution

Allows you to set the canvas size and pixel density of the selected
bitmap layer. It may be required to expand a layer's canvas if you
intend to move, shrink or zoom out on the layer. It may also benecessary to increase a bitmap layer's pixel density before you draw in
it if you intend to scale it up or to zoom in on it. Otherwise, the artwork
is liable to appear pixelated.
Instantly merge the selected layer with the layer just below it.

Merge Down

NOTE
If both layers are vector layers, the merged layer will be avector layer. If one of the layers is a bitmap layer, the mergedlayer will be a bitmap layer.

Merges the selected layers into a single layer.

Merge Selected Layers

NOTE
If all the selected layers are vector layers, the merged layer
will be a vector layer. If at least one of the selected layer is abitmap layer, the merged layer will be a bitmap layer.

Merge Layers

Opens the Merge Layers dialog box, which allows you to merge theselected layers into a single layer and gives you more options than the
Merge Selected Layers command.

Group Selected Layers

Puts the selected layers inside a new group layer.

Ungroup Selected Group

Breaks the selected group layer. All its layers will be outside the group,and the group will be deleted.

Convert to Vector Layer

Convert a bitmap layer to a vector layer. If any artwork is in the bitmap
layer, it will be converted to a vector object with a bitmap texture

221Chapter 3: Menus

inside it.

Convert to Bitmap Layer

Converts a vector layer to a bitmap layer. If any artwork is in the vector
layer, it will be flattened and rasterized into a single bitmap canvas.
If you have imported an animated template or a template containing
multiple elements, for example, a template created in Harmony, or atemplate made from importing a Flash Movie (.swf) file, you might not
be able to edit it with the drawing tools. This is because the template
is not a simple drawing layer. This option will convert the layer
containing a template to a flat drawing layer that can be edited freely. It
can also be used to convert a group of layers into a single drawing.

Convert to Drawing

NOTES
l

l

In Storyboard Pro, a drawing layer can only contain
one drawing for the whole panel, whereas a template
may be animated and contain several frames withdifferent drawings in each frame. If you convert an
animated template to a drawing, the appearance ofthe template at current frame will be used to generatea static drawing layer.
Converting a template or a group to a drawing will
discard any 3D object they contain.

Share Drawing

Adds the selected drawing to the library of shared drawings, which
can be opened, navigated and edited in the Library view. You can thenimport the drawing into other panels. Since the drawing is shared,
making changes to that drawing in one panel will apply the samechanges to that drawing in all the other panels it was added to.

Unlink from Shared Drawing

If you have a shared drawing in a panel, and you want to makechanges to that drawing without affecting it in other panels where it isshared, this option will convert the shared drawing into its own
independent drawing in the current panel only. The drawing willremain shared in other panels where it was added.

Apply Effect on Bitmap Layer
Blur

Applies a simple blurring effect to the selected bitmap layer.

Radial Zoom Blur

Applies a blur that follows one of several preset movement patterns tothe selected bitmap layer.

222

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Directional Blur

Generate Auto-Matte

Applies a blur that follows a specific direction, in a straight line, to theselected bitmap layer.
Opens the Auto-Matte dialog box, enabling you to fill in sketch
objects, hiding anything that is behind the object. You can create newlayers by generating auto-matte of selected vector layers. This menu
option is grayed-out if no layers are selected, or if none of the selected
layers are non-empty vector layers.

Arrange
Bring Layer to Front

Moves the selected layer in front of all other layers in the current panel.

Bring Layer Forward

Moves the selected layer up one level in the current panel.

Send Layer Backward

Move the selected layer down one level in the current panel.

Send Layer Back

Moves the selected behind all other layers in the current panel.

Select Next Layer

Selects the next layer in the layer list.

Select Previous Layer

Selects the previous layer in the layer list.

Lock/Unlock Layers

Locks or unlocks the selected layer. When a layer is locked, it isprotected from changes to its artwork and from transformations.

Show/Hide Layers

Shows or hides the selected layer. A hidden layer does not appear in
the storyboard and cannot be changed or transformed.

Toggle Background Layers

Sets the selected layer as a background layer. Background layers are
not taken in account when Onion Skin is enabled.

Align Layer to Camera

When working in 3D, if the camera has been rotated on the x-axis or
y-axis, drawing layers will no longer be facing the camera. Thisinstantly rotates the layer so that it faces the camera.

Copy End Layer Position to Start

Uses the position of the last frame from the current layer and pastes itover the position of the first frame.

Copy Start Layer Position to Start

Uses the position of the first frame from the current layer and paste it

223

Chapter 3: Menus

over the last frame.

Spread Layer Motion

You can spread the current layer motion across all panels in the same
shot or a specified number of adjacent panels after the current panel inthe same shot.
A new layer will be added and the drawing will be duplicated for thosepanels that do not have the same name in the defined range.

Reset Transform

Resets the selected layer to its default position, size and angle.

Reset Selected 3D Sub-Objects

Resets the selected sub-objects of a 3D model to their default
position, size and angle.

Pivot

Reset Pivot

Places the pivot back at its default position at the centre of the camera
frame.

Center Pivot on Selection

Places the pivot at the centre of a selection.

Set Layer Layout as Default

Once you set up a layer layout in a panel, you can select that panel andsave this layout as the default layout to use whenever a new panel isadded.

224

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Play Menu
The Play menu lets you preview your project as an animatic in Storyboard Pro at any time during its
development process. Using the Playback toolbar, you can preview the visual content, includingtransformations and transitions, and have it synchronized with sounds.

How to access the Play menulAt the top of the interface, select Play.

Command

Description

Play

Plays the animatic in the Stage or Camera view.

Play Selection

Plays the selected panel in the Timeline or Thumbnails view.

Loop

If pressed, your animatic will repeat indefinitely when playing.
Otherwise, it will stop when the end is reached.

Audio Playback

When enabled, the soundtrack of your project will play during
playback.

Audio Scrubbing

When enabled, the part of the soundtrack that is at the current frame
will play every time you move the timeline cursor, allowing you tonavigate the timeline of your animatic by sound. This makes it easier tosynchronize the action and the audio in your animatic.

Include Audio in Playback Range

When enabled, if the soundtrack ends after the end of the last panel inyour animatic, playback will continue until the end of the soundtrackinstead of stopping at the end of the last panel.

Camera Preview

Lets you preview camera moves and transitions. When you drag thetimeline playhead while Camera Preview is enabled, it will adjust theStage view to match the point of view of the camera.

Project First Frame

Moves the timeline playhead to the first frame of the project.

Previous Scene

Moves the timeline playhead to the previous scene.

Previous Panel

Moves the timeline playhead to the previous panel.

225

Chapter 3: Menus

Panel First Frame

Moves the timeline playhead to the first frame of the current panel.

Previous Frame

Moves the timeline playhead to the previous frame.

Next Frame

Moves the timeline playhead to the next frame.

Panel Last Frame

Moves the timeline playhead to the last frame of the current panel.

Next Panel

Moves the timeline playhead to the next panel.

Next Scene

Moves the timeline playhead to the next scene.

Last Panel

Moves the timeline playhead to the last panel.0

Project Last Frame

Moves the timeline playhead to the last frame of the project.

Go to Scene

Opens the Go to Scene dialog box, which allows you to select a scene
in your project and instantly move the timeline playhead to that scene.
Opens the Go to Frame dialog in which you can enter a frame number
and instantly move the timeline playhead to that specific frame.

Go to FrameNOTE
The frame number is based on the start time of your project. If
your project starts at frame 0, entering 0 will move thetimeline playhead to the first frame of your project.

226

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Storyboard Menu
The Storyboard menu lets you work with panels, scenes, sequences and transitions. You can also record
annotations, track changes, and view and edit the project properties.

How to access the Storyboard menu‣

At the top of the interface, select Storyboard.

Command

Description

New
New Panel

Creates a new panel after the current panel.

New Panel Before

Creates a new panel before the current panel.

New Scene

Creates a new scene after the current scene.

New Scene Before

Creates a new scene before the current scene.

New Scene from Selected Panels

Creates a new scene from the selected panels.
Creates a new sequence with a new scene and a new panel inside it at
the end of the current sequence.

New Sequence

NOTE
If your project currently does not have sequences, it will put
the entire storyboard into a single sequence, and create a new
sequence at the end of the storyboard.

New Sequence from Selection

Creates a new sequence from the currently selected scenes.

227

Chapter 3: Menus

NOTES
l

l

If your project currently does not have sequence, thescenes before the selection will be grouped together
into a sequence, and all the scenes after the selection
will be grouped together into another sequence.
Sequences must include whole scenes. If you only
select some of the panels in a scene, the whole scene
will be included in the sequence.

New Video Track

Adds a new video track to your animatic.

New Audio Track

Adds a new audio track to your animatic.
Starts a new act at the current scene.

Start New Act

NOTEThis option is only available if acts are enabled in the Generaltab of the Preferences dialog.

Smart Add Panel

Creates a new panel that contains elements from another panel.

Duplicate Selected Panels

Lets you duplicate selected panels when you need to create an exact
copy of an existing one.

Delete Panel

Deletes a selected panel. Note that it is impossible to have an empty
project as there is a minimum of one panel.

Rename Panel

Lets you rename one or more panels simultaenously. By default, therename panels option is locked. You must unlock this option in the
Preferences dialog box before you can rename panels.

Rename Scene

Rename Sequence

Lets you rename a sequence. Once you start adding sequences to yourproject, the Sequence field will become visible in the Panel view,
allowing you to view the selected sequence's name and edit it if
needed.

228

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Lock Scene and Panel Names

Locks scene and panel names.

Unlock Scene and Panel Names

Unlocks scene and panel names.

Lock Scene Duration

Locks the duration of all scenes in your project. This ensures that thecurrent length of every scene is preserved when adding, duplicating, ordeleting panels.
Splits the current panel in two, resulting in two identical panels

Split Panel at Current Frame

Move Panel In to Current Frame

generated from the original. All elements, including layers, will be in
both panels. Each panel’s length is determined by the position of the
red playhead when you perform the operation.
Lets you adjust the duration and position of a panel by moving its inand out points to a specific frame determined by the position of the
red playhead.

NOTE
Move Panel Out to Current Frame

Note that the frame you specify must be contained within thecurrent position of the panel you want to change the in or out
point of.

Lets you adjust the duration of a panel one frame at a time.
Add Frame to Panel

Remove Frame from Panel

NOTE
By default, when changing the duration of a panel, theposition of existing Camera and Layer keyframes in the panel
are adjusted to the new duration of a panel. However, since
the position of keyframes is always in whole frames, theymight not get adjusted as expected when adjusting theduration of a panel one frame at a time. This behavior cannot
be changed for Layer keyframes.

Lets you split the current scene in two or break it into three parts.
Split Current Scene

When you split a scene, it is divided before the current panel by
default.

229

Chapter 3: Menus

NOTE
You can change this in your preferences so that when you split
a scene, it is broken into three parts and the selected panel isisolated.

Split Current Sequence

Separates a sequence in two.

Join Selected Sequence

Joins two selected sequences.

Join Selected Acts

Joins selected acts. Once an act has been split, it is possible to join
acts at any time.

Markers
Add Marker

Creates a new timeline marker at the current frame.

Edit Marker

Allows you to change the colour and to add a note to the currently
selected timeline marker.

Delete Marker

Deletes the currently selected timeline marker.

Delete All Markers

Deletes all timeline markers in the project.

Go to Next Marker

Moves the timeline cursor to the next marker in the project.

Go to Previous Marker

Moves the timeline cursor to the previous marker in the project.

Rename Track

Renames the currently selected video or audio track.

Delete Current Track

Deletes the currently selected video or audio track.

Lock/Unlock All Video Tracks

If no video track is currently locked, this locks all video tracks in the
project. If at least one video track is locked, this unlocks all video
tracks in the project.

Lock/Unlock All Audio Tracks

If no audio track is currently locked, this locks all audio tracks in the

Tracks230

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

project. If at least one audio track is locked, this unlocks all audio
tracks in the project.

Add Snapshot

Lets you add snapshot markers to specify which frames in a panel will
be visible in a PDF file you export. By default, only the first frame ofeach panel is visible in the PDF file you export. Sometimes, you may
need to display a specific frame or several frames from a panel.

Change Panel Duration

Lets you modify the duration of a selected panel.

Add Transition

Lets you add a transition between scenes. Once the transition iscreated, you can customize it.

Delete Transition

Removes a selected transition.

Delete Transition Duration

Lets you modify the duration of a selected transition.
Converts a selected scene to 3D which lets you move and rotate
2D and 3D layers in 3D space. Even if you do not have 3D objects inyour scene, you can still move 2D objects along the Z-axis to create amultiplane effect. A 3D scene will also allow a camera to be moved in

Enable 3D for Current Scene

3D space using the Camera tool.

NOTE
Converting a scene to 3D applies only to the selected scene,
not the entire project.

Storyboard Pro lets you reset a scene to 2D. When you do so, thefollowing happens:
Reset Scene to 2D•

Imported 3D models are removed.

•

3D camera moves are removed.

•

2D layers that have been moved and rotated in 3D are set backto 2D, removing those transformations.

Lets you record a voice annotation. You will need a microphonecorrectly connected to your computer and Storyboard Pro.
Record Voice Annotation

After the voice annotation has been recorded, the Voice Annotations
section indicates the total number of annotations, displaying the orderof the current voice annotation in the sequence and the total numberof voice annotations associated with the panel. As you record voice

231

Chapter 3: Menus

annotations, they accumulate in sequence without being overwritten.
You can select and play back any of the annotations.
Track Changes

Auto Tracking Mode

Lets you automatically detect any changes in your project, and adds avisual notification in the Thumbnails and Timeline views.
Lets you track changes by date. If a storyboard becomes very large, it

Track Change by Date

Validate Changes

Properties

may be easier to track changes made on a specific date. Opens the
Search by Date dialog box which contains options to help you trackchanges even more efficiently.
When you use the Auto Tracking Mode feature, you can use the
Validate Changes option to follow up on these changes.
Lets you follow up on changes made to your project when using Auto
Tracking Mode.
Opens the Project Properties dialog box where you can change theproperty settings in your project.

232

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Tools Menu
The Tools menu lets you access all the main tools you need to work in Storyboard Pro.

How to access the Tools menu‣

At the top of the interface, select Tools.

Command

Description

SelectAllows you to select and reposition, scale, rotate and skew brushstrokes, pencil lines, shapes and other parts of your artwork.

Select by Colour

Lets you rapidly select all drawing parts painted or drawn with thecolour you have selected in the Colour view.

Contour Editor

Allows you to edit the vector contours of brush strokes, pencil lines
and shapes in your artwork. You can add, remove, tweak and movevector points, move the Bezier handles of the vector points as well as
deform vector outlines.

CutterAllows you to cut a part of your artwork, then reposition, scale, rotateand skew it.

Perspective

Allows you to deform artwork by applying a perspective effect on it.

Brush

A pressure-sensitive tool for creating a contour shape with a thick andthin line effect, as if created with a paint brush.

PencilA pressure-sensitive tool for drawing outlines. Pencil lines are made ofcentral vector lines, making them easier to tweak and edit than brushstrokes.

EraserA pressure-sensitive tool for erasing parts of a drawing.

Rectangle
EllipseDraws a straight line segment going from one point to the other.

Line

233

Chapter 3: Menus

Text

Allows you to add text and to format it.

Paint

Allows you to fill colour zones with a colour or texture.

Paint Unpainted

Allows you to quickly fill empty zones in your artwork with a colour or
texture, leaving filled zones unchanged.

Unpaint

Allows you to empty filled colour zones of their colour and texture.

Close Gap

Allows you to close open shapes so that they can be filled with the
Paint tool. By drawing a stroke near a small gap in a shape, this tool
will create a small invisible stroke connecting the two closest points
around the gap.

Edit Gradient/Texture

Allows you to adjust the position, angle and size of gradients andtextures in a colour zone.

Dropper

Allows you to select a colour by clicking on a colour in your artwork.

Hand

Allows you to pan the Stage and Camera views.

Zoom

Allows you zoom in and out of the Stage and Camera views.

Rotate View

Lets you rotate the Stage and Camera views just like with a realanimation disc.

3D Navigation
3D Flying Navigation
Arrange
Bring to Front

Moves the selected art to the front (on top).

Bring Forward

Moves the selected art one level forward (closer to the front).

Send Backward

Moves the selected art one level lower (behind).

Send to Back

Moves the selected art behind everything (bottom / back).

234

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Transform
Flip Horizontal

Flips the current selection horizontally.

Flip Vertical

Flips the current selection vertically.

Rotate 90 CW

Rotates the current selection 90 degrees clockwise.

Rotate 90 CCW

Rotates the current selection 90 degrees counter-clockwise.

Rotate 180

Rotates the current selection 180 degrees.

ConvertPencil Lines to Brush Strokes

Changes a centre line pencil stroke to a contour line brush stroke.
Changes a centre line (pencil) stroke to a contour line (brush) stroke.
When drawing on vector layers, you may want to change brushstrokes to pencil lines to convert contour strokes into centre line pencil
strokes.

Brush Strokes to Pencil Lines

NOTE
Any line thickness information is lost upon conversion frombrush to pencil.

Strokes to Pencil Lines
Text contained in a text field is treated as a single drawing object. This
option separates text so that each character becomes an individualdrawing object that you can select and modify independently.

NOTE
Break Apart Text Layers

After your text has been broken apart twice, into a regulardrawing object, you can use all the drawing tools such as theEraser tool, on the drawing. Be aware that if you want to use
the Perspective tool on the text, you should create the text ona vector layer before breaking it apart twice; then you can use
the Perspective tool on it.

235Chapter 3: Menus

Layer Transform

Lets you reposition, scale, rotate and even skew layers in the Camera
view.

Maintain Size

Scales drawing layers when they are moved on the Z-axis to preserve
their size in the camera.

Create Layer on Surface

Creates a new layer on top of the hovered surface.

CameraLets you add camera movements to scenes and set keyframes toanimate it over time.

Lets you set the position of the content of the panels for the entire
scene so it fits the camera frame you defined.
ReframeNOTE
When setting the camera frame using the Reframe tool, it is
not possible to reset it to its former position.

Merges Merges drawing objects and brush strokes into a single layer.
FlattenIf you draw new lines to fix a drawing or line with many brush strokes,
it can be useful to flatten them all into a single shape. By default, lines
are drawn one on top of each other. If you intend to repaint the lines ormodify their shape, it will be easier if they are flattened.

236

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

View Menu
The View menu lets you manipulate the view by zooming, panning, or rotating. You can also display the gridand change its size, use the onion skin feature to help with drawing, and set the preview resolution.

How to access the View menulAt the top of the interface, select View.

Command

Description
Cycles through the following display modes:lToggle Full ScreenllNormal Full-Screen: The main application window becomesfull screen.
View Full-Screen: The selected view becomes full screen andall other views are collapsed.
Normal: The main application window is restored to its original
size and collapsed views are expanded.

Zoom In

Zooms in the view.

Zoom Out

Zooms out the view.

Reset Zoom

Resets the view’s zoom to its default position.

Rotate View CW

Rotates the Camera view 30 degrees clockwise, like an animationtable.

Rotate View CCW

Rotates the Camera view 30 degrees counter-clockwise, like ananimation table.

Reset Rotation

Resets the view’s rotation to its default position.

Look at Selected

Makes the Stage view perpendicular to a selected drawing layer,allowing you to draw on it. This is useful when rotating 2D layers in
3D space and the Stage view is no longer perpendicular to a Drawing
layer, making it impossible to draw on it.

Reset Pan

Resets the view’s pan to its default position.

237

Chapter 3: Menus

Reset View

Resets the view to its default position.

Reset Stage View To

Default Drawing Area

Resets the Stage view to show the default drawing area, which is thespace situated inside the default camera frame (before the camera ismodified).

Current Panel Overview

Resets the Stage view to show the current panel in its entirety

Camera Overview

Resets the Stage view to show an overview of the Camera frames. If a
Camera movement was created in the selected panel, it will show theentire space within the camera movement.

Start Camera Frame

Resets the Stage view to focus on the starting camera position of thecamera movement on the current panel.

End Camera Frame

Resets the Stage view to focus on the ending camera position of thecamera movement on the current panel.
Lets you determine at which level the current position of the Stage

Point of View Modeview (zoom, pan and rotation) is remembered when you are flipping
through panels.

Project Level

One global point of view for the entire project.

Scene Level

One point of view per scene.

Panel Level

One point of view per panel.

Show Grid

Displays the grid.

Grid Outline Only

Displays the outline of the grid only.

Underlay

Displays the grid under the drawing elements.

Overlay

Displays the grid over the drawing elements.

Grid

238

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Square Grid

Displays a standard square grid.

12 Field Grid

Displays a 12-field size grid.

16 Field Grid

Displays a 16-field size grid.

World Grid

Displays a reference grid that remains the same size when you scale
objects. This is useful when creating elements in your drawing andyou need a reference point.

Camera Mask

Shows or hides a black mask around the scene’s frame to avoid seeing
anything outside the Camera frame. This is handy when you are
setting up the scene as it allows you to see the scene’s composition
better.

Extras

Displays the Title Safe Area frame inside the camera frame. By default,
this area is 20% smaller than the camera frame. It is used as a guidelineof the area that CRT displays might crop out of the picture. Visualelements such as text and logos should be placed within this area.
Show Title Safe Area

NOTE
The size of this area can be changed in the Camera tab of thePreferences dialog..

Show Title Safe Area Mask

Displays a semi-transparent black mask covering the area between thecamera frame and the Title Safe Area frame.
Displays the Action Safe Area frame inside the camera frame. Bydefault, this area is 10% smaller than the camera frame. It is used as a
guideline of the area that CRT displays might crop out of the picture.
Characters and action should be placed within this area.

Show Action Safe Area

NOTE
The size of this area can be changed in the Camera tab of thePreferences dialog..

Show Action Safe Area Mask

Displays a semi-transparent black mask covering the area between thecamera frame and the Action Safe Area.

239

Chapter 3: Menus

Show 4:3 Safe Area

Shows or hides the TV safety zone and the centre of the camera frame
for a regular 4:3 resolution. If you are working on a widescreen project,for example, you can easily plan in advance the conversion of yourproject to a TV format. This way, you can create your project to fit bothresolutions.

Show 4:3 Area

Shows or hides the 4:3 resolution zone without the centre of thecamera frame and TV safety zone.

Show Strokes

Displays the strokes in your drawings so that the invisible lines standout.

Show Complete Camera Path

Displays all the related camera keyframes and paths in a scene. When
this button is deactivated, the Stage view only displays keyframes thatare contained in a panel.

Show Layer Path

If the current layer is animated, this displays the animation path of thelayer in yellow in the Stage and Camera views, with notches along thepath indicating the position of the layer on each frame of theanimation.

Onion Skin

No Previous Drawing

Removes the previous drawing's onion skin and displays only the next
drawing.

Previous Drawing

Displays the previous drawing.

Previous Two Drawings

Displays the previous two drawings.

Previous Three Drawings

Displays the previous three drawings.

No Next Drawing

Do not show the onion skin for all of the next drawings.

Next Drawing

Show the onion skin for the next drawing.

Next Two Drawings

Show the onion skin for the next two drawings.

Next Three Drawings

Show the onion skin for the next three drawings.

240

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference GuideShow Only the Selected Layers

Light Table

Only displays the onion skin for layers in neighbouring panels thathave the same name as the currently selected layer.
Turns on the light table so you can see Turns on the light table so you
can see the previous and subsequent active layers in washed-out
colours. It is useful for seeing the other layers when designing,
animating or cleaning up your animation.
Gives you a live preview of shapes in Draw Behind mode, which is for

Realistic Preview

painting behind existing art. When using this mode, strokes appear
instantly under your work while drawing with the Draw Behind mode.

241

Chapter 3: Menus

Windows Menu
The Windows menu lets you customize your workspace to suit your working style, save it as a new workspace,and load it from the Workspace toolbar. You can also show or hide the different toolbars and views inStoryboard Pro.

How to access the Windows menulFrom the top menu, select Windows.

Command

Description

Workspace

Workspace Manager

Opens the Workspace Manager where you can modify, create, delete,rename and reorder your workspaces.

Save Workspace

Saves the current workspace, including any changes you made to it.

Save Workspace As

Lets you save the current workspace with a new name.

Workspace

Lets you open workspaces designed specifically for working with
3D elements, drawing, overview, reviewing PDFs, pitch mode, timelineand horizontal and vertical views.

Toolbars

Lets you show or hide these toolbars: Camera, Edit, File, Layer,
Navigation, Sound, Storyboard, Tools, Shows or hides the Side
view.iew, Workspace, Coordinate, Onion Skin, Playback, Scripting andTool Presets.

3D SchematicShows or hides the 3D Schematic view.

Function Editor

Shows or hides the Function Editor view.

Camera View

Shows or hides the Camera view.

ColourShows or hides the Colour view.

LayersShows or hides the Layer Properties view.

242Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Library

Shows or hides the Library view.

Message Log

Shows or hides the Message Log view.

Panel

Shows or hides the Panel view.

Panel PDF Options

Shows or hides the Panel PDF Options view.

PDF Export

Shows or hides the PDF Export view.

Pitch Mode View

Shows or hides the Pitch Mode view.

Side View

Shows or hides the Side view.

Storyboard Pro View

Shows or hides the Storyboard Pro view.

Storyboard

Shows or hides the Storyboard view.

Thumbnails

Shows or hides the Thumbnails view.

Timeline

Shows or hides the Timeline view.

Tool Properties

Shows or hides the Tool Properties view.

Top

Shows or hides the Top view.

Script Editor

Shows or hides the Script Editor view.

Restore Default Workspace

Returns Returns modified workspaces to their original default layout if
you do not like the current modifications or inadvertently closed some
windows.

243Chapter 3: Menus

View Menus
The following is a list of the view menus that are documented in this section:

244

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

3D Graph View Menu
The 3D Graph View menu gives you access to commands related to the 3D Graph view, such as selecting subobjects, and disabling and enabling sub-objects.

How to access the 3D Graph View menul

In the upper-left corner of the 3D Graph view, click the Menu

Commandbutton.

Description

Edit
Select All

Selects all the items in the 3D graph (all the parts of the 3D model).

Deselect All

Deselects all the items in the 3D graph (all the parts of the 3D model).

Select First Child Sub-Object

Jumps to the first child sub-object of a selected parent sub-object. Use
the Select Next Sibling sub-object menu option to continue down thelist of children.

Select Parent Sub-Object

Jumps to the parent sub-object of a selected child sub-object.

Select Next Sibling Sub-Object

Selects the next child sub-object of the same parent sub-object.

Select Previous Sibling SubObject

Selects the previous child sub-object of the same parent sub-object.

Sub-Objects

EnableEnables the selected sub-object in the 3D graph list. Enabling the subobject displays the corresponding part of the 3D model in the Camera
and Stage views. You can make a multi-selection with this command.

DisableDisables the selected sub-object in the 3D graph list. Disabling the subobject hides the corresponding part of the 3D model in the Camera andStage views. It will also disable the sub-object children of this subobject. A sub-object cannot have its shape hidden and be disabled at
the same time. You can make a multi-selection with this command.

245

Chapter 3: Menus

Show ShapeShows the selected sub-object shape in the 3D graph list. Showing the
sub-object shape displays the sub-object in the Camera and Stage
views. You can make a multi-selection with this command.

Hide Shape

Hides the selected sub-object shape in the 3D graph list. Hiding the
sub-object shape hides the sub-object in the Camera and Stage views. A
sub-object cannot have its shape hidden and be disabled at the sametime. You can make a multi-selection with this command.

Separate Sub-Tree

The layer containing the 3D objects is duplicated. In this new layer, theselected sub-object(s) and their children are displayed and all others
have their shapes hidden. In the original layer, the selected sub-object(s)and their children have their shape hidden. The new layer is groupedwith the original layer. Any transformation in the original layer istransferred to the parent group. If you selected multiple sub-objects toseparate, all the sub-objects and their children are visible on the newlycreated layer.

Separate

The layer containing the 3D objects is duplicated. In this new layer, theselected sub-object(s) are displayed and all others have their shapehidden. In the original layer, the selected node(s) have their shapehidden. The new layer is grouped with the original layer. Anytransformation in the original layer is transferred to the parent group. If
you selected multiple sub-objects to separate, all the sub-objects arevisible on the newly-created layer.

Extended Mode
Shows the complete sub-object hierarchy. In this mode, you can see
every sub-object of the 3D model, even those that cannot be selected ormanipulated.

246

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Point of View Menu
The Point of View menu lets you determine the level at which the current position of the Stage view (zoom, pan
and rotation) is remembered when you flip through the panels. The current Point of View mode will also affectthe different Reset View commands’ behaviour as they will reset according to the Point of View mode.

How to access the Point of View menu‣

In the status bar of the Stage view, click the Point of View menu and make a selection.

‣

Select View > Point of View Mode.

Parameter

Description

Project

Keeps the zoom, pan and rotation values of the Stage view for the panels of the
project.

Scene

Keeps the zoom, pan and rotation values of the Stage view for the panels that arepart of the current scene.

Panel

Allows every panel of the project to have its own zoom, pan and rotation value.

247

Chapter 3: Menus

Script Editor View Menu
The Script Editor view menu gives you access to all of the commands needed for editing and testing scripts in
the Script Editor view—see Script Editor View on page 428.

How to access the Script Editor view menu
1. Add the Script Editor view to your workspace by doing one of the following:l

In the top-right corner of an existing view, click on the

Add View button and select Script

Editor.
l

In the top menu, select Windows > Script Editor.

2. In the top-left corner of the Script Editor view, click on the

ButtonMenu button.

Description

File
Creates a new script. When you click on this button, you are first prompted to type in a
name for the script. Then, you will be prompted to select which location to save thescript in:l

User: Saves the script to a directory in your user preferences directory. You will
be able to run and edit the script from any scene as long as you are logged in as
the same user.

NOTE
If you are using Harmony Stand Alone, the script will be saved to thepreferences for your account on your computer. if you are using Harmony
Server, the script will be saved to the preferences for your Storyboard
Pro database user.

New Script
l

l

l

l

Global: If you are using Harmony Server, select this option to save the script to
the Storyboard Pro database's global script directory. Anyone who is logged into the database will be able to edit and run this script.
Environment: If you are using Harmony Server, select this option to save thescript to the current scene's environment. Anyone will be able to edit and run thescript as long as they are working on a scene inside this environment.
Job: If you are using Harmony Server, select this option to save the script to thecurrent scene's job. Anyone will be able to edit and run the script as long as they
are working on a scene inside this job.
Scene: Save the script to the scene's scripts sub-folder. Anyone will be able to248

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

ButtonDescription

edit and run the script when working on this specific scene.
lSystem Variable: Save the script to the directory in the TOONBOOM_GLOBAL_SCRIPT_LOCATION environment variable. This option is only available if thisenvironment variable is set.

Allows you to import a script from your machine into Storyboard Pro. When you clickon this button, you are prompted to browse for and select a script on your filesystem. Then, you are prompted to select which location to import the script in:l

User: Saves the script to a directory in your user preferences directory. You will
be able to run and edit the script from any scene as long as you are logged in as
the same user.

NOTE
If you are using Harmony Stand Alone, the script will be saved to thepreferences for your account on your computer. if you are using Harmony
Server, the script will be saved to the preferences for your Storyboard
Pro database user.

Import ScriptlGlobal: If you are using Harmony Server, select this option to save the script to
the Storyboard Pro database's global script directory. Anyone who is logged into the database will be able to edit and run this script.

l

l

l

l

Delete Script

Environment: If you are using Harmony Server, select this option to save thescript to the current scene's environment. Anyone will be able to edit and run thescript as long as they are working on a scene inside this environment.
Job: If you are using Harmony Server, select this option to save the script to thecurrent scene's job. Anyone will be able to edit and run the script as long as they
are working on a scene inside this job.
Scene: Save the script to the scene's scripts sub-folder. Anyone will be able toedit and run the script when working on this specific scene.
System Variable: Save the script to the directory in the TOONBOOM_GLOBAL_SCRIPT_LOCATION environment variable. This option is only available if thisenvironment variable is set.

Deletes the selected script.

249

Chapter 3: Menus

ButtonDescription

NOTES
l

l

You cannot delete a script if it is in the Application Resources location,
as those are scripts that are installed with Storyboard Pro.
If you delete a script that was originally in Application Resources but
which you copied to another location so you could make changes to it,
the original version of the script in the Application Resources folder
will be restored to the list.

Refresh Script
File List

Refresh the list of scripts in the Script Editor. If there are new scripts in your user
preferences or your scene's scripts sub-folder, click on this button to be able to open
them in the Script Editor.

EditorAllows you to type in the path and name for your preferred text editing software.

NOTES
Set External
Editorll

External Editor

On macOS, only typing the name of your preferred text editing softwareis enough if that application supports the AppleScript Open Document
protocol.
On Windows and GNU/Linux, unless your text editor is in yoursystem's PATH environment variable, you will have to type in the fullpath to the editor.

Opens the selected script in the chosen external text editing software.

Play/Debug

Set Target

Prompts you to select which script and which function to use with the Run and Debugcommands.

250

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

ButtonDescription

NOTES
l

l

You can set the entire script as the target by selecting the <Nothing>
function from the functions list.
You cannot link an entire script to a toolbar button. Only functions
within scripts can be added as toolbar buttons. Therefore, running or
debugging an entire script rather than one of its functions should bedone for testing purposes only.

Runs the target script and function.

NOTES
l

Run
l

l

If you have not set a target script and function, you will be prompted to
set one when you select this command.
You can set or change the target script and function by selecting Set
Target from this menu.
If you are editing <<<Sandbox>>>, this button will simply run what
you typed into the sandbox, regardless of whether another target is set.

Open the target script and function in the Qt Script Debugger, in which you can test anddebug the function.

NOTES
l

Debug
l

l

If you have not set a target script and function, you will be prompted to
set one when you select this command.
You can set or change the target script and function by selecting Set
Target from this menu.
If you are editing <<<Sandbox>>>, this button will simply debug what
you typed into the sandbox, regardless of whether another target is set.

Stop

If a script is currently running, this interrupts its execution.

ScriptingInterfaceDocumentation

Opens the reference documentation for the Storyboard Pro scripting interface in a web
browser.

Help

251

Chapter 3: Menus

ButtonDescription

NOTE
This documentation is installed with Storyboard Pro and does not requireInternet access.

252

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

253

Chapter 4: Toolbars

Chapter 4: Toolbars
The Storyboard Pro interface contains toolbars that quicky give you you access many useful tools. You can add,
move and remove toolbars in your workspace. Some toolbars have optional buttons that are hidden by default,
but which can be added.
The following toolbars are available in Storyboard Pro:
Camera Toolbar

255

Clips and Tracks Toolbar

256

Coordinate Toolbar

258

Edit Toolbar

259

File Toolbar

260

Layer Toolbar

261

Navigation Toolbar

263

Onion Skin Toolbar

264

Playback Toolbar

266

Script Toolbar

267

Script Editor Toolbar

268

Storyboard Toolbar

272

Text Formatting Toolbar

274

Tool Presets Toolbar

275

Tools Toolbar

276

View Toolbar

280

Workspace Toolbar

282

254

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Camera Toolbar
The Camera toolbar lets you add keyframes to the beginning or end of a selected panel, and copy and paste
keyframes.
This toolbar is part of the default Storyboard Pro workspace. However, you can hide the toolbar to streamline
your workspace.

How to show or hide the Camera toolbarlSelect Windows > Toolbars > Camera.
Icon

Tool Name

Description

Add Keyframe at
Beginning of Panel

Adds a keyframe to the beginning of the currently
selected panel.

Add Keyframe at Current
Panel

Adds a keyframe to the current frame which isdetermined by the position of the red playheadon the Timeline.

Add Keyframe at End of
Current Panel

Adds a keyframe at the end of the currently
selected panel.

Copy Camera from
Selected Panels

Copies a selected camera keyframe from aselected panel.

Paste and Fit on Selected
Panels

Pastes a selected camera keyframe from aselected panel.

255

Chapter 4: Toolbars

Clips and Tracks Toolbar
The Sound toolbar allows you to quickly add and manage video and audio tracks

How to show or hide the Sound toolbarlSelect Windows > Toolbars > Sound.

Icon

Tool Name

Description

New Audio Track

Adds a new audio track to your project.

New Video Track

Adds a new video track to your project.

Move Track Up

Moves the selected video or audio track up in the list of tracks.

Move Track Down

Moves the selected video or audio track down in the list of tracks.

Record Sound

Allows you to record a sound clip using your workstation's
recording device directly into an audio track in your project.

Optional Buttons
The following are buttons you can add to this toolbar if you want to have them in your workspace.
Icon

Tool Name

Description

Audio Scrubbing

When enabled, the part of the soundtrack that is at the current
frame will play every time you move the timeline cursor, allowing
you to navigate the timeline of your animatic by sound. This makes
it easier to synchronize the action and the audio in your animatic.

256

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Icon

Tool Name

Description

Delete Current Track

Deletes the currently selected video or audio track.

Import Sound Clips

Allows you to import sound files (.wav, .aif, .aiff or .mp3) as soundclips into an audio track.
Allows you to import images or movie files into clips in video tracks,
which are independent from your animatic and can be made toappear over or underneath the elements in your storyboard.

Import Videos/Images as
Clips

Movie files can be imported as video clips to be played in yourprojects. Still images can be imported as static video clip which canbe made to last any amount of time.
You can import any image file supported by Storyboard Pro as avideo clip. You can also import movie files in QuickTime Movie(.mov) or MPEG-4 (.mp4, .m4v) format which are encoded with the
H.264. On Windows only, you can also import Windows MediaVideo (*.wmv) files, and on macOS only, you can also import
QuickTime Movie (.mov) files encoded in Apple ProRes.

Show Volume Envelope

Displays a volume envelope throughout the sound clip. By default,
this envelope is a straight line in the middle of the clip, indicatingthat the volume of the clip is neutral all throughout. You can add
keyframes to the envelope, and move them up or down to modulate
the volume of the sound clip as it plays.

Show Waveform

Displays a waveform inside the audio clip, allowing you to see
where the audio peaks so you can sync the action with it.

Split Clip at Current
Frame

Splits the selected video or sound clip at the current frame,
separating it into two independent clips.

257

Chapter 4: Toolbars

Coordinate Toolbar
The Coordinate toolbar displays parameters of keyframes or control points in the Cameraor Timeline view. You
can edit keyframes and control point parameters, such as the position, scale and rotation coordinates.

How to access the Coordinate toolbar
1. Select Windows > Toolbars > Coordinate.

Parameter

Description

Translation

The translation fields display the X, Y and Z translation values of the selected
layer. You can enter precise values to set the first frame and last frame position ofa layer. By default the Z value field is disabled. It will automatically become active
when the 3D option is enabled.
The scale fields display the X, Y and Z scaling values of the selected layer. You can

Scaleenter precise values to set the first frame and last frame size of a layer. By default
the Z value field is disabled. It will automatically become active when the 3D
option is enabled.

Rotation

The rotation fields display the X, Y and Z rotation values of the selected layer. You
can enter precise values to set the first frame and last frame rotation of a layer. By
default the Z value field is disabled. It will automatically become active when the
3D option is enabled.

Skew

The skew field displays skew value of the selected object. You can enter a precise
value to set the skew of the object.

258

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Edit Toolbar
The Edit toolbar lets you cut, copy, paste, and delete drawing objects.
This toolbar is part of the default Storyboard Pro workspace. However, you can hide the toolbar to streamline
your workspace.
There are also Undo and Redo menus that list the most recent actions you can undo or redo. For example, if you
cut a stroke, it will be listed in the Undo menu so you can restore it.

How to access the Edit toolbarlSelect Windows > Toolbars > Edit.
Icon

Tool Name

Description

Cut

Removes selected objects. You can then paste
the object or its properties to another object.

Copy

Copies the selected objects and properties.

Paste

Pastes the copied objects and properties.

DeleteDeletes selected objects.

Undo

Undoes an operation that you just did.

Redo

Redoes an operation that you just did. This
command becomes active only after you use theUndo command.

259

Chapter 4: Toolbars

File Toolbar
The File toolbar lets you create new projects, open existing projects, save the current project as well as save thecurrent project with a different name.
This toolbar is part of the default Storyboard Pro workspace. However, you can hide the toolbar to streamline
your workspace.

How to access the File toolbarlSelect Windows > Toolbars > File.
Icon

Tool Name

Description

New

Lets you create a new project.

Lets you open an existing project. If a project isOpenalready open, you must save it first.

Save

Saves the current project.

Save As

Lets you save the currently open project underanother name.

260

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Layer Toolbar
The Layer toolbar lets you add and remove vector and bitmap layers. You can also lock and unlock layers, turnon the light table, as well as spread the motion of a layer across all panels or just some of them.
In the default workspace, this toolbar located on the left-most side of the interface.
This toolbar is part of the default Storyboard Pro workspace. However, you can hide the toolbar to streamline
your workspace.

You can display the Layer toolbar horizontally if you find it more efficient for your workflow. Be sure to restart
Storyboard Pro in order to see the new position of the Layer toolbar.

How to show or hide the Layer toolbarlSelect Windows > Toolbars > Layer.
Icon

Tool Name

Description

New Vector Layer

Adds a vector layer to the Layers list.

New Bitmap Layer

Adds a bitmap layer to the Layers list.

Delete Layers

Deletes the selected layers.

Lock/Unlock Layers

Locks or unlocks selected layers.

Auto Light Table

Turns on the light table.

Spread Layer Motion

Within the same shot, you can spread the current
layer motion across all panels or a specified
number of panels after the current panel. A newlayer will be added and the drawing will be
duplicated for panels that do not have the same

261

Chapter 4: Toolbars

name in the defined range.

How to display the Layer toolbar as a flat (horizontal) toolbar
1. Do one of the following:lSelect Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Storyboard Pro > Preferences (macOS).

l

Press .

3. Select the Global UI tab.
4. In the UI Style section, select the Flat Tool Toolbar option.

5. Click OK and restart Storyboard Pro.

262

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Navigation Toolbar
The Navigation toolbar lets you quickly display the first and last frame of a panel. These buttons grey out when
the playhead is at the start or end of a panel.

How to access the Navigation toolbarlSelect Windows > Toolbars > Navigation.

Icon

Tool Name

Description

First Frame

Displays the first frame of the layer animation.

Last Frame

Displays the last frame of the layer animation.

Optional Buttons
The following are buttons you can add to this toolbar if you want to have them in your workspace.
Icon

Tool Name

Description

Project First Frame

Displays the storyboard's first panel at its first frame.

Previous Scene

Displays the previous scene.

Previous Panel

Displays the previous panel.

Next Panel

Displays the next panel. Keyboard shortcut: A.

Next Scene

Displays the next scene. Keyboard shortcut: F.

Project Last Frame

Displays the storyboard's last panel at its last frame.

263

Chapter 4: Toolbars

Onion Skin Toolbar
The Onion Skin toolbar displays the next and previous drawings in the Stage view.

How to access the Onion Skin toolbarlSelect Windows > Toolbars > Onion Skin.

Icon

Tool Name

Description

Enable Onion Skin

Enables or disables Onion Skin.

No Previous Panels

Does not include any previous panel in theOnion Skin.

Previous Panel

Includes the previous panel in the Onion Skin.

Previous Two Panels

Includes the previous two panels in the Onion Skin..

Previous Three Panels

Includes the previous three panels in the Onion Skin.

No Next Panels

Does not include any next panel in the Onion Skin.

Next Drawing

Includes the next panel in the Onion Skin.

Next Two Panels

Includes the two next panels in the Onion Skin.

Next Three Panels

Includes the next three panels in the Onion Skin.

264

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Flip

Dragging this slider allows you to flip through thepanels that are included in the Onion Skin.

Flip Forward

Click and hold this button to flip through the panels
included in the Onion Skin.
Displays the Expand Onion Skin dialog, whichcontains buttons for the 15 previous panels and the
15 next panels. While this dialog is showing, only thepanels that are toggled on in this dialog will be
included in the Onion Skin.

This allows you to set up the Onion Skin including
panels very far behind and after the current panel.
Also, since only selected panels are included, thisallows you to include specific panels in the Onion
Skin without including every panel in-between thatpanel and the current panel.

Expand Onion Skin

For example, if you only want the third previous panel
to be in the onion skin, all you have to do is toggle
that panel on. But if you want every panel from thefirst previous panel to the third previous panel to be
included, you have to toggle each of them on.

NOTE
The Onion Skin will return to its normal
setting once you close the dialog. Therefore,
you must leave it on for as long as you need
the Onion Skin to use the settings in this
dialog.

Only displays the onion skin for layers inneighbouring panels that have the same name as thecurrently selected layer.

Show Only the Selected
Layers265

Chapter 4: Toolbars

Playback Toolbar
The Playback toolbar lets you play back your storyboard. When you create an animatic with transitions andsound, you can play it back in real time in the Stage view to check the timing.
In the default workspace, this toolbar is located at the top of the interface.

Name

Go to First Frame of
Selection

Icon

Description

AccessAutomatically places the playback marker atthe beginning of the panel selection. This
selection can be one or many panels. In theTimeline view, you can see the red marker
positioning itself at the first frame of the firstpanel of the selection.
Select Play >Play Selection

Play Selection

Plays back a selection of panels.

Play

Starts and stops playback of the storyboard.

Select Play >
Play.

Loop

Repeats playback.

Select Play >
Loop.

Sound

Enables sound in the playback.

Select Play >Audio Playback.

CameraLets you preview camera moves andtransitions.

Select Play >CameraPreview.

266

or press Shift +Enter.

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Script Toolbar
The Scripting toolbar lets you open the Scripts Manager dialog box and stop a script that is currently running.

How to access the Scripting toolbar
1. Select Windows > Toolbars > Scripting.
Icon

Tool Name

Description

Manage Scripts

Opens the Scripts Manager dialog box in which
you can select a script, customize it and add it to
the Script toolbar for quickly running a script.
You can also execute a selected script—see
Scripts Manager Dialog Box on page 176.

Stop Script

Stops the script that is currently running.

267

Chapter 4: Toolbars

Script Editor Toolbar
The Script Editor toolbar gives you quick access to some commonly used commands for editing and testing
scripts in the Script Editor view—see Script Editor View on page 428.

How to access the Script Editor toolbar
1. Add the Script Editor view to your workspace by doing one of the following:l

In the top-right corner of an existing view, click on the

Add View button and select Script

Editor.
l

In the top menu, select Windows > Script Editor.

2. Click on the Script Editor view to set the focus on it.
3. In the top menu, select Windows > Toolbars > Script Editor.

Icon

ButtonDescription

Creates a new script. When you click on this button, you are first prompted totype in a name for the script. Then, you will be prompted to select which location
to save the script in:l

User: Saves the script to a directory in your user preferences directory. You
will be able to run and edit the script from any scene as long as you arelogged in as the same user.

NOTE

New Script

If you are using Harmony Stand Alone, the script will be saved tothe preferences for your account on your computer. if you areusing Harmony Server, the script will be saved to the preferences
for your Storyboard Pro database user.

lGlobal: If you are using Harmony Server, select this option to save thescript to the Storyboard Pro database's global script directory. Anyone
who is logged in to the database will be able to edit and run this script.

268

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Icon

ButtonDescription

l

l

l

l

Environment: If you are using Harmony Server, select this option to savethe script to the current scene's environment. Anyone will be able to edit
and run the script as long as they are working on a scene inside thisenvironment.
Job: If you are using Harmony Server, select this option to save the scriptto the current scene's job. Anyone will be able to edit and run the script aslong as they are working on a scene inside this job.
Scene: Save the script to the scene's scripts sub-folder. Anyone will beable to edit and run the script when working on this specific scene.
System Variable: Save the script to the directory in the TOONBOOM_GLOBAL_SCRIPT_LOCATION environment variable. This option is only
available if this environment variable is set.

Allows you to import a script from your machine into Storyboard Pro. When you
click on this button, you are prompted to browse for and select a script on yourfile system. Then, you are prompted to select which location to import the scriptin:lUser: Saves the script to a directory in your user preferences directory. You
will be able to run and edit the script from any scene as long as you arelogged in as the same user.

NOTE
If you are using Harmony Stand Alone, the script will be saved tothe preferences for your account on your computer. if you areusing Harmony Server, the script will be saved to the preferences
for your Storyboard Pro database user.

Import Script
l

l

l

l

l

Global: If you are using Harmony Server, select this option to save thescript to the Storyboard Pro database's global script directory. Anyone
who is logged in to the database will be able to edit and run this script.
Environment: If you are using Harmony Server, select this option to savethe script to the current scene's environment. Anyone will be able to edit
and run the script as long as they are working on a scene inside thisenvironment.
Job: If you are using Harmony Server, select this option to save the scriptto the current scene's job. Anyone will be able to edit and run the script aslong as they are working on a scene inside this job.
Scene: Save the script to the scene's scripts sub-folder. Anyone will beable to edit and run the script when working on this specific scene.
System Variable: Save the script to the directory in the TOONBOOM_

269

Chapter 4: Toolbars

Icon

ButtonDescription

GLOBAL_SCRIPT_LOCATION environment variable. This option is only
available if this environment variable is set.
Deletes the selected script.

NOTES
l

Delete Scriptl

You cannot delete a script if it is in the Application Resources
location, as those are scripts that are installed with StoryboardPro.
If you delete a script that was originally in Application Resources
but which you copied to another location so you could makechanges to it, the original version of the script in the
Application Resources folder will be restored to the list.

Allows you to type in the path and name for your preferred text editing software.

NOTES
l

Set External

software is enough if that application supports the AppleScript
Open Document protocol.

Editorl

Open with
External Editor

On macOS, only typing the name of your preferred text editing

On Windows and GNU/Linux, unless your text editor is in yoursystem's PATH environment variable, you will have to type in thefull path to the editor.

Opens the selected script in the chosen external text editing software.

Prompts you to select which script and which function to use with the
and

Run

Debug buttons.

NOTES
Set Targetll

You can set the entire script as the target by selecting the<Nothing> function from the functions list.
You cannot link an entire script to a toolbar button. Only
functions within scripts can be added as toolbar buttons.
Therefore, running or debugging an entire script rather than oneof its functions should be done for testing purposes only.

270

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Icon

ButtonDescription

Runs the target script and function.

NOTES
l

Run
l

If you have not set a target script and function, you will beprompted to set one when you click on this button.
You can set or change the target script and function by clicking
on thel

Set Target button.

If you are editing <<<Sandbox>>>, this button will simply run
what you typed into the sandbox, regardless of whether anothertarget is set.

Open the target script and function in the Qt Script Debugger, in which you cantest and debug the function.

NOTES
l

Debug
l

If you have not set a target script and function, you will beprompted to set one when click on this button.
You can set or change the target script and function by clicking
on thel

Stop Execution

Set Target button.

If you are editing <<<Sandbox>>>, this button will simply debug
what you typed into the sandbox, regardless of whether anothertarget is set.

If a script is currently running, this interrupts its execution.

271

Chapter 4: Toolbars

Storyboard Toolbar
The Storyboard toolbar contains all of the basic commands related to adding and deleting panels, scenes, andtransitions, as well as switching between the 2D and 3D workspaces. In the default workspace, this toolbar islocated at the top of the interface.

How to access the Storyboard toolbar‣

Select Windows > Toolbars > Storyboard.

Name

Enable 3D

Icon

Description

AccessConverts a scene to 3D so you can moveand rotate 2D objects in 3D space.

Select
Storyboard >Enable 3D for
Current Scene.

Reset a scene to 2D. When you do so:

Reset Scene to 2D•

Imported 3D models are removed.

•

3D camera moves are removed.

•

2D layers that have been moved androtated in 3D are be set back to 2D,
removing those transformations.

Select
Storyboard >Reset Scene to
2D.

New Panel

Creates a new panel after the current panel.

Select
Storyboard >New > New
Panel or pressP.

New Scene

Creates a new scene after the currently
selected scene.

Select
Storyboard >Create Scene.

272

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

New Sequence

Adds a new sequence to your project anddisplays the sequence markers in theThumbnails and Timeline views.

Select
Storyboard
New > New
Sequence.

Smart Add Panel

Select
Storyboard >Smart Add
Panel.

Duplicate Selected Panel

Creates an exact copy of an existing panel.

Select
Storyboard >Duplicate
Selected Panel.

Delete Selected Panel

Deletes a selected panel. Note that it is
impossible to have an empty project as there
is a minimum of one panel.

New Transition

Select
Storyboard >New Transition.

Delete Transition

Select
Storyboard >DeleteTransition.

273

Chapter 4: Toolbars

Text Formatting Toolbar
The Text Formatting toolbar lets you format the text in captions.

How to access the Text Formatting toolbar
1. In the Panel or Storyboard view, click the Text Formatting

button of a caption.

2. In a caption, select the text to format.

Icon

Tool Name

Description--

Font Type

Lets you select a font type.

--

Font Size

Lets you select a font size.

Bold

Changes the selected text to bold.

ItalicChanges the selected text to italic.

Underline

Underlines the selected text.

Align Left

Aligns the selected text to the left.

CenterCenters the selected text.

Align Right

Aligns the selected text to the right.

Justify

Justifies the selected text.

ColourOpens the Select Colour dialog box from which you
can choose a new colour for the selected text.

274

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Tool Presets Toolbar
The Tool Presets toolbar lets you create new tool presets and manage existing ones. There are also four default
brush presets available.

How to access the Tool Presets toolbarlSelect Windows > Toolbars > Tool Presets.

Icon

Tool Name

Description

New Tool Preset

Opens the New Tool Preset dialog box in which you
can create a custom tool preset and add it to the Tool
Presets toolbar for quick access.

Manage Presets

Opens the Manage Tool Presets dialog box in which
you can update and delete existing tool presets, andimport and export tool presets.

Rough BrushA blue brush for quickly creating rough drawings.

Clean BrushA black brush for creating the clean lines in a drawing.

Shading Brush

A brush that is set for shading. Any strokes that you
draw will appear behind objects.

Revision BrushA red brush for making revisions to a drawing. When
you activate this brush, a revision layer is created forthe current panel.

275

Chapter 4: Toolbars

Tools Toolbar
The Tools toolbar contains the main tools you need to work in Storyboard Pro. In the default workspace, thistoolbar located on the left-most side of the interface. A small triangle at the lower-right corner of a tool
indicates that additional tools can be selected in a pop-up menu. To access these tools, either click and hold on
the tool button, or select the tool then click on it again.

By default, the Tools toolbar displays several of its tools in pop-up menus that must be opened. It is possible to
make the Tools toolbar display every tool in its individual button instead by enabling the Flat Tools Toolbar
preference. This makes the selection of tools quicker. However, because there is not enough vertical space todisplay all tools, some tools will be hidden from the Tools toolbar by default. Which tools are displayed in the
Tools toolbar when Flat Tools Toolbar is enabled can be customized. The order in which tools are listed in Flat
Tools Toolbar mode can also be customized.

How to make every tool in the Tools toolbar display in buttons rather than pop-up
menus
1. Do one of the following:lSelect Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Storyboard Pro > Preferences (macOS).

l

Press .

276

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

2. Select the Global UI tab.
3. In the UI Style section, select the Flat Tool Toolbar option.

4. Click OK and restart Storyboard Pro.

Tool Name

Icon

Description
Allows you to select and reposition, scale, rotate and skew brush strokes,
pencil lines, shapes and other parts of your artwork.

SelectCutterAllows you to cut a part of your artwork, then reposition, scale, rotateand skew it.

Select by Colour

Allows you to quickly select all zones painted with the colour you clickon in a single drawing layer.
Allows you to edit the vector contours of brush strokes, pencil lines andContour Editor

shapes in your artwork. You can add, remove, tweak and move vector
points, move the Bezier handles of the vector points as well as deform
vector outlines.

Centerline Editor

Allows you to tweak and deform a brush stroke by manipulating thepoints at the centre of its line rather than its contour.

Perspective

Allows you to deform artwork by applying a perspective effect on it.

Edit
Gradient/Texture

Allows you to adjust the position, angle and size of gradients andtextures in a colour zone.

Brush

A pressure-sensitive tool for creating a contour shape with a thick andthin line effect, as if created with a paint brush.

PencilA pressure-sensitive tool for drawing outlines. Pencil lines are made ofcentral vector lines, making them easier to tweak and edit than brushstrokes.

277

Chapter 4: Toolbars

Text

Allows you to add text and to format it.

EraserA pressure-sensitive tool for erasing parts of a drawing.

Paint

Allows you to fill colour zones with a colour or texture.

Paint Unpainted

Allows you to quickly fill empty zones in your artwork with a colour or
texture, leaving filled zones unchanged.

Unpaint

Allows you to empty filled colour zones of their colour and texture.

Close Gap

Allows you to close open shapes so that they can be filled with the Paint
tool. By drawing a stroke near a small gap in a shape, this tool will createa small invisible stroke connecting the two closest points around the gap.

Line

Draws a straight line segment going from one point to the other.

Rectangle

Draws a rectangle.

EllipseDraws an ellipse.

Polyline

Allows you to draw shapes, segmented lines or complex curved lines byclicking to create each point in the sequence of line segments.

Dropper

Allows you to select a colour by clicking on a colour in your artwork.

Hand

Allows you to pan the Stage and Camera views.

Zoom

Allows you zoom in and out of the Stage and Camera views.

Rotate View

Lets you rotate the Stage and Camera views just like with a real animation
disc.

278

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Shift and Trace

Allows you to temporarily move drawings so you can trace over them inother drawings using Onion Skin.
Lets you navigate through a scene in 3D using the following:lLeft mouse button for rotation.

lMiddle mouse button for panning.

l

Right mouse button for zooming in and out.

3D Navigation

Lets you navigate through a scene in 3D using the following:
3D Flying
Navigationl

Use the mouse for rotation.

l

Use the mouse wheel to move forwards or backwards.

l

Use the arrow keys and PgUp/PgDn to move in all six directions.

Layer Transform

Allows you to select drawing layers and position, rotate, scale and skew
them.

CameraAllows you to position and rotate the camera, as well as to animate
camera movements.

Reframe

Allows you to offset the position of the content of the panels for theentire scene so that it fits in the camera frame you define.

Maintain Size

Keeps the visual scale in the Camera view as you move elements in the Zaxis in the Top or Side views.

Create Layer on Surface

Creates a new layers on top of the surface over which you are hoveringwith the mouse cursor.

279

Chapter 4: Toolbars

View Toolbar
The View toolbar lets you switch between the different workspaces, and zoom in or out on the main area ineach workspace.
The first time you open Storyboard Pro, the default Drawing workspace is loaded. There are a total of eight
ready-made workspaces.
Use the keyboard shortcuts 3 to 8 to open the corresponding workspaces. There is no keyboard shortcut for
the PDF View. You must use the button on the View toolbar.

How to show or hide the View toolbarlSelect Windows > Toolbars > View.

Workspace

Icon

Description

Drawing

This workspace is designed to enable you to draw your storyboard efficiently. The main
space is the large Stage view and the Thumbnails view is at the bottom. This workspace
also gives you quick and easy access to all your tools, as well as the Panel and Storyboard
views.

Timeline

This workspace is designed with the process of animatic creation in mind. The main
space is the large Stage view and the Timeline view is at the bottom, where you can easily
edit the timing of panels, transitions and sounds. This workspace also gives you quick
and easy access to all your tools, as well as the Panel and Storyboard views.

Overview

This workspace is designed to provide an organized overview of your project. The main
space is the Thumbnails view where you can efficiently reorganize the order of yourpanels.

Horizontal

This workspace displays your project as a classic horizontal paper storyboard layout. The
main space displays three panels at a time, with the panel information shown below eachone.

VerticalThis workspace displays your project as a classic vertical paper storyboard layout. The
main space displays two panels at a time, with the panel information shown at the side of280

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Workspace

Icon

Description

each.

Pitch Mode

This workspace displays your project with a different set of views than the otherworkspaces. Access is only given to a certain number of features. This maximizes theviewing space to focus solely on the story being pitched.
The Pitch Mode workspace occupies the entire display screen. There are no toolbars or
top menu available.

PDF View

This workspace displays your project with the views required to quickly set up your PDF
export.

3D View

This workspace displays your project with the views appropriate for working with 3D
objects, including the Camera, Top, Timeline, and Layers views.

281

Chapter 4: Toolbars

Workspace Toolbar
The Workspace toolbar lets you switch to a different workspace and open the Workspace Manager dialog box
in which you can rename and reorder workspaces, create a custom workspace and more.

How to show or hide the Workspace toolbarlSelect Windows > Toolbars > Workspace.

Icon

Tool Name

Description

Workspace menu

Lets you switch between the default workspaces.

Workspace Manager

Opens the Workspace Manager dialog box which lets
you

282

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

283

Chapter 5: Tool Properties

Chapter 5: Tool Properties
Each tool in the Tools toolbar has a set of properties that you can customize according to the task you are
performing. Some tools, such as the Brush tool, can be customized and saved as a preset. When you select atool from the Tools toolbar, the Tool Properties view updates to display its properties.

Here are the tool properties available in Storyboard Pro:
Brush Tool Properties

286

Camera Tool Properties

305

Centerline Editor Tool Properties

308

Close Gap Tool Properties

309

Contour Editor Tool Properties

310

Create Layer on Surface Tool Properties

312

Cutter Tool Properties

313

Dropper Tool Properties

316

Ellipse Tool Properties

317

Eraser Tool Properties

323

Layer Transform Tool Properties

341

Line Tool Properties

345

Maintain Size Tool Properties

352

Paint Tool Properties

353

Pencil Tool Properties

357

Perspective Tool Properties

364

Polyline Tool Properties

367

Rectangle Tool Properties

372

284

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Select Tool Properties

378

Stamp Tool Properties

386

Text Tool Properties

394

Zoom Tool Properties

397

285

Chapter 5: Tool Properties

Brush Tool Properties
The Brush tool allows you to draw by creating shapes based on your drawing strokes and filling them withcolour or textures. When used with a tablet, it is pressure sensitive, just like a real life brush.

How to access the Brush tool properties
1. In the Tools toolbar, select the Brushtool.

The tool's properties are displayed in the Tool Properties view.

Brush Properties
The following properties affect the brush's size, smoothing and other properties for the drawing style of yourbrush. Those properties can be saved into brush presets for later use.
Property

Description

The Preview area lets you see a preview of the stroke your drawing tool will make.
Preview Area

Brush Properties Dialog

The arrow button right of the preview area opens the Brush Properties dialog.

286

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Property

Description

While the Tool Properties view only gives you access to a few of the brushproperties, a list of brush presets and other drawing options, the Brush Properties
dialog gives you access to all the available options for your brush's tip and texture.
For more information on the Brush Properties dialog, see the Brush Properties Dialog
section below.
Defines the maximum width of brush strokes.
Maximum Size

If the tool is used with a pressure sensitive pen tablet, the width of the stroke willvary between its maximum size and minimum size depending on the amount ofpressure used. If used with a mouse, the width of the stroke will always be its
maximum size.
Defines the number of control points added to the centre line. The fewer the control
points the smoother (but less faithful) the line.

Smoothing

NOTE
This option is only available when drawing on a vector layer.

Flow

Lets you set the opacity for each instance of the brush tip that gets printed into yourcanvas. Contrary to the Opacity parameter, the flow parameter has a cumulative
effect. This means that a lower flow will make your brush strokes more transparent
towards its extremities and more opaque in its center. Your stroke's flow will also
accumulate if you draw over it. By default, your brush's flow varies with the amountof pressure you put on your tablet pen.

NOTE
This option is only displayed in the Tool Properties view when drawing on abitmap layer.

Opacity

The Opacity parameter are where Lets you set the opacity of your brush strokes.
Contrary to the Flow parameter, the Opacity parameter is non-cumulative. Your
whole brush stroke's opacity will not exceed the Opacity parameter. By default, theOpacity parameter varies depending on the amount of pressure you put on yourtablet pen.

287

Chapter 5: Tool Properties

Property

Description

NOTE
This option is only displayed in the Tool Properties view when drawing on abitmap layer.

Brush Presets
These options allow you to select, create and manage brush presets.
Icon

Property

Description
By default, Storyboard Pro has preloaded brush presets. You can also
create your own brush presets by configuring your brush, then saving its
properties into a new preset. It is also possible to export and import brush
presets.

Presets list

New Brush Preset

Creates a new preset based on the current tool properties.

Delete Brush

Deletes the currently selected preset.

Open a menu that contains the following options:l

Brush Presets Menu

l

l

l

New Brush Preset: Creates a new preset based on the current tool
properties.
Delete Brush: Deletes the currently selected preset.
Rename Brush: Allows you to rename the currently selected
preset.
Import Brushes: Allows you to import brush presets exported
from Storyboard Pro.

288

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

l

l

l

l

Export Brushes: Allows you to export your brush presets into an.xml file.
Small Thumbnail: Displays presets in a grid of small thumbnails
with a preview of their tip.
Large Thumbnail: Displays presets in a grid of big thumbnails,
with their name and a preview of their tip.
Stroke View: Displays presets in a list, with their name and apreview of a stroke done with each preset.

Drawing Options
These options affect the way your drawing strokes are added to your artwork.
Icon

Property

Description
When enabled, your brush strokes will appear behind the existingartwork.

Draw Behind

NOTEYour brush stroke will temporarily appear over your artwork as
you draw it, until you release the mouse cursor or tablet pen. If
you want a live preview of your stroke, activate the Realistic
Preview option by selecting View > Realistic Preview from the
top menu.

By default, when drawing on a vector layer, each new stroke is created asa separate drawing object, which can be edited independently from otherparts of the artwork. When enabled, the Auto-Flatten option
automatically merges strokes into existing artwork.
Auto-Flatten Mode

NOTE
This option is only available when drawing on a vector layer.
When drawing on a bitmap layer, artwork is always flattened.

289

Chapter 5: Tool Properties

Brush Properties Dialog
Brushes have an extensive set of options and properties that are not displayed in the Tool Properties view, butrather, in a dialog you can access from it. To open the Brush Properties dialog, click on the arrow button right ofthe stroke display area.

The Brush Properties dialog has five different tabs, minus the Smoothing tab if you are working on a bitmap
layers. Below is detailed information about the options available in each tab:l

Tip Tab on page 290lSmoothing Tab on page 294

lTransparency Tab on page 295l

Dual Tip Tab on page 298lPaper Texture Tab on page 302

Tip TabThe Tip tab allows you to configure the shape, size, hardness and spacing of your brush tip.

290

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Property

Description
Allows you to select between one of the following brush types:lBrush Typel

Solid Vector Brush: Creates vector shapes filled with a solid colour.
Makes artwork lightweight, scalable and easy to tweak. Since this kind ofbrush can only create solid colour shapes, solid vector brushes have alimited set of options including size, roundness, angle, centerline
smoothing and contour smoothing.
Textured Vector Brush: Creates vector shapes filled with a texture. This
gives you access to bitmap brush tips, paper textures, transparency andseveral other options.

NOTE
This option is not available when working on a bitmap layer. With bitmap
layers, brushes are always textured, and textured brush options arealways available.

Brush Tip LibraryThis is where you select the shape of the brush tip. By default it is round. Notethat some tips are designed to have semitransparent areas, even when the
maximum brush opacity is set to 100%.
To create a custom brush tip, you must prepare the file ahead of time, either inStoryboard Pro or in a third-party software, such as Adobe Photoshop. Colour is
not supported and transparency is not supported in the traditional sense. Black
appears as 100% opaque, white appears as 100% transparent and all the shadesof grey in between appear as varying degrees of semitransparency. A range of fileformats are supported—.jpeg, .png, .tif, .psd, .tga to name a few. Alpha channels
are disregarded on import. It is recommended that your file be between 100 x
100 pixels and 400 x 400 pixels.
You can also import brush tips that you exported from Storyboard Pro, so you
can share them with colleagues.

Minimum and Maximum Size

The minimum and maximum sizes of your drawing tool produce the thick andthin effect on your stroke. This works with the pressure sensitivity of a pen
tablet.

291

Chapter 5: Tool Propertiesll

Maximum Size: Defines the maximum width of the stroke.
Minimum Size: Defines the minimum width of the stroke in relation toand as a percentage of the maximum size.

NOTE
Setting the Minimum Size value to 100% eliminates the possibility ofcreating width variation on your stroke. In other words, you would be
forcing a uniform line width using the Maximum Size value.

The Roundness and Angle parameters allow you to change the shape andorientation of the tip.
llRoundness and Angle

Roundness: The vertical scaling to apply to the tip. Reducing this setting
squashes the tip vertically, allowing you to turn round or square tips into
flat tips.
Angle: The angle at which to rotate the brush tip, counterclockwise.

NOTE
The squashing is not relative to the angle—if the tip is rotated, thesquashing will still be done relative to the tip's original orientation.

The hardness value corresponds to the softness of the brush tip's edges. The
lower the value, the softer the tip edge. The higher the value, the sharper the tipedge. Be aware that some brush tips are not 100% opaque, so they will always
appear somewhat soft, even at 100% hardness.
Hardness

Spacing

Defines the amount of space between each stamp of the brush. A value of 100%
sets the stamp marks edge to edge, if there is no white space around the shape.
The larger the value, the greater the space between marks. A really large value
can make the brush stroke appear as a string of individual marks. Conversely, asmall spacing value will give the appearance of a fluid brush stroke.
Spacing is only evident when making a continuous stroke.

292

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Randomness

The Randomness parameters let you create a varied brush stroke. Refining these
options can give your stroke a lovely, non-mechanical look.
You can create variation between the thick and thin of your brush stroke just by
setting the Maximum and Minimum Size values. If you add randomness to themix, pressure sensitivity from your drawing tablet will still be applied. Lightpressure will create random values around the minimum, while heavy pressure
will create random values closer to the maximum. The larger the percentage, thelarger the range of random variation.

Random Size

NOTE
Setting the Minimum Size to 100% eliminates the possibility of creating
width variation on your stroke, whether you are applying randomness ornot. Therefore, you would be forcing a uniform line width using theMaximum Size value.

Random Angle

Sets the range for random rotation around the set Angle value. For example, if
the Angle is set to 45° and the Random Angle set to 10°, the software will
choose values between 40°–50° (plus or minus 5 degrees, equaling a total of 10
degrees).

293

Chapter 5: Tool Properties

Sets the range for random spacing around the set Spacing value. For example, if
the Spacing is set to 50% and the Random Spacing is set to 10%, thenStoryboard Pro will choose values between 45%–55% (plus or minus 5 percent,equaling a total of 10 percent).

Random Spacing

Smoothing Tab
The Smoothing tab contains options to configure how Storyboard Pro should automatically smooth your brushstrokes as you paint.

294

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

NOTE
The Smoothing tab is only available when working on a vector layer, as bitmap layers do notsupport smoothing.

Property

Centerline Smoothing

Contour Smoothing

Description
Defines the amount of smoothing Storyboard Pro should perform on your brushstroke's direction, curves and corners. A higher setting will prevent your line frombeing shaky, but is liable to reduce drawing precision and turn sharp angles into
curves.
Defines the amount of smoothing Storyboard Pro should perform on outer contour ofthe brush stroke. A higher setting will round sharp corners and reduce the amount ofcontrol points for the resulting vector shape.

Transparency Tab
The Transparency tab allows you to decide if your brush has antialiasing as well as to set its flow and opacity
settings.

NOTE
The Transparency tab's options are only available on vector layers if the Brush Type option of the
Tip tab is set to Textured Vector Brush. On bitmap layers, those options are always available.

Property

Description

Antialiasing

Enabled by default. This option causes the contours of the brush strokes to295

Chapter 5: Tool Properties

blend with the surrounding colours, to create an illusion of smoothness
otherwise not possible due to the picture resolution.
If antialiasing is disabled, the brush's texture will only render fully transparent or
fully opaque pixels. Disabling this option can be useful if you need your outlines
to be very crisp, if you want to make pixel art or if you need your brush strokes torender in solid colors with no variation, which makes them easier to repaint orprocess in third party software.

NOTE
When disabled, all other options in the Transparency tab are disabled.

The Maximum and Minimum Flow parameters let you set the range for the rate at
which paint flows from your brush. The analogy works better with a pen. The
greater the flow, the more ink comes out, hence the more consistent the colour
and texture of the line. If the flow is light, then the colour and texture of the line
may look spotty. This feature works with the pressure sensitivity of a pen tablet.
llMaximum and Minimum Flow

Maximum Flow: Sets the maximum rate at which colour and texture areapplied as you create a fluid stroke.
Minimum Flow: Sets the minimum rate at which colour and texture areapplied as you create a fluid stroke. It is defined as a percentage of theMaximum Flow value. If the Minimum Flow value is set to 100%, thentablet pressure sensitivity will no longer be applicable. The flow will be
set to the constant rate of the Maximum Flow value.

The Maximum and Minimum Opacity parameters are where you set the opacity
range for a brush mark. This works with the pressure sensitivity of a pen tablet.
l

Maximum Opacity and
Minimum Opacityl

Maximum Opacity: Sets the transparency limit of the brush mark when
the pressure is heavy.
Minimum Opacity: Sets the transparency limit of the brush mark when thepressure is very light. It is defined as a percentage of the Maximum
Opacity value. If the Minimum Opacity value is set to 100%, then tablet
pressure sensitivity will no longer be applicable. The opacity will be set tothe constant rate of the Maximum Opacity value.

296

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

RandomnessTh Randomness parameter lets you set the range for the randomness of the flow
and opacity. This works with the pressure sensitivity of a pen tablet.
You can create variation in the flow of your brush stroke just by setting theMaximum and Minimum Flow values. If you add randomness to the mix, pressure
sensitivity from your drawing tablet will still be applied. Light pressure will create
random values around the minimum, while heavy pressure will create random
values closer to the maximum. The larger the percentage, the larger the range ofrandom variation.

Randomness Flow

NOTE
Setting the Minimum Flow value to 100% eliminates the possibility ofcreating flow variation on your stroke, whether you are applying
randomness or not. That is, you would be forcing a uniform flow using theMaximum Flow value.

Random Opacity

You can create variation in the opacity of your brush stroke just by setting theMaximum and Minimum Opacity values. If you add randomness to the mix,pressure sensitivity from your drawing tablet will still be applied. Light pressure
will create random values around the minimum, while heavy pressure will create
random values closer to the maximum. The larger the percentage, the larger therange of random variation.

297

Chapter 5: Tool Properties

NOTE
Setting the Minimum Opacity value to 100% eliminates the possibility ofcreating opacity variation on your stroke, whether you are applying
randomness or not. That is, you would be forcing a uniform opacity using
the Maximum Opacity value.

Dual Tip Tab
The Dual Tip tab lets you set the parameters for creating a dual tip brush. The primary bitmap brush tip and thedual tip always work together. You can set the parameters for the primary tip in the Tip tab and those for thedual tip in the Dual Tip tab. The Blend mode you select determines how the tips are combined.
By default, the Blend Mode is set to Multiply and the Random Angle to 360°.

298

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

NOTE
To use a Dual Tip, you must enable option by checking the checkbox inside the Dual Tip tab.
Additionally, if you are working on a vector layer, the Brush Type option of the Tip tab must be set
to Textured Vector Brush.

Property

Description

Enable/Disable

The checkbox inside the tab allows you to decide whether or not your brush uses adual tip. If this checkbox is unchecked, the options in the Dual Tip tab will bedisabled.

Blend Mode

The Blend modes let you decide how the primary tip and the dual tip are combined.

Multiply

This is the default blend mode. When the two brush tips are combined in this mode,
they essentially cut each other out in overlapping areas, where one or both tips havean area of 100% transparency. The less opaque the brush tips are, the lighter their
combination.

299

Chapter 5: Tool Properties

Property

Colour Dodge

Description

In this mode, the primary tip cuts out the shape of the dual tip. Where the tip shapes
overlap, within the boundaries of the primary shape, the colour and opacity appear
darker.

300

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Property

CombineDescription

This mode treats the two tips as two different and separate brushes that have thesame colour and follow the same path.

301

Chapter 5: Tool Properties

Property

Description

Paper Texture Tab
The Paper Texture tab lets you configure a paper-like texture for your brush. You can also add textures byimporting image files, or import paper textures that were previously exported from Storyboard Pro.

302

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

NOTE
To use a Paper Texture, you must enable option by checking the checkbox inside the Paper
Texture tab. Additionally, if you are working on a vector layer, the Brush Type option of the Tip tab
must be set to Textured Vector Brush.

Property

Description

Enable/Disable

The checkbox inside the tab allows you to decide whether or not your brush uses apaper texture. If this checkbox is unchecked, the options in the Paper Texture tab will
be disabled.

Texture Scale

Increase or decreases the size of the paper texture.

Additive

This option layers the texture on top of itself as you scribble overlapping lines in one
continuous stroke. If this option is turned off, areas of overlapping lines from a single,
continuous stroke will appear the same, in terms of darkness and texture, as nonoverlapping areas.

303

Chapter 5: Tool Properties

Property

Description

This option defines the way separate, overlapping strokes behave. If this option isenabled, the paper texture's position does not change with each sweep of the brush.
If this option is disabled, each sweep of the brush produces a different texture
position. The texture orientation always stays the same.

Aligned304

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Camera Tool Properties
The Camera tool allows you to animate the camera in a scene by adding and manipulating camera keyframes.

How to access the Camera tool properties
1. In the Tools toolbar, select the Camera

tool.

The tool's properties are displayed in the Tool Properties view.

Icon

Property

Description

Camera Transform
Add
Keyframe at
Beginning ofCurrent Panel
Add
Keyframe at
Beginning ofCurrent
Frame

Adds a keyframe at the beginning of the currently selected panel.
You can also select Camera > Add Keyframe at Beginning of Current Panel.

Adds a keyframe at the beginning of the current frame.
You can also select Camera > Add Keyframe at Beginning of Current Frame.

305

Chapter 5: Tool Properties

Icon

Property

Add
Keyframe at
End ofCurrent Panel

Description

Adds a keyframe at the end of the currently selected panel.
You can also select Camera > Add Keyframe at End of Current Panel.

Reset Camera

Deletes all keyframes in the selected scene and reverts back to the original static
camera.

Copy Camera
from Selected
PanelsCopies a camera keyframe in a selected panel.

Paste andFit Camera on
Selected
Panels

Pastes a copied camera keyframe in a selected panel.

Lets you set the velocity at which the camera movement begins.
--

Ease InYou can enter the duration of the ease in after the first frame in which the gradualchange cameramovement begins. For example, if you want to slowly accelerate to
the normal cameraspeed from frame 1 to 10, enter a value of 10.
Lets you set the velocity at which the camera movement ends.

--

Ease OutYou can enter the duration of the ease out after the first frame in which the gradualchange in camera movement begins. Enter the number of frames before the last
frame in which the change in camera movement is gradual.

Keyframes
Reset
Keyframe

Resets the selected keyframe.

DeleteKeyframe

Deletes the selected keyframe from the camera.

Align Camera
Key with
Stage View
Position

Fits the camera frame to the current space available in the Stage view while retaining
its original ratio, which is very useful in 3D scenes. You can also select Camera >Align Camera Key with Stage View Position.

306

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Icon

Property

Description

Go to
Selected
Keyframe

Moves the playhead to the selected keyframe in the Timeline view. When working in
3D and used in combination with the Camera view, this option comes in very handy
for properly frame a shot

Function
EditorOpens the Function Editor where you can edit function curves and parameters. It is a
visual graph for adding, removing, and editing keyframes, as well as adjusting thevelocity. The Function Editor allows you to display multiple functions in the
background as a reference.

OffsetLets you set the position of the camera frame centre point. The fields represent,
respectively, the X position, Y position, and Z position (enabling you to animate atruck in or truck out movement).
You can also use the Camera tool to position the camera frame from the Stage or
Camera view.

Focal Length

Lets you set the camera focal length value . By default the focal length value is set to
36 millimiters. The focal length determines the angle value of the shot.
Lets you set the camera rotation value. When working in a 2D project, only the last

Rotationfield is active, letting you rotate the camera only on the Z-axis (right and left). When
working in a 3D project, the three fields become active and respectively represent therotation value of the X, Y, and Z axis.
You can also use the Camera tool to rotate the camera frame from the Stage or
Camera view

Static Attributes

Pivot

Displays the pivot position of the handle for the camera when 3D is enabled. This
however does not affect actual camera position.

Near Plane

The point on the camera cone where the camera is located.

Far Plane

The far end of the camera cone. Nothing outside the far plane is visible.

Scene/Panel
Duration

Displays the length of the selected scene or panel in timecode format. The default
length of a panel is 1 second.

307

Chapter 5: Tool Properties

Centerline Editor Tool Properties
The Centerline Editor tool allows you to edit brush strokes by their centreline rather than by their contour. This
makes it easier to tweak the tips, curves and corners of brush strokes. The purpose of this tool is to make it aseasy to edit brush strokes as it is to edit pencil lines with the Contour Editor tool.

How to access the Centerline Editor tool properties
1. In the Tools toolbar, select the Centerline Editor

tool.

2. The tool's properties are displayed in the Tool Properties view.

Tool Options
Icon

Property

Description

Allows you to choose the method to visually select multiple
elements:
Lasso: Allows you to select multiple elements byldrawing a lasso around them with your mouse.
Marquee: Allows you to select multiple elements bylSelection Modedrawing a rectangle around them. This is faster, as you
only need to drag your mouse from one corner of therectangle to its opposite corner, but it may not be as
precise as you want.

TIP
You can press and hold the Alt key to temporarily use
the other selection mode.

308

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Close Gap Tool Properties
The paint tool requires the area you attempt to fill to be closed in order to know exactly what area of yourartwork must be filled. However, it is common for artists to accidentally leave small gaps in their artwork.
The Close Gap tool allows you to quickly close small gaps in a shape by creating an invisible stroke connecting
two extremities of the gap. You can then fill the area using the Paint tool, as this invisible stroke will be taken inaccount to determine the outline of the shape to fill.
TIP
You do not need to use the Close Gap tool with precision. If you draw a crude stroke near the gap
you want to close, the tool will automatically detect the two closest line extremities and will draw aninvisible straight line connecting them. closing the gap between them.

How to access the Close Gap tool properties
1. In the Tools toolbar, select the Close Gap

tool.

The tool's properties are displayed in the Tool Properties view.

Tool Options
Icon

Property

Description

The Close Gap tool creates an invisible drawing stroke to close the shape. Enabling thisoption will merge the stroke into the artwork instead of adding the stroke on top of it.
Auto
FlattenNOTE
The area you close with the Close Gap tool will be fillable regardless of whether
or not this option is enabled.

309

Chapter 5: Tool Properties

Contour Editor Tool Properties
The Contour Editor lets you reshape vector shapes, brush strokes and lines in your drawings.
Artwork in Storyboard Pro is made of vector shapes. Vector shapes are defined by points, the lines joining thepoints together (contours) and the curve vectors, represented by Bezier handles, which make the curve of saidlines.

The Contour Editor tool allows you to select a contour or point, and change the position of points, add andremove points from the shape, rotate, lengthen and shorten curve handles to influence the curve of contours
between those points, or drag contours between points to change their curve directly.

How to access the Contour Editor tool properties
1. In the Tools toolbar, select the Contour Editor

tool.

The tool's properties are displayed in the Tool Properties view.

Tool Modes
Icon

Property

Description

Allows you to choose the method to visually select multiple elements:lLasso: Allows you to select multiple elements by drawing alasso around them with your mouse.

Selection ModelMarquee: Allows you to select multiple elements bydrawing a rectangle around them. This is faster, as you only

310

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Icon

Property

Description

need to drag your mouse from one corner of the rectangle toits opposite corner, but it may not be as precise as you want.

TIP
You can press and hold the Alt key to temporarily use theother selection mode.

Snaps your selection or point to any line you position it on. As soon
as you move it close enough to another line, your point or selection
will snap to it.
Snap to Contour

Operations
Icon

Property

Description

The Smooth operation lets you smooth out selected drawing strokes
and remove extra points.
Smooth Selection311

Chapter 5: Tool Properties

Create Layer on Surface Tool Properties
Working in the Camera view, the Create Layer on Surface tool lets you create a new vector or bitmap layer on
the surface of the 3D object over which you are hovering. The new layer will be positioned at the point in Z
depth on which you clicked, and is perpendicular to the camera so you can start drawing.

How to access the Create Layer on Surface tool properties
1. In the Tools toolbar, select the Create Layer on Surface

tool.

The tool's properties are displayed in the Tool Properties view.

Property

Description

Vector Layer

Creates a new vector layer over the 3D object over which you are hovering.

Bitmap Layer

Creates a new bitmap layer over the 3D object over which you are hovering.

312

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Cutter Tool Properties
The Cutter tool lets you cut out part of a drawing so that you can transform it, copy it or delete it.

How to access the Cutter tool properties
1. In the Tools toolbar, select the Cutter

tool.

The tool's properties are displayed in the Tool Properties view.

Tool Options
Icon

Property

Description

Allows you to choose the method to visually select multiple elements:lLasso: Allows you to select multiple elements by drawing a lasso
around them with your mouse.

lSelection Mode

Marquee: Allows you to select multiple elements by drawing a
rectangle around them. This is faster, as you only need to drag yourmouse from one corner of the rectangle to its opposite corner, but it
may not be as precise as you want.

TIP
You can press and hold the Alt key to temporarily use the otherselection mode.

When this option is enabled along with the Lasso
Use Mouse
Gestureselection type, quickly

drawing a line with the Cutter tool over a line segment in your artwork will
instantly delete it. This can be useful if you want to use the Cutter tool toquickly clean up your artwork.

313

Chapter 5: Tool Properties

Icon

Property

Description

NOTE
This option will only work when using the Cutter tool on separate brushor pencil strokes. Hence, it is important not to flatten your artwork if you
intend to use this option to clean up your drawings. This option has noeffect on bitmap layers as the artwork in bitmap layers is always
flattened.

When cutting through pencil lines, this option decides what kind of pencil line
tips to put at the extremities of the remaining pencil line segments, where they
were cut.

Tip Style

By default, this is set to Bevel, which will leave the tip of the pencil line cutat the same angle as your cutter stroke. If you prefer, you can make pencil linesthat you split with the Cutter tool have Flat

314

or Roundtips instead.

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Icon

Property

Description

When working on bitmap artwork, enabling this will smooth the edges of theartwork you cut out, so that they do not appear pixelated.
Antialiasing

NOTE
This option is only available with bitmap layers.

Operations
Icon

Property

Description

Flip Horizontal

Flips the current selection horizontally.

Flip Vertical

Flips the current selection vertically.

Rotate 90 Degrees
CW

Rotates the current selection 90 degrees clockwise.

Rotate 90 Degrees
CCW

Rotates the current selection 90 degrees counter-clockwise.

315

Chapter 5: Tool Properties

Dropper Tool Properties
The Dropper tool allows you to pick a colour from your drawing without going to the Colour view.
NOTE
When picking a colour with the dropper, the colour picked becomes the current colour, but is not
automatically added to the swatch list.

How to access the Dropper tool properties
1. In the Tools toolbar, select the Droppertool.

The tool's properties are displayed in the Tool Properties view.

Icon

Property

Sample All
LayersDo Not Pick
Transparency

Description

By default, the Dropper tool picks the colour from the active drawing layer only.
This means that if the colour is semi-transparent, it will still only take the colour
from the active layer, along with its transparency, and ignore the colours from layers
behind it.
With this option enabled, the Dropper tool will pick the colour as it appears on thescreen instead, allowing you to pick colours that are the result of several layers
composited together.
By default, the Dropper tool picks the colour's alpha value as well as its colour
values. When enabled, the colour picked will always have an alpha value of 255.

316

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Ellipse Tool Properties
The Ellipse tool allows you to quickly draw an ellipse or a circle.

How to access the Ellipse tool properties
1. In the Tools toolbar, select the Ellipse

tool.

The tool's properties are displayed in the Tool Properties view.

Pencil Properties
Just like other shape tools, this tool creates pencil lines. Hence, its tool properties are similar to the ones of thePencil tool and it can be used with pencil presets.
Property

Description

The Preview area lets you see a preview of the stroke your drawing tool will make.
Preview Area

The arrow button right of the preview area opens the Pencil Properties dialog.
Pencil Properties
Dialog317

Chapter 5: Tool Properties

Property

Description

While the Tool Properties view only gives you access to a few of the pencil properties,
a list of pencil presets and other drawing options, the Pencil Properties dialog gives
you access to all the available options for your pencil's shape and texture. For more
information on the Pencil Properties dialog, see the Pencil Properties Dialog on page
321 section below.
Size

Defines the width of the pencil line used to draw the shape.
You can adjust the start, end, and join style of a pencil line.

Shape

l

l

l

Start: Lets you select the style of the start tip, which is the first tip you drew.
You can choose between Round or Flat style.
End: Lets you select the style of the end tip, which is the last tip you drew. You
can choose between Round or Flat style.
Join: Lets you select the joint style. The joints are where the line curves abruptly.
You could also define the Join style as the corner style. You can choose between
Round, Mitre and Bevel style.

Pencil Presets
These options allow you to select, create and manage pencil presets.
Icon

Property

Presets list

New Brush Preset

Description

Storyboard Pro provides a few pencil presets and also lets you create andsave your own. It is a good idea to create and save pencils with precise
sizes and parameters when you draw for efficiency and consistency.
You can export the pencil presets that you have created and import thosethat others have created. This is a good way for you and project
collaborators to keep a consistent look for the project.

Creates a new preset based on the current tool properties.

318

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Icon

Property

Description

Delete Brush Preset

Deletes the currently selected preset.

Open a menu that contains the following options:
l

l

l

l

Brush Presets Menu
l

l

l

l

New Brush Preset: Creates a new preset based on the current tool
properties.
Delete Brush: Deletes the currently selected preset.
Rename Brush: Allows you to rename the currently selected
preset.
Import Brushes: Allows you to import brush presets exported
from Storyboard Pro.
Export Brushes: Allows you to export your brush presets into an.xml file.
Small Thumbnail: Displays presets in a grid of small thumbnails
with a preview of their tip.
Large Thumbnail: Displays presets in a grid of big thumbnails,
with their name and a preview of their tip.
Stroke View: Displays presets in a list, with their name and apreview of a stroke done with each preset.

Drawing Options
These options affect the way your shape is added to your artwork.
Icon

Property

Description

When enabled, your brush strokes will appear behind the existing artwork.

Draw Behind319

Chapter 5: Tool Properties

Icon

Property

Description

NOTEYour brush stroke will temporarily appear over your artwork as you
draw it, until you release the mouse cursor or tablet pen. If you
want a live preview of your stroke, activate the Realistic Preview
option by selecting View > Realistic Preview from the top menu.

When enabled, the shape you draw is automatically filled with the selectedcolour. By default, drawing a shape only creates its outlines.

Auto Fill

Snap to Contour

When enabled, while you're drawing, the mouse cursor will snap to the
nearby contours of the artwork in your drawing.

Snap and Align

When enabled, while you're drawing, the mouse cursor will automaticallyalign to the rectangular bounding boxes of other strokes and shapes inyour drawing.
By default, when drawing on a vector layer, each new stroke is created as aseparate drawing object, which can be edited independently from otherparts of the artwork. When enabled, the Auto-Flatten option automaticallymerges strokes into existing artwork.

Auto Flatten Mode

NOTE
Using the Select tool, you can use select and remove a segment offlattened pencil lines. Overlapping pencil lines drawn with theAuto-Flatten mode are essentially cut into segments by theoverlap and can be treated as individual lines.

320

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Pencil Properties Dialog
The Ellipse tool draws the same type of line as the Pencil tool. Hence, you can configure the Ellipse tool's lines
using the Pencil Properties dialog, which you can open by clicking on the arrow button right of the stroke
display area in the Tool Properties view.

Property

Description

Maximum Size

Defines the maximum size of the pencil line. If the tool is used with a pressure
sensitive pen tablet, the width of the stroke will vary between its maximum size andminimum size depending on the amount of pressure used. If used with a mouse, thewidth of the stroke will always be its maximum size.

Minimum Size

Defines the minimum size of your stroke as a percentage of the maximum size. If you
do not have pressure sensitivity from a pen table, the minimum size value will beignored.

Smoothing

Defines the number of control points added to the centre line. The fewer the control
points the smoother (but less faithful) the line.

Contour Smoothing

Defines the number of points on the contour share of your stroke. This will smoothout the bumps and waves on tour contour shape of your brush strokes.

Shape

You can adjust the start, end, and join style of a pencil line.

321Chapter 5: Tool Properties

Property

Description

l

l

l

Start: Lets you select the style of the start tip, which is the first tip you drew.
You can choose between Round or Flat style.
End: Lets you select the style of the end tip, which is the last tip you drew.
You can choose between Round or Flat style.
Join: Lets you select the joint style. The joints are where the line curves
abruptly. You could also define the Join style as the corner style. You canchoose between Round, Mitre and Bevel style.

322

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Eraser Tool Properties
The Eraser tool allows you to erase artwork by drawing eraser strokes over it. When using the Eraser tool witha tablet, it is pressure sensitive, like with the Brush and Pencil tool.

How to access the Eraser tool properties
1. In the Tools toolbar, select the Eraser

tool.

The tool's properties are displayed in the Tool Properties view.

Eraser Properties
The way the Eraser tool is configured is almost identical to the way the Brush tool is configured.
Property

Description

The Preview area lets you see a preview of the stroke your drawing tool will make.
Stroke Preview Area

Eraser Properties
Dialog

The arrow button right of the display area opens the Eraser Properties dialog, which
gives you access to all the parameters and options for your eraser. The Tool Properties
view only gives you access to a few of the eraser properties, a list of eraser presets andoptions for the Eraser tool that are not related to the eraser properties. For more
information on the Eraser Properties dialog, see the Eraser Properties Dialog section
below.

323

Chapter 5: Tool Properties

Property

Description

Defines the maximum size of the eraser.
Maximum Size

If the tool is used with a pressure sensitive pen tablet, the width of the stroke will vary
between its maximum size and minimum size depending on the amount of pressureused. If used with a mouse, the width of the stroke will always be its maximum size.
Defines the number of control points added to the centre line. The fewer the control
points the smoother (but less faithful) the line.

SmoothingLets you set the opacity for each instance of the eraser tip that gets erased from yourartwork. Contrary to the Opacity parameter, the flow parameter has a cumulative effect.
This means that a lower flow will make your eraser strokes less effective towards its
extremities and more effective in its center. Your stroke's flow will also accumulate if
you draw over it. By default, your eraser's flow varies with the amount of pressure you
put on your tablet pen.

Flow

NOTE
This option is only displayed in the Tool Properties view when drawing on abitmap layer.

The Opacity parameter are where Lets you set the opacity of your brush strokes.
Contrary to the Flow parameter, the Opacity parameter is non-cumulative. Your wholebrush stroke's opacity will not exceed the Opacity parameter. By default, the Opacity
parameter varies depending on the amount of pressure you put on your tablet pen.
Opacity

NOTEThis option is only displayed in the Tool Properties view when drawing on abitmap layer.

Eraser Presets
These options allow you to select, create and manage eraser presets.
Icon

Property

Description

324

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Presets list

By default, Storyboard Pro has preloaded eraser presets. You can also
create your own eraser presets by configuring your eraser, then saving its
properties into a new preset. It is also possible to export and import eraser
presets.

New Brush Preset

Creates a new preset based on the current tool properties.

Delete Brush

Deletes the currently selected preset.

Rename Brush

Allows you to rename the currently selected preset.

Import Brushes

Allows you to import brush presets exported from Storyboard Pro.

Export Brushes

Allows you to export your brush presets into an .xml file.

Small Thumbnail

Displays presets in a grid of small thumbnails with a preview of their tip.

Large Thumbnail

Displays presets in a grid of big thumbnails, with their name and apreview of their tip.

Stroke View

Displays presets in a list, with their name and a preview of a stroke donewith each preset.

Eraser Properties Dialog
Erasers have an extensive set of options and properties that are not displayed in the Tool Properties view, butrather, in a dialog you can access from it. To open the Eraser Properties dialog, click on the arrow button right ofthe stroke display area.

The Eraser Properties dialog has five different tabs, minus the Smoothing tab if you are working on a bitmap
layers. Below is detailed information about the options available in each tab:l

Tip Tab on page 326lSmoothing Tab on page 330lTransparency Tab on page 331

325

Chapter 5: Tool Propertiesl

Dual Tip Tab on page 334lPaper Texture Tab on page 338

Tip TabThe Tip tab allows you to configure the shape, size, hardness and spacing of your eraser tip.

Property

Description

Allows you to select between one of the following eraser types:llEraser Typel

Solid Vector: Simply cuts out the eraser stroke's shape from the vector artwork.
A solid vector eraser always completely erase the artworks leaving hard seams.
Textured Eraser: Allows to configure the eraser with the same options as witha textured brush. A textured eraser will decrease the opacity of bitmap texturesin textured brush strokes if it doesn't completely erase it. If it completely erases
a brush stroke, it will cut out the erased part from the vector artwork.
Textured, Preserve Vector: Like a Textured Eraser, except that it will not cut out
from the vector shapes, even if it fully erases pixels in a textured brush stroke's
texture.

326

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Property

Description

NOTE
Textured erasers only work as expected on textured brush strokes. Using a
Textured eraser on a solid vector brush stroke or on a pencil line will only cut
the eraser stroke's shape out of it. If you use a Textured, Preserve Vector typeeraser on a solid vector shape or on a pencil line, the eraser will not erase
anything.

NOTE
This option is not available when working on a bitmap layer. With bitmap layers,erasers are always textured, and textured eraser options are always available.

Eraser Tip LibraryThis is where you select the shape of the eraser tip. By default, it is round. Note thatsome tips are designed to have semitransparent areas, even when the maximum eraser
opacity is set to 100%.
To create a custom eraser tip, you must prepare the file ahead of time, either inStoryboard Pro or in a third-party software, such as Adobe Photoshop. Colour is notsupported and transparency is not supported in the traditional sense. Black appears as
100% opaque, white appears as 100% transparent and all the shades of grey inbetween appear as varying degrees of semitransparency. A range of file formats aresupported—.jpeg, .png, .tif, .psd, .tga to name a few. Alpha channels are disregardedon import. It is recommended that your file be between 100 x 100 pixels and 400 x 400
pixels.
You can also import eraser tips that you exported from Storyboard Pro, so you canshare them with colleagues.
The minimum and maximum sizes of your drawing tool produce the thick and thineffect on your stroke. This works with the pressure sensitivity of a pen tablet.

Minimum and Maximum
Size

l

l

Maximum Size: Defines the maximum width of the stroke.
Minimum Size: Defines the minimum width of the stroke in relation to and as apercentage of the maximum size.

327

Chapter 5: Tool Properties

Property

Description

NOTE
Setting the Minimum Size value to 100% eliminates the possibility of creating
width variation on your stroke. In other words, you would be forcing a uniform
line width using the Maximum Size value.

The Roundness and Angle parameters allow you to change the shape and orientationof the tip.
llRoundness and Angle

Roundness: The vertical scaling to apply to the tip. Reducing this setting
squashes the tip vertically, allowing you to turn round or square tips into flat
tips.
Angle: The angle at which to rotate the brush tip, counterclockwise.

NOTE
The squashing is not relative to the angle—if the tip is rotated, the squashingwill still be done relative to the tip's original orientation.

The Hardness and Spacing parameters allow you to change the softness and spacingof the marks made by the eraser tip. You can preview the hardness and spacing at the
top of the Eraser Properties window, stroke preview area.

Hardness

Spacing

The hardness value corresponds to the softness of the eraser tip's edges. The lower thevalue, the softer the tip edge. The higher the value, the sharper the tip edge. Be awarethat some eraser tips are not 100% opaque, so they will always appear somewhat soft,
even at 100% hardness.

Defines the amount of space between each stamp of the eraser. A value of 100% sets
the stamp marks edge to edge, if there is no white space around the shape. The larger
the value, the greater the space between marks. A really large value can make the eraser
stroke appear as a string of individual marks. Conversely, a small spacing value will give328

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Property

Description

the appearance of a fluid brush stroke.
Spacing is only evident when making a continuous stroke.

Randomness

The Randomness parameters let you create a varied bitmap eraser stroke. Refining
these options can give your stroke a lovely, non-mechanical look.
You can create variation between the thick and thin of your eraser stroke just by setting
the Maximum and Minimum Size values. If you add randomness to the mix, pressure
sensitivity from your drawing tablet will still be applied. Light pressure will create
random values around the minimum, while heavy pressure will create random values
closer to the maximum. The larger the percentage, the larger the range of randomvariation.

Random Size

NOTE
Setting the Minimum Size to 100% eliminates the possibility of creating widthvariation on your stroke, whether you are applying randomness or not.
Therefore, you would be forcing a uniform line width using the Maximum Sizevalue.

Random Angle

Sets the range for random rotation around the set Angle value. For example, if theAngle is set to 45° and the Random Angle set to 10°, the software will choose values
between 40°–50° (plus or minus 5 degrees, equaling a total of 10 degrees).

329

Chapter 5: Tool Properties

Property

Description

Sets the range for random spacing around the set Spacing value. For example, if theSpacing is set to 50% and the Random Spacing is set to 10%, then Storyboard Pro will
choose values between 45%–55% (plus or minus 5 percent, equaling a total of 10
percent).

Random Spacing

Smoothing Tab
The Smoothing tab contains options to configure how Storyboard Pro should automatically smooth your eraser
strokes as you paint.

330

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

NOTE
The Smoothing tab is only available when working on a vector layer, as bitmap layers do notsupport smoothing.

Property

Description

Centerline Smoothing

Defines the amount of smoothing Storyboard Pro should perform on your eraser
stroke's direction, curves and corners. A higher setting will prevent your line frombeing shaky, but is liable to reduce drawing precision and turn sharp angles into
curves.

Contour Smoothing

Defines the amount of smoothing Storyboard Pro should perform on outer contour ofthe eraser stroke. A higher setting will round sharp corners and reduce the amount ofcontrol points for the resulting vector shape.

Transparency Tab
The Transparency tab allows you to decide if your eraser has antialiasing as well as to set its flow and opacity
settings.

331

Chapter 5: Tool PropertiesNOTE
The Transparency tab's options are only available on vector layers if the Eraser Type option of the
Tip tab is set to Textured Vector or Textured, Preserve Vector.. On bitmap layers, those options
are always available.

Property

Description

Enabled by default. This option causes the contours of the eraser strokes toblend with the surrounding colours, to create an illusion of smoothness
otherwise not possible due to the picture resolution.
Antialiasing

If antialiasing is disabled, the eraser will either fully erase pixels or leave themintact.

NOTE
When disabled, all other options in the Transparency tab are disabled.

The Maximum and Minimum Flow parameters let you set the range for the rate at
which your eraser's effect flows. The greater the flow, the more consistent theeffect is. If the flow is light, then the effect may look spotty. This feature works
with the pressure sensitivity of a pen tablet.
llMaximum and Minimum Flow

Maximum Opacity and
Minimum Opacity

Maximum Flow: Sets the maximum rate at which colour and texture areapplied as you create a fluid stroke.
Minimum Flow: Sets the minimum rate at which colour and texture areapplied as you create a fluid stroke. It is defined as a percentage of theMaximum Flow value. If the Minimum Flow value is set to 100%, thentablet pressure sensitivity will no longer be applicable. The flow will be
set to the constant rate of the Maximum Flow value.

The Maximum and Minimum Opacity parameters are where you set the opacity
range for a eraser mark. This works with the pressure sensitivity of a pen tablet.
l

Maximum Opacity: Sets the transparency limit of the eraser mark when
the pressure is heavy.

332

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Property

DescriptionlRandomness

Minimum Opacity: Sets the transparency limit of the eraser mark when
the pressure is very light. It is defined as a percentage of the Maximum
Opacity value. If the Minimum Opacity value is set to 100%, then tablet
pressure sensitivity will no longer be applicable. The opacity will be set tothe constant rate of the Maximum Opacity value.

Th Randomness parameter lets you set the range for the randomness of the flow
and opacity. This works with the pressure sensitivity of a pen tablet.
You can create variation in the flow of your eraser stroke just by setting theMaximum and Minimum Flow values. If you add randomness to the mix, pressure
sensitivity from your drawing tablet will still be applied. Light pressure will create
random values around the minimum, while heavy pressure will create random
values closer to the maximum. The larger the percentage, the larger the range ofrandom variation.

Randomness Flow

NOTE
Setting the Minimum Flow value to 100% eliminates the possibility ofcreating flow variation on your stroke, whether you are applying
randomness or not. That is, you would be forcing a uniform flow using theMaximum Flow value.

333

Chapter 5: Tool Properties

Property

Description

You can create variation in the opacity of your eraser stroke just by setting theMaximum and Minimum Opacity values. If you add randomness to the mix,pressure sensitivity from your drawing tablet will still be applied. Light pressure
will create random values around the minimum, while heavy pressure will create
random values closer to the maximum. The larger the percentage, the larger therange of random variation.

Random Opacity

NOTE
Setting the Minimum Opacity value to 100% eliminates the possibility ofcreating opacity variation on your stroke, whether you are applying
randomness or not. That is, you would be forcing a uniform opacity using
the Maximum Opacity value.

Dual Tip Tab
The Dual Tip tab lets you set the parameters for creating a dual tip eraser. The primary bitmap eraser tip andthe dual tip always work together. You can set the parameters for the primary tip in the Tip tab and those forthe dual tip in the Dual Tip tab. The Blend mode you select determines how the tips are combined.
By default, the Blend Mode is set to Multiply and the Random Angle to 360°.

334

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

NOTE
To use a Dual Tip, you must enable option by checking the checkbox inside the Dual Tip tab.
Additionally, if you are working on a vector layer, the Eraser Type option of the Tip tab must be set
to Textured Vector or Textured, Preserve Vector.

Tool Name

Description

Enable/Disable

The checkbox inside the tab allows you to decide whether or not your eraser uses adual tip. If this checkbox is unchecked, the options in the Dual Tip tab will bedisabled.

Blend Mode

The Blend modes let you decide how the primary tip and the dual tip are combined.

Multiply

This is the default blend mode. When the two eraser tips are combined in this mode,
they essentially cut each other out in overlapping areas, where one or both tips havean area of 100% transparency. The less opaque the eraser tips are, the lighter their
combination.

335

Chapter 5: Tool Properties

Tool Name

Colour Dodge

Description

In this mode, the primary tip cuts out the shape of the dual tip. Where the tip shapes
overlap, within the boundaries of the primary shape, the colour and opacity appear
darker.

336

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Tool Name

CombineDescription

This mode treats the two tips as two different and separate erasers that have thesame colour and follow the same path.

337

Chapter 5: Tool Properties

Tool Name

Description

Paper Texture Tab
The Paper Texture tab lets you configure a paper-like texture for your eraser. You can also add textures byimporting image files, or import paper textures that were previously exported from Storyboard Pro.

338

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

NOTE
To use a Paper Texture, you must enable option by checking the checkbox inside the Paper
Texture tab. Additionally, if you are working on a vector layer, the Eraser Type option of the Tip tab
must be set to Textured Vector or Textured, Preserve Vector.

Property

Description

Enable/Disable

The checkbox inside the tab allows you to decide whether or not your eraser uses apaper texture. If this checkbox is unchecked, the options in the Paper Texture tab will
be disabled.

Texture Scale

Increase or decreases the size of the paper texture.

Additive

This option layers the texture on top of itself as you scribble overlapping lines in one
continuous stroke. If this option is turned off, areas of overlapping lines from a single,
continuous stroke will appear the same, in terms of darkness and texture, as nonoverlapping areas.

339

Chapter 5: Tool Properties

Property

Description

This option defines the way separate, overlapping strokes behave. If this option isenabled, the paper texture's position does not change with each sweep of the eraser.
If this option is disabled, each sweep of the eraser produces a different texture
position. The texture orientation always stays the same.

Aligned340

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Layer Transform Tool Properties
The Layer Transform tool lets you show or hide the translation control, flip, rotate, translate and scale a selected
layer. You can also animate layers by setting keyframes and then fine-tune them using the Function Editor.

How to access the Layer Transform tool properties
1. In the Tools toolbar, select the Layer Transformtool.

The tool's properties are displayed in the Tool Properties view.

Icon

Property

Description

Layer Transform
Show
Translate
Controls

Shows or hides the translation controls in the Stage view when using the Layer
Transform tool on a layer. The controls are displayed by default.

Show Rotate
Controls

Shows or hides the rotation controls in the Stage view when using the Layer
Transform tool on a layer. The controls are displayed by default.

Show Scale
Controls

Shows or hides the scale controls in the Stage view when using the Layer Transform
tool on a layer. The controls are displayed by default.

341

Chapter 5: Tool Properties

Icon

Property

Description

Snap to3D Surface

Lets you snap a 2D layer or 3D model to a 3D surface and manipulate it.

Animated Layer Operations

Flip Vertical

Flips the selection vertically.

Flip
Horizontal

Flips the selection horizontally.

Rotate 90
CW

Rotates the selection 90° clockwise.

Rotate 90
CWW

Rotates the selection 90° counterclockwise.

Reset Pivot

The Reset Pivot button resets the current layer’s pivot point to its original position at
the centre of the camera frame. You can also select Layer > Pivot > Reset Pivot.

Center Pivot
on Selection

By default, the pivot is positioned at the center of the camera frame. Use this button
to set the pivot at the centre of the selected layer. You can also select Layer > Pivot >Center Pivot on Selection.

Snap toGroundLets you snap a layer to the surface directly below it The angle of the layer is retained
and the lowest point of the layer will connect to the surface.

Offset X

Lets you enter a value to reposition the selection along the X-axis.

Offset Y

Lets you enter a value to reposition the selection along the Y-axis.

Width

Lets you enter a value to resize the width of the selection.

HeightLets you enter a value to resize the height of the selection.

Lock

Locks or unlocks the ratio between the Width and Height values.

342

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Icon

Property

Description

Lets you enter specific values to rotate the selection. A positive value rotates theselection counter clockwise and a negative value rotates the selection clockwise.
Angle

NOTE
This field is only available when working in 2D mode.

Keyframes
Add
Keyframe

Adds a keyframe to the selected layer.

Reset
Keyframe

Resets all the position values to their defaults.

DeleteKeyframe

Deletes the selected keyframe from the layer.

Previous
Keyframe

Displays the previous keyframe.

Next
Keyframe

Displays the next keyframe.

Function
EditorOpens the Function Editor where you can edit function curves and parameters. It is a
visual graph for adding, removing, and editing keyframes, as well as adjusting thevelocity. The Function Editor allows you to display multiple functions in the
background as a reference.
Lets you set the velocity at which the layer movement begins.

--

Ease InYou can enter the duration of the ease in after the first frame in which the gradualchange layer movement begins. For example, if you want to slowly accelerate to thenormal layer speed from frame 1 to 10, enter a value of 10.
Lets you set the velocity at which the layer movement ends.

--

Ease OutYou can enter the duration of the ease out after the first frame in which the gradualchange in layer movement begins. Enter the number of frames before the last frame inwhich the change in layer movement is gradual.

343

Chapter 5: Tool Properties

Icon

Property

Description

Lets you position the layer along the X and Y axes.
OffsetNOTEThis field is only available when working in 2D mode.

Lets you scale the selected layer vertically and horizontally.
Scale

NOTE
This field is only available when working in 2D mode.

--

RotationLets you rotate the selected layer clockwise and counter clockwise.

Scene/Panel
Duration

Displays the length of the selected scene or panel in timecode format. The default
length of a panel is 1 second.

344

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Line Tool Properties
The Line tool allows you to quickly draw a line segment by dragging the mouse from its starting point to its end
point.

How to access the Line tool properties
1. In the Tools toolbar, select the Linetool.

The tool's properties are displayed in the Tool Properties view.

Pencil Properties
Just like other shape tools, this tool creates pencil lines. Hence, its tool properties are similar to the ones of thePencil tool and it can be used with pencil presets.
Tool Name

Description

The Preview area lets you see a preview of the stroke your drawing tool will make.
Preview Area

The arrow button right of the preview area opens the Pencil Properties dialog.
Pencil Properties
Dialog345

Chapter 5: Tool Properties

Tool Name

Description

While the Tool Properties view only gives you access to a few of the pencil properties,
a list of pencil presets and other drawing options, the Pencil Properties dialog gives
you access to all the available options for your pencil's shape and texture. For more
information on the Pencil Properties dialog, see the Pencil Properties Dialog section
below.
Size

Defines the width of the pencil line used to draw the line.
You can adjust the start, end, and join style of a pencil line.

Shape

l

l

l

Start: Lets you select the style of the start tip, which is the first tip you drew.
You can choose between Round or Flat style.
End: Lets you select the style of the end tip, which is the last tip you drew. You
can choose between Round or Flat style.
Join: Lets you select the joint style. The joints are where the line curves abruptly.
You could also define the Join style as the corner style. You can choose between
Round, Mitre and Bevel style.

Pencil Presets
These options allow you to select, create and manage pencil presets.
Icon

Property

Presets list

New Brush Preset

Description

Storyboard Pro provides a few pencil presets and also lets you create andsave your own. It is a good idea to create and save pencils with precise
sizes and parameters when you draw for efficiency and consistency.
You can export the pencil presets that you have created and import thosethat others have created. This is a good way for you and project
collaborators to keep a consistent look for the project.

Creates a new preset based on the current tool properties.

346

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Icon

Property

Description

Delete Brush Preset

Deletes the currently selected preset.

Open a menu that contains the following options:
l

l

l

l

Brush Presets Menu
l

l

l

l

New Brush Preset: Creates a new preset based on the current tool
properties.
Delete Brush: Deletes the currently selected preset.
Rename Brush: Allows you to rename the currently selected
preset.
Import Brushes: Allows you to import brush presets exported
from Storyboard Pro.
Export Brushes: Allows you to export your brush presets into an.xml file.
Small Thumbnail: Displays presets in a grid of small thumbnails
with a preview of their tip.
Large Thumbnail: Displays presets in a grid of big thumbnails,
with their name and a preview of their tip.
Stroke View: Displays presets in a list, with their name and apreview of a stroke done with each preset.

Drawing Options
These options affect the way your drawing strokes are added to your artwork.
Icon

Tool Name

Description

When enabled, your brush strokes will appear behind the existing artwork.

Draw Behind347

Chapter 5: Tool Properties

Icon

Tool Name

Description

NOTEYour brush stroke will temporarily appear over your artwork as you
draw it, until you release the mouse cursor or tablet pen. If you
want a live preview of your stroke, activate the Realistic Preview
option by selecting View > Realistic Preview from the top menu.

When enabled, while you're drawing, the mouse cursor will automaticallysnap to the nearby contours of existing artwork, allowing you to draw
shapes that connect with other parts of your drawing.

Snap to Contour

NOTE
If you draw a line with the Line tool and make its tip snap to acontour or another control point in your artwork, they will belocked together. You can then manipulate both simultaneously
using the Contour Editor

tool. You can also separate two

drawing strokes that have been snapped together by selecting oneof them with the Selecttool and moving it away.

When enabled, while you're drawing, the mouse cursor will automaticallyalign with the edges of strokes and shapes in your artwork, allowing you
to draw shapes that align with parts of your drawing.

Snap and Align

Auto-Flatten Mode

By default, when drawing on a vector layer, each new stroke is created as a

348

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Icon

Tool Name

Description

separate drawing object, which can be edited independently from otherparts of the artwork. When enabled, the Auto-Flatten option automaticallymerges strokes into existing artwork.

NOTE
Using the Select tool, you can use select and remove a segment offlattened pencil lines. Overlapping pencil lines drawn with theAuto-Flatten mode are essentially cut into segments by theoverlap and can be treated as individual lines.

When enabled, small gaps between the pencil lines you draw will beclosed by an invisible stroke to make sure your shapes are closed and thatthey can be filled with the Paint tool.

Auto-Close Gap

When drawing contours with pencil lines, the centreline is used todetermine whether or not the contour is closed, but the visible tips of thepencil line will extend a bit beyond the tips of its centreline, making it
possible to have shapes that appear closed, but are not really. This canprevent the shape from being filled with the Paint tool. Enabling thisoption when drawing with the Pencil or Line tool will prevent you fromleaving invisible gaps in your contours.

Pencil Properties Dialog
Since the Line tool draws pencil lines, you can use the Pencil Properties dialog to customize the type of lines it
draws. To open the Pencil Properties dialog, click on the arrow button right of the stroke display area.

349

Chapter 5: Tool Properties

Property

Description

Maximum Size

Defines the maximum size of the pencil line. If the tool is used with a pressure
sensitive pen tablet, the width of the stroke will vary between its maximum size andminimum size depending on the amount of pressure used. If used with a mouse, thewidth of the stroke will always be its maximum size.

Minimum Size

Defines the minimum size of your stroke as a percentage of the maximum size. If you
do not have pressure sensitivity from a pen table, the minimum size value will beignored.

Smoothing

Defines the number of control points added to the centre line. The fewer the control
points the smoother (but less faithful) the line.

Contour Smoothing

Defines the number of points on the contour share of your stroke. This will smoothout the bumps and waves on tour contour shape of your brush strokes.
You can adjust the start, end, and join style of a pencil line.

Shape
l

l

Start: Lets you select the style of the start tip, which is the first tip you drew.
You can choose between Round or Flat style.
End: Lets you select the style of the end tip, which is the last tip you drew.
You can choose between Round or Flat style.

350

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Property

DescriptionlJoin: Lets you select the joint style. The joints are where the line curves
abruptly. You could also define the Join style as the corner style. You canchoose between Round, Mitre and Bevel style.

351

Chapter 5: Tool Properties

Maintain Size Tool Properties
The Maintain Size tool lets you retain the visual scale of elements as you move them in the Z-axis in the Side or
Top views. As you move drawing layers on the Z-axis, they are scaled to preserve their size in the camera.

How to access the Maintain Size tool properties
1. In the Tools toolbar, select the Maintain Size

tool.

The tool's properties are displayed in the Tool Properties view.

Icon

Property

Description

Maintain Size Tool Properties
Allows you to choose the method to visually select multiple elements:lLasso: Allows you to select multiple elements by drawing a lasso
around them with your mouse.

lSelection Mode

Marquee: Allows you to select multiple elements by drawing a
rectangle around them. This is faster, as you only need to drag your mousefrom one corner of the rectangle to its opposite corner, but it may not be as
precise as you want.

TIP
You can press and hold the Alt key to temporarily use the other selectionmode.

Peg Selection
Mode

Lets you switch between selecting peg and drawing layers. Select this option to
select peg layers. Deselect this option to select drawing layers.

352

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Paint Tool Properties
The Paint tool allows you to fill closed areas of your drawing with the selected colour.

How to access the Paint tool properties
1. In the Tools toolbar, select the Paint, Paint Unpainted

or Unpainttool.

The tool's properties are displayed in the Tool Properties view.

Paint Tool Options
Icon

Property

Description

Allows you to choose the method to visually select multiple elements:lLasso: Allows you to select multiple elements by drawing a lasso
around them with your mouse.

lSelection Mode

Marquee: Allows you to select multiple elements by drawing a
rectangle around them. This is faster, as you only need to drag your mousefrom one corner of the rectangle to its opposite corner, but it may not be as
precise as you want.

TIP
You can press and hold the Alt key to temporarily use the other selection
mode.

Paint Mode

The Paint tool has three different modes:

353

Chapter 5: Tool Properties

Icon

Property

DescriptionlPaint: Paints or repaints selected zones, whether or not they are alreadyfilled.

l

Paint Unpainted: Only paints empty zones, and does not repaint zones
that are already filled with colour.

lUnpaint: Removes colour from the selected zone, replacing it withtransparency.

By default, if you attempt to fill a shape that has a small gap in its contour, thePaint tool will not be able to fill the shape. This option allows you to make the
Paint tool automatically add a stroke to close the shape when it detects a small
gap between two strokes in the shape.
The Close Gap setting can be set to a value between 0 and 10. This determines the
maximum size of a gap to close, in pixels. You can also use one of the following
presets:
Close Gapl

No Close Gap: Sets the Close Gap setting to 0, disabling the feature.

l

Close Small Gap: Sets the Close Gap setting to 2, making the Paint toolclose gaps that are barely visible.

l

Close Medium Gap: Sets the Close Gap setting to 4, making the Paint
tool close gaps that are somewhat visible.

l

Close Large Gap: Sets the Close Gap setting to 8, making the Paint toolclose gaps that are easy to notice.

Bitmap Options
Since bitmap drawings are made of pixels instead of shapes, and that the outlines of shapes in bitmap
drawings are often feathered, it can be complicated to figure out exactly the area the Paint tool must fill whentrying to fill a zone in a bitmap drawing. For example, if the Paint tool only replaces pixels with the exact same
colour as the one you click on with the selected colour, it will leave a small gap near the outlines of the shape.

354

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

The following settings determine how the Paint tool figures out the area it must fill. When any of these settings
are increased, the Paint tool's tolerance for colour or alpha differences increases and it will a bigger area that itotherwise would.
Icon

Property

Description

The alpha threshold that separates opaque and transparent zones. Whenfilling a "transparent" zone, the paint tool will apply the colour undersemi-transparent pixels, making them opaque. Then filling an "opaque"zone, the paint tool will replace the colour of semi-transparent pixels
without affecting their transparency.

--

Alpha

If you want to repaint lineart or shapes that have no outlines, you can doso by decreasing this setting completely. This will make it fill any pixelthat isn't 100% transparent, so it will paint your outlines completely.
However, if you're using this method to repaint outlines, they must not
be filled yet for this method to work.
If you want to paint transparent zones that have dirt or semi-transparent
spots, you can increase this setting to make the Paint tool paint behindthem instead of around them.

NOTE
Raising this setting too high may cause the paint tool to ignore
outlines that are not 100% opaque, which can cause it to think
the shape is not closed. Hence, it might fail to find a zone to fill
and not do anything.

--

Colour Tolerance

The amount of tolerance the paint tool has for changes in colour whenfilling an area. Raising this setting will allow the paint tool to fill overareas that have some variations in colour, but may cause it to fill beyond
the areas you meant to paint.
The maximum amount of pixels beyond the fillable zone that the Paint
tool can fill.

--

Maximum Overlap

When this setting is set to any value above zero, the paint tool will fill
the zone until it finds a pixel that is a different colour, value ortransparency as the one you clicked on. Then, it will start filling pixels
beyond that point, up until it filled the amount of pixels in the Maximum
Overlap setting.
If it lands outside of a fillable zone before it reached the maximum
overlap, it will stop filling at that point. However, if it lands into anotherfillable zone before reaching its maximum overlap, it will fill that zone aswell. Therefore, if you're filling shapes inside other shapes, you have to
set this setting to the approximate width of your outlines. Setting it

355

Chapter 5: Tool Properties

Icon

Property

Description

higher will make the colour spill beyond the zone you clicked on and fill
the zone outside of it, and setting it lower is liable to leave a small gap
between the fill and the outlines.

NOTE
When you fill a zone with overlap, Storyboard Pro tries to detectand preserve the outlines of your shape. This is easy to do whenfilling a transparent shape, or when repainting a shape made ofsolid outlines and a solid fill. However, if you are trying torepaint an already painted zone, it may fail to detect youroutlines and may repaint over them if the colour of your outlines
or inside the shape isn't consistent. Therefore, it is highly
recommended to avoid repainting painted zones as much as
possible when working with bitmap layers.

When enabled, the outlines of the fill will be smoothed so that they do
not look pixelated.

Antialiasing

NOTE
The effect of this setting will not be visible if you fill all the way
to the outlines, as the Paint tool will preserve the antialiasing ofexisting outlines when filling up to them.

356

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Pencil Tool Properties
The Pencil tool allows you to draw simple contour lines that are defined by their centerline and their thickness.
When you select the Pencil tool, the Tool Properties view displays the different Pencil modes that control how
the pencil line is drawn.

How to access the Pencil tool properties
1. In the Tools toolbar, select the Pencil

tool.

The tool's properties are displayed in the Tool Properties view.

Pencil Properties
The following properties affect the pencil's size, smoothing, shape and other properties for the drawing style ofyour pencil. Those properties can be saved into pencil presets for later use.
Property

Description

The Preview area lets you see a preview of the stroke your drawing tool will make.
Preview Area

357

Chapter 5: Tool Properties

Property

Description

The arrow button right of the preview area opens the Pencil Properties dialog.

Pencil Properties
DialogWhile the Tool Properties view only gives you access to a few of the pencil properties,
a list of pencil presets and other drawing options, the Pencil Properties dialog gives
you access to all the available options for your pencil's shape and texture. For more
information on the Pencil Properties dialog, see the Pencil Properties Dialog section
below.
Defines the maximum width of the pencil line.

Maximum Size

Smoothing

If the tool is used with a pressure sensitive pen tablet, the width of the stroke will vary
between its maximum size and minimum size depending on the amount of pressureused. If used with a mouse, the width of the stroke will always be its maximum size.
Defines the number of control points added to the centre line. The fewer the control
points the smoother (but less faithful) the line.
You can adjust the start, end, and join style of a pencil line.

Shape

l

l

l

Start: Lets you select the style of the start tip, which is the first tip you drew.
You can choose between Round or Flat style.
End: Lets you select the style of the end tip, which is the last tip you drew. You
can choose between Round or Flat style.
Join: Lets you select the joint style. The joints are where the line curves abruptly.
You could also define the Join style as the corner style. You can choose between
Round, Mitre and Bevel style.

Pencil Presets
These options allow you to select, create and manage pencil presets.

358

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Icon

Property

Presets list

Description

Storyboard Pro provides a few pencil presets and also lets you create andsave your own. It is a good idea to create and save pencils with precise
sizes and parameters when you draw for efficiency and consistency.
You can export the pencil presets that you have created and import thosethat others have created. This is a good way for you and project
collaborators to keep a consistent look for the project.

New Brush Preset

Creates a new preset based on the current tool properties.

Delete Brush Preset

Deletes the currently selected preset.

Open a menu that contains the following options:
l

l

l

l

Brush Presets Menu
l

l

l

l

New Brush Preset: Creates a new preset based on the current tool
properties.
Delete Brush: Deletes the currently selected preset.
Rename Brush: Allows you to rename the currently selected
preset.
Import Brushes: Allows you to import brush presets exported
from Storyboard Pro.
Export Brushes: Allows you to export your brush presets into an.xml file.
Small Thumbnail: Displays presets in a grid of small thumbnails
with a preview of their tip.
Large Thumbnail: Displays presets in a grid of big thumbnails,
with their name and a preview of their tip.
Stroke View: Displays presets in a list, with their name and apreview of a stroke done with each preset.

Drawing Options
These options affect the way your drawing strokes are added to your artwork.
Icon

Property

Description

Draw Behind

When enabled, your brush strokes will appear behind the existing artwork.

359

Chapter 5: Tool Properties

Icon

Property

Description

NOTEYour brush stroke will temporarily appear over your artwork as you
draw it, until you release the mouse cursor or tablet pen. If you
want a live preview of your stroke, activate the Realistic Preview
option by selecting View > Realistic Preview from the top menu.

When enabled, drawing a closed shape will automatically fill it with thecurrently selected Paint colour.
Auto Fill

When enabled, drawing a closed shape will automatically remove theoutstanding lines.
Trim Extra Lines

When the Trim Extra Lines option is enabled, enable this option to makethe point where the beginning and end of the stroke meet into a smooth
curve rather than a hard corner.

Align Handles After
Trim

360

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Icon

Property

Description

By default, when drawing on a vector layer, each new stroke is created as aseparate drawing object, which can be edited independently from otherparts of the artwork. When enabled, the Auto-Flatten option automaticallymerges strokes into existing artwork.

Auto Flatten

NOTE
Using the Select tool, you can select and remove a segment offlattened pencil lines. Overlapping pencil lines drawn with theAuto-Flatten mode are essentially cut into segments by theoverlap and can be treated as individual lines.

When enabled, small gaps between the pencil lines you draw will beclosed by an invisible stroke to make sure your shapes are closed and thatthey can be filled with the Paint tool.

Auto-Close Gap

When drawing contours with pencil lines, the centreline is used todetermine whether or not the contour is closed, but the visible tips of thepencil line will extend a bit beyond the tips of its centreline, making it
possible to have shapes that appear closed, but are not really. This canprevent the shape from being filled with the Paint tool. Enabling thisoption when drawing with the Pencil or Line tool will prevent you fromleaving invisible gaps in your contours.

361

Chapter 5: Tool Properties

Pencil Properties Dialog
Pencils have extra parameters which are not accessible from the Tool Properties view. To open the Pencil
Properties dialog, click on the arrow button right of the stroke display area.

Property

Description

Defines the maximum size of the pencil line. If the tool is used with a pressure
Maximum Sizesensitive pen tablet, the width of the stroke will vary between its maximum size andminimum size depending on the amount of pressure used. If used with a mouse, thewidth of the stroke will always be its maximum size.

Minimum Size

Defines the minimum size of your stroke as a percentage of the maximum size. If you
do not have pressure sensitivity from a pen table, the minimum size value will beignored.

Smoothing

Defines the number of control points added to the centre line. The fewer the control
points the smoother (but less faithful) the line.

Contour Smoothing

Defines the number of points on the contour share of your stroke. This will smoothout the bumps and waves on tour contour shape of your brush strokes.
You can adjust the start, end, and join style of a pencil line.

Shape

362

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Property

Description

l

l

l

Start: Lets you select the style of the start tip, which is the first tip you drew.
You can choose between Round or Flat style.
End: Lets you select the style of the end tip, which is the last tip you drew.
You can choose between Round or Flat style.
Join: Lets you select the joint style. The joints are where the line curves
abruptly. You could also define the Join style as the corner style. You canchoose between Round, Mitre and Bevel style.

363

Chapter 5: Tool Properties

Perspective Tool Properties
The perspective tool allows you to deform artwork by creating a rectangular bounding box around it andallowing you to manipulate any of the four corners. The selected artwork will be deformed to fit the shape you
make by simulating a perspective effect.

How to access the Perspective tool properties
1. In the Tools toolbar, select the Perspectivetool.

The tool's properties are displayed in the Tool Properties view.

Icon

Tool Name

Description

Perspective Tool Options
Allows you to choose the method to visually select multiple elements:lLasso: Allows you to select multiple elements by drawing alasso around them with your mouse.

lSelection Mode

Marquee: Allows you to select multiple elements by drawing a
rectangle around them. This is faster, as you only need to dragyour mouse from one corner of the rectangle to its opposite
corner, but it may not be as precise as you want.

TIP
You can press and hold the Alt key to temporarily use the otherselection mode.

Snap to Contour

When enabled, while moving a selection, the mouse cursor (along withthe selection) will snap against the nearby points and contours of yourartwork, allowing you to snap parts of your artwork together.

Snap and Align

When enabled, while moving a selection, the rectangular bounding boxof the selection will snap to the rectangular bounding box of any other364

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Icon

Tool Name

Description

drawing stroke in the drawing, allowing you to align drawing strokes
laterally.
When enabled, while moving a selection, the mouse cursor will snap
against the intersecting points of the grid.
Snap to Grid

TIP
To display the grid, select View > Grid > Show Grid from the
top menu or press Ctrl + G.

Allows you to select between one of the two following deformation
modes:l

Perspective: Deforms the selection by simulating aperspective effect.

l

Lattice: Deforms the selection by simply making the artwork
fit the bounding box, without applying a perspective effect.

Deformation Mode

The difference between both modes becomes easier to understand if you
apply a transformation to a drawing of a grid to make it look like it's laid
down on a surface:

Operations

Flip Horizontal

Flips the selection horizontally.

Flip Vertical

Flips the selection vertically.

Rotate 90 CW

Rotates the selection 90° clockwise.

365

Chapter 5: Tool Properties

Icon

Tool Name

Description

Rotate 90 CCW

Rotates the selection 90° counterclockwise.

366

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Polyline Tool Properties
The Polyline tool allows you to draw complex lines or shapes by defining each point and their Bezier handles
one by one.

How to access the Polyline tool properties
1. In the Tools toolbar, select the Polyline

tool.

The tool's properties are displayed in the Tool Properties view.

Pencil Properties
Just like other shape tools, this tool creates pencil lines. Hence, its tool properties are similar to the ones of thePencil tool and it can be used with pencil presets.
Icon

Property

Description
The Preview area lets you see a preview of the stroke your drawing tool
will make.

Preview Area

Pencil Properties
Dialog

The arrow button right of the preview area opens the Pencil Properties
dialog.

367

Chapter 5: Tool Properties

While the Tool Properties view only gives you access to the pencil size, alist of pencil presets and other drawing options, the Pencil Properties
dialog gives you access to all the available options for your pencil's shapeand texture. For more information on the Pencil Properties dialog, see the
Polyline Tool Properties section below.
Size

Defines the width of the pencil line used to draw the shape.

Pencil Presets
Icon

Property

Description

Presets list

Storyboard Pro provides a variety of presets and also lets you create andsave your own. It is a good idea to create and save pencils with precise
sizes and parameters when you draw and design for efficiency andconsistency.
All tools using pencil lines share the same preset list. Therefore, thePolyline, Line, Rectangle, Ellipse, and Pencil tools share the same preset
list.

New Preset

Creates a new preset based on the current tool properties.

Delete Preset

Deletes the currently selected preset.

Presets Menu

Gives access to more options for managing presets.

Rename Brush

Allows you to rename the currently selected preset.

Import Brushes

Allows you to import brush presets exported from Storyboard Pro.

Export Brushes

Allows you to export your brush presets into an .xml file.

Small Thumbnail

Displays presets in a grid of small thumbnails with a preview of their tip.

Large Thumbnail

Displays presets in a grid of big thumbnails, with their name and apreview of their tip.

368

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Stroke View

Displays presets in a list, with their name and a preview of a stroke donewith each preset.

Drawing Options
Icon

Property

Description
When this option is enabled, clicking close to a contour in your drawing
will add the point to that contour. The line you are building will be linked
to that contour.

Snap to Contour

If this option is disabled, attempting to click on existing contours will
always create a point very close to that contour, but not exactly on it.
Therefore, it is necessary to enable this mode if you want to create linesthat branch from into existing contours in your drawing.

NOTE
If you draw a line with the Line tool and make its tip snap to acontour or another control point in your artwork, they will belocked together. You can then manipulate both simultaneously
using the Contour Editor

tool. You can also separate two

drawing strokes that have been snapped together by selecting
one of them with the Selecttool and moving it away.

When enabled, drawing a closed shape will automatically fill it with thecurrently selected Paint colour.
Auto Fill

Trim Extra Lines

When enabled, drawing a closed shape will automatically remove theoutstanding lines.

369

Chapter 5: Tool Properties

When the Trim Extra Lines option is enabled, enable this option to makethe point where the beginning and end of the stroke meet into a smooth
curve rather than a hard corner.
Align Handles After
Trim

By default, when drawing on a vector layer, each new stroke is created asa separate drawing object, which can be edited independently from otherparts of the artwork. When enabled, the Auto-Flatten option
automatically merges strokes into existing artwork.

Auto-Flatten Mode

NOTE
Using the Select tool, you can use select and remove a segmentof flattened pencil lines. Overlapping pencil lines drawn with theAuto-Flatten mode are essentially cut into segments by theoverlap and can be treated as individual lines.

Pencil Properties Dialog
The Polyline tool draws the same type of line as the Pencil tool. Hence, you can configure the Polyline tool'slines using the Pencil Properties dialog, which you can open by clicking on the arrow button right of the stroke
display area in the Tool Properties view.

370

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Property

Description

Maximum Size

Defines the maximum size of the pencil line. If the tool is used with a pressure
sensitive pen tablet, the width of the stroke will vary between its maximum size andminimum size depending on the amount of pressure used. If used with a mouse, thewidth of the stroke will always be its maximum size.

Minimum Size

Defines the minimum size of your stroke as a percentage of the maximum size. If you
do not have pressure sensitivity from a pen table, the minimum size value will beignored.

Smoothing

Defines the number of control points added to the centre line. The fewer the control
points the smoother (but less faithful) the line.

Contour Smoothing

Defines the number of points on the contour share of your stroke. This will smoothout the bumps and waves on tour contour shape of your brush strokes.
You can adjust the start, end, and join style of a pencil line.

Shape

l

l

l

Start: Lets you select the style of the start tip, which is the first tip you drew.
You can choose between Round or Flat style.
End: Lets you select the style of the end tip, which is the last tip you drew.
You can choose between Round or Flat style.
Join: Lets you select the joint style. The joints are where the line curves
abruptly. You could also define the Join style as the corner style. You canchoose between Round, Mitre and Bevel style.

371

Chapter 5: Tool Properties

Rectangle Tool Properties
The Rectangle tool allows you to quickly draw a rectangle or a square.

How to access the Rectangle tool properties
1. In the Tools toolbar, select the Rectangle

tool.

The tool's properties are displayed in the Tool Properties view.

Pencil Properties
Just like other shape tools, this tool creates pencil lines. Hence, its tool properties are similar to the ones of thePencil tool and it can be used with pencil presets.
Property

Description

The Preview area lets you see a preview of the stroke your drawing tool will make.
Preview Area

The arrow button right of the preview area opens the Pencil Properties dialog.
Pencil Properties
DialogWhile the Tool Properties view only gives you access to a few of the pencil properties,

372

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Property

Description

a list of pencil presets and other drawing options, the Pencil Properties dialog gives
you access to all the available options for your pencil's shape and texture. For more
information on the Pencil Properties dialog, see the Pencil Properties Dialog on page375 section below.
Size

Defines the width of the pencil line used to draw the shape.
You can adjust the start, end, and join style of a pencil line.

Shape

l

l

l

Start: Lets you select the style of the start tip, which is the first tip you drew.
You can choose between Round or Flat style.
End: Lets you select the style of the end tip, which is the last tip you drew. You
can choose between Round or Flat style.
Join: Lets you select the joint style. The joints are where the line curves abruptly.
You could also define the Join style as the corner style. You can choose between
Round, Mitre and Bevel style.

Drawing Options
These options affect the way your shape is added to your artwork.
Icon

Property

Description

When enabled, your brush strokes will appear behind the existing artwork.

Draw Behind373

Chapter 5: Tool Properties

Icon

Property

Description

NOTEYour brush stroke will temporarily appear over your artwork as you
draw it, until you release the mouse cursor or tablet pen. If you
want a live preview of your stroke, activate the Realistic Preview
option by selecting View > Realistic Preview from the top menu.

When enabled, the shape you draw is automatically filled with the selectedcolour. By default, drawing a shape only creates its outlines.

Auto Fill

Snap to Contour

When enabled, while you're drawing, the mouse cursor will snap to the
nearby contours of the artwork in your drawing.

Snap and Align

When enabled, while you're drawing, the mouse cursor will automaticallyalign to the rectangular bounding boxes of other strokes and shapes inyour drawing.
By default, when drawing on a vector layer, each new stroke is created as aseparate drawing object, which can be edited independently from otherparts of the artwork. When enabled, the Auto-Flatten option automaticallymerges strokes into existing artwork.

Auto Flatten Mode

NOTE
Using the Select tool, you can use select and remove a segment offlattened pencil lines. Overlapping pencil lines drawn with theAuto-Flatten mode are essentially cut into segments by theoverlap and can be treated as individual lines.

374

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Pencil Presets
These options allow you to select, create and manage pencil presets.
Icon

Property

Presets list

Description

Storyboard Pro provides a few pencil presets and also lets you create andsave your own. It is a good idea to create and save pencils with precise
sizes and parameters when you draw for efficiency and consistency.
You can export the pencil presets that you have created and import thosethat others have created. This is a good way for you and project
collaborators to keep a consistent look for the project.

New Brush Preset

Creates a new preset based on the current tool properties.

Delete Brush Preset

Deletes the currently selected preset.

Open a menu that contains the following options:
l

l

l

l

Brush Presets Menu
l

l

l

l

New Brush Preset: Creates a new preset based on the current tool
properties.
Delete Brush: Deletes the currently selected preset.
Rename Brush: Allows you to rename the currently selected
preset.
Import Brushes: Allows you to import brush presets exported
from Storyboard Pro.
Export Brushes: Allows you to export your brush presets into an.xml file.
Small Thumbnail: Displays presets in a grid of small thumbnails
with a preview of their tip.
Large Thumbnail: Displays presets in a grid of big thumbnails,
with their name and a preview of their tip.
Stroke View: Displays presets in a list, with their name and apreview of a stroke done with each preset.

Pencil Properties Dialog
The Rectangle tool draws the same type of line as the Pencil tool. Hence, you can configure the Rectangle tool'slines using the Pencil Properties dialog, which you can open by clicking on the arrow button right of the stroke
display area in the Tool Properties view.

375

Chapter 5: Tool Properties

Property

Description

Maximum Size

Defines the maximum size of the pencil line. If the tool is used with a pressure
sensitive pen tablet, the width of the stroke will vary between its maximum size andminimum size depending on the amount of pressure used. If used with a mouse, thewidth of the stroke will always be its maximum size.

Minimum Size

Defines the minimum size of your stroke as a percentage of the maximum size. If you
do not have pressure sensitivity from a pen table, the minimum size value will beignored.

Smoothing

Defines the number of control points added to the centre line. The fewer the control
points the smoother (but less faithful) the line.

Contour Smoothing

Defines the number of points on the contour share of your stroke. This will smoothout the bumps and waves on tour contour shape of your brush strokes.
You can adjust the start, end, and join style of a pencil line.

Shape
l

l

Start: Lets you select the style of the start tip, which is the first tip you drew.
You can choose between Round or Flat style.
End: Lets you select the style of the end tip, which is the last tip you drew.
You can choose between Round or Flat style.

376

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Property

DescriptionlJoin: Lets you select the joint style. The joints are where the line curves
abruptly. You could also define the Join style as the corner style. You canchoose between Round, Mitre and Bevel style.

377

Chapter 5: Tool Properties

Select Tool Properties
The Select tool lets you select strokes and apply basic transformations such as repositioning, rotating, scaling or
skewing, using the different handles of the bounding box.
If you have text or pencil lines selected with the Select tool, their properties will display in the Tool Properties
view, allowing you to make changes to your selection.

How to access the Select tool properties
1. In the Tools toolbar, select either the Selecttool or the Select by Colour

tool.

The tool's properties are displayed in the Tool Properties view.

NOTE
Selecting the Select by Colour

tool from the Tools toolbar activates the Select tool, with theSelect by Colour option enabled. Hence, this topic covers the tool properties for both the Select andSelect by Colour tools.

Tool Options
Icon

Property

Description

Allows you to choose the method to visually select multiple elements:lLasso: Allows you to select multiple elements by drawing alasso around them with your mouse.

Selection ModelMarquee: Allows you to select multiple elements by drawing a
rectangle around them. This is faster, as you only need to dragyour mouse from one corner of the rectangle to its opposite
corner, but it may not be as precise as you want.

378

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Icon

Property

Description

TIP
You can press and hold the Alt key to temporarily use the otherselection mode.

Snap to Contour

When enabled, while moving a selection, the mouse cursor (along withthe selection) will snap against the nearby points and contours of yourartwork, allowing you to snap parts of your artwork together.
When enabled, while moving your selection, the rectangular boundingbox of the selection will align with the rectangular bounding boxes ofother strokes and shapes in your artwork.

Snap and Align

When enabled, clicking on a coloured zone in your artwork will instantly
select all the zones that are filled with the same colour.

Select by Colour

379

Chapter 5: Tool Properties

Icon

Property

Description

TIP
You can quickly enable this mode by selecting the Selectby Colour

tool from the Tools toolbar, in the Selecttool'spop-up menu.

Select All in Drawings
Scene

Selects all the drawings in the current scene.

Operations
Icon

Property

Description

Flip Horizontal

Flips the current selection horizontally.

Flip Vertical

Flips the current selection vertically.

Rotate 90 Degrees CW

Rotates the current selection 90 degrees clockwise.

Rotate 90 Degrees CCW

Rotates the current selection 90 degrees counter-clockwise.

Smooth out selected drawing strokes and remove extra points.
SmoothFlattenMerges drawing objects and brush strokes into a single layer. If you draw
new lines to fix a drawing or line with many brush strokes, it can be useful
to flatten them all into a single shape. By default, lines are drawn one on
top of each other. If you intend to repaint the lines or modify their shape, itwill be easier if they are flattened.

380

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Icon

Property

Description

Offset X

Lets you enter a value to reposition the selection along the X-axis.

Offset Y

Lets you enter a value to reposition the selection along the Y-axis.

Width

Lets you enter a value to resize the width of the selection.

HeightLets you enter a value to resize the height of the selection.

Lock

Locks or unlocks the ratio between the Width and Height values.

Angle

Lets you enter specific values to rotate the selection. A positive value
rotates the selection counter clockwise and a negative value rotates theselection clockwise.

Pencil Selection
If the selection contains pencil lines, the Pencil Selection section appears at the bottom of the Tool Properties
view, allowing you to adjust the properties of those pencil lines.

381

Chapter 5: Tool Properties

Property

Description

Maximum Size

Adjusts the size of the parts of the pencil lines that are the thickest. Parts of thepencil lines that are between the minimum and maximum sizes will be adjusted
proportionally.

Minimum Size

Adjusts the size of the parts of the pencil lines that are the thinnest. Parts of thepencil lines that are between the minimum and maximum sizes will be adjusted
proportionally.
You can adjust the start, end, and join style of a pencil line.

Pencil Line Shape

l

l

l

Start: Lets you select the style of the start tip, which is the first tip you drew.
You can choose between Round or Flat style.
End: Lets you select the style of the end tip, which is the last tip you drew.
You can choose between Round or Flat style.
Join: Lets you select the joint style. The joints are where the line curves
abruptly. You could also define the Join style as the corner style. You canchoose between Round, Mitre and Bevel style.

Text Selection
If your selection include text boxes created with the Text tool, a Text Selection section will appear at the bottomof the Tool Properties view, allowing you to adjust the formatting of the whole text box.
TIP
You can also adjust the formatting of parts of the text in the text box using the Text tool—see Text
Tool Properties on page 394.

382

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Icon

Property

Description

Lets you select the font in which to display the text.
Font

Makes the selected text bold.
Bold

Makes the selected text italic.
ItalicAligns the text in the selected text box to the left.

Align Left

Aligns the text in the selected text box to the centre.

Align Center

Align Right

Aligns the text in the selected text box to the right.

383

Chapter 5: Tool Properties

Icon

Property

Description

Makes the text in the selected text box take all the horizontal space byadjusting the spacing between each word. Text that use a single line andtext in the last line of a paragraph is aligned to the left.
Justify

Allows you to set the size of the selected text.
Size

Allows you to increase or decrease the spacing between each character.

Kerning

Auto Kern

Sets the kerning automatically based on the font’s predefined standard.

IndentAllows you to increase or decrease the indentation of the first line of text
in each paragraph.

384

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Icon

Property

Description

Increases or decreases the space between each line of text.

Line Spacing

385

Chapter 5: Tool Properties

Stamp Tool Properties
The Stamp tool allows you to create and use stamps, which can contain one or several drawings that can be
stamped individually or in sequence onto your artwork.

How to access the Stamp tool properties
1. In the Tools toolbar, select the Stamptool.

The tool's properties are displayed in the Tool Properties view.

Stamp Properties
The following options allow you, among other things, to preview your stamp, to change the size of your stamp
as well as to flip it horizontally and vertically.
Property

Description

The Preview area lets you see a preview of what will appear if you draw a stroke with the
Stamp tool.
Preview Area

Stamp Properties

The arrow button right of the preview area opens the Stamp Properties dialog.

386

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Property

DialogDescription

While the Tool Properties view only gives you access to a few of the stamp properties and alist of stamp presets, the Stamp Properties dialog gives you access to all the available options
for the way your stamp will be applied. For more information on the Stamp Properties dialog,
see the Stamp Properties Dialog on page 389 section below.
The two-ended arrows to the left and over the Stamp thumbnail allow you to flip the stamp
horizontally or vertically.

Flip Horizontally/ Flip Vertically

The maximum scaling factor to apply to the stamp before stamping it onto the drawing.
This setting is a percentage, which is relative to the size of the original drawing that was used
to create the stamp. This means that, at 100%, the drawing will be stamped into your artwork
in its original size.
Maximum Scale

NOTE
If the tool is used with a pressure sensitive tablet, the scale of the stamp can be madeto be relative to the amount of pressure you put on your pen. To do this, you must
reducing the Minimum Scale property of your stamp in the Stamp Properties dialog. If
the Minimum Scale setting is left at its default value, which is 100%, the size of thestamp will not vary.

When using a multi-drawing stamp, this is the number of the drawing in the series that will
be stamped on the next time you use the Stamp tool. For example, if your stamp has 3
drawings and this is set to 2, the next drawing that will be stamped on is the second drawing
in the series.
Stamp

If your stamp's Cycle setting is set to Hold, then you have to use this slider to select which
drawing to stamp with the Stamp tool.
If your stamp's Reset Cycle for Each Stroke option is enabled, then you can use this slider toselect which drawing to start each stroke with.
Otherwise, when you draw a stroke with the Stamp tool, the Stamp slider will automatically
update to the next drawing in the sequence.

387

Chapter 5: Tool Properties

Property

Description

TIP
You can also cycle through the drawings in your stamp by using the Left Arrow andRight Arrow keys.

NOTE
The Cycle and Reset Cycle for Each Strokee options are available in the Stamp
Properties dialog.

Stamp Presets
These options allow you to select, create and manage stamp presets.
Contrary to the Brush and Pencil tools, creating a Stamp preset is required to use the Stamp tool, as this preset
will contain the drawings to stamp onto your artwork. A Stamp preset is created by selecting one or several
layers, then adding a preset to the Stamp Presets list. If several layers are selected, the Stamp will contain aseries of drawings, which it will stamp onto your artwork in a sequence as you draw strokes with the Stamp
tool.
Icon

Property

Description

Presets list

The list of Stamp presets. Click on one of the presets to select it and use itin your drawing.
Creates a new Stamp preset based on the selected artwork. The artwork
can either be a selection made with the Selecttool, or by selecting alayer.
New Brush Preset

If several layers are selected, this will create a multi-drawing Stamp. As
you draw a stroke with the Stamp tool using a multi-drawing stamp, eachdrawing in the stamp will be applied onto your artwork, one after theother.

Delete Brush

Deletes the currently selected preset.

Brush Presets Menu

Open a menu that contains all of the previous options, along with all of
the following options:l

New Brush Preset: Creates a new stamp based on the selectedartwork.

388

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

l

l

l

l

l

Rename Preset:Allows you to rename the currently selected
preset.
Import Brushes:Allows you to import brush presets exported from
Storyboard Pro.
Export Brushes:Allows you to export your brush presets into an.xml file.
Small Thumbnail: Displays presets in a grid of small thumbnails
with a preview of their tip.
Large Thumbnail: Displays presets in a grid of big thumbnails,
with their name and a preview of their tip.

lStroke View: Displays presets in a list, with their name and apreview of a stroke done with each preset.

Drawing Options
These options affect the way your drawing strokes are added to your artwork
Icon

Property

Description
When enabled, your brush strokes will appear behind the existingartwork.

Draw Behind

NOTEYour brush stroke will temporarily appear over your artwork as
you draw it, until you release the mouse cursor or tablet pen. If
you want a live preview of your stroke, activate the Realistic
Preview option by selecting View > Realistic Preview from the
top menu.

Stamp Properties Dialog
The Stamp Properties dialog allows you to set more specific settings for your stamp, such as pressure
sensitivity, spacing, angle, randomness and, for multi-drawing stamps, how to cycle through each drawing inthe stamp. To open the Stamp Properties dialog, click on the arrow button right of the stroke display area.

389

Chapter 5: Tool Properties

Property

Description

The maximum scaling factor to apply to the stamp before stamping it onto the drawing.
Maximum Scale

This setting is a percentage, which is relative to the size of the original drawing that wasused to create the stamp. This means that, at 100%, the drawing will be stamped into yourartwork in its original size.
The minimum scaling factor to apply to the stamp before stamping it onto your drawing.
When using the Stamp tool with a pressure-sensitive pen tablet, the size of the stamps
applied onto your artwork will vary between its Minimum Scale and Maximum Scale
properties, relative to the amount of pressure you apply to the pen.

Minimum Scale

This setting is relative to the Maximum Scale property. This means that if the Maximum Scaleis set to 50% and the Minimum Scale is set to 50%, the actual scaling factor applied to thestamp will vary between 25% and 50%.
This setting is also used with the Random Size setting.

Flip Horizontally /Flip Vertically

The two-ended arrows to the left and over the Stamp thumbnail allow you to flip the stamp
horizontally or vertically.

390

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Property

Description

The Roundness and Angle parameters allow you to change the shape and orientation of thestamp.
ll

Roundness& AngleRoundness: The vertical scaling to apply to the stamp. Reducing this setting
squashes the stamp vertically, allowing you to turn round or square stamps into flatstamps.
Angle: The angle at which to rotate the brush tip, counterclockwise.

NOTE
The squashing is not relative to the angle—if the stamp is rotated, the squashing will
still be done relative to the stamp's original orientation.

Defines the amount of space between each stamp that is applied onto the artwork. The
larger the value, the greater the space between each stamp.

Spacing

The percentage of randomness to apply to the size of the stamp. This makes the size of thestamp randomly vary between its Maximum Scale and Minimum Scale settings each time it isapplied to your artwork.
Random Size

The greater the value of the Random Size property, the closer to its Minimum Scale the size

391

Chapter 5: Tool Properties

Property

Descriptionof each stamp can get. For example, if the Random Size setting is set to 50% and the
Minimum Scale is set to 50%, the size of the stamp will randomly vary between 75% and100% of its Maximum Scale.
The maximum value of randomness to apply to the angle of the stamp. This makes the angleof the stamp randomly vary within the range of degrees in this setting, in either direction,
each time it is applied to your artwork. For example, if the stamp's Angle is set to 0°, and theRandom Angle

Random Spacing

Random Angle is set to 180°, each instance of the stamp will be at a random angle varying
between -90° and 90°.

The maximum amount of randomness to apply to the spacing of the stamp. Increasing thissetting makes the distance between each instance of the stamp vary randomly as you draw a
stroke. At 100%, this makes the distance between each stroke vary between 0% and 200%of its Spacing property.

For multi-drawing stamps, this decides the logic with which to cycle through the sequenceof drawings in the stamp as you draw a stroke.
l

l

Cycle

l

l

Forward: Starts by applying the first drawing in the sequence, then the next one, andso on until it reaches the last drawing in the sequence, then cycles back to the firstone.

Reverse: Starts by applying the last drawing in the sequence, then the previous one,and so on until it reaches the first drawing in the sequence, then cycles back to thelast one.

Forward->Reverse: Starts by cycling forward through the sequence until it reaches
the last drawing, then cycles backward to the first drawing, and so on.

Reverse->Forward: Starts by cycling backward through the sequence until it reaches
the first drawing, then cycles back to the last drawing, and so on.

392

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Property

DescriptionlRandom: Applies a random drawing in the sequence each time the stamp is applied.

lHold: Applies a single one of the drawings in the sequence over and over again.

TIP
When this option is set to Hold, you can select which one of the drawings is stamped
on by changing the Stamp setting in the Tool Properties view.

For multi-drawing stamps. This makes it so each stroke you draw with the stamp too always
starts with the first drawing in the cycle, which is decided by the Stamp option in the Tool
Properties view.
Reset Cycle for
Each Stroke

When disabled, the Stamp tool keeps track of which drawing it was going to stamp next
when you finish drawing a stroke by storing the number of that drawing in the Stampsetting. When this option is enabled, it simply stops updating the Stamp setting. Hence,
your strokes always start at the drawing selected with that setting. Likewise, you canmanually decide which drawing to start your strokes with by adjusting the Stamp setting.

393

Chapter 5: Tool Properties

Text Tool Properties
The Text tool lets you add text fields to your project, in which you can type text, then adjust its formatting using
various fonts and text attributes.
With the Text tool selected, you can select text within text boxes you created and change the formatting of theselection. You can also select and manipulate text boxes using the Select tool, and change the formatting of theentire text box in the Select tool properties.

How to access the Text tool propertiesl

In the Tools toolbar, select the Text

tool.

The tool's properties are displayed in the Tool Properties view.

Icon

Property

Description

Lets you select the font in which to display the text.
Font

Makes the selected text bold.
Bold

Makes the selected text italic.
Italic394

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Icon

Property

Description

Aligns the text in the selected text box to the left.

Align Left

Aligns the text in the selected text box to the centre.

Align Center

Aligns the text in the selected text box to the right.

Align Right

Makes the text in the selected text box take all the horizontal space byadjusting the spacing between each word. Text that use a single line andtext in the last line of a paragraph is aligned to the left.
Justify

Allows you to set the size of the selected text.
Size

395

Chapter 5: Tool Properties

Icon

Property

Description

Allows you to increase or decrease the spacing between each character.

Kerning

Auto Kern

Sets the kerning automatically based on the font’s predefined standard.
Allows you to increase or decrease the indentation of the first line of text
in each paragraph.

IndentIncreases or decreases the space between each line of text.

Line Spacing396

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Zoom Tool Properties
The Zoom tool lets you zoom in and out of the Stage, Camera, Side and Top views. You can also use it to reset
the zoom level.

How to access the Zoom tool properties
1. In the Tools toolbar, select the Zoom

tool.

The tool's properties are displayed in the Tool Properties view.

Tool Options
Icon

Parameter

Description

Zoom In ModeUse the mouse cursor to zoom in to the Camera or Drawing view.

Zoom OutMode

Use the mouse cursor to zoom out of the Camera or Drawing view.

Operations
Icon

Parameter

Description

Perform Zoom
In

Zoom in the Camera or Drawing view.

Perform Zoom
Out

Zoom out the Camera or Drawing view.

Reset Zoom

Restores the current zoom level to 100%.

Reset View

Restores the original display by resetting any pan, rotation or zoom actions.

The keyboard shortcut is 2.

The keyboard shortcut is 1.

397

Chapter 6: Views

Chapter 6: Views
The Storyboard Pro user interface is comprised of different views, each one designed for a specific purpose. You
can modify the location and accessibility of the views by adding a new view as a tab or as a window. You canalso swap the view locations around, as well as do the following:
Here is a complete list of the views available in Storyboard Pro.
3D Graph View

399

Camera View

401

Colour View

406

Function Editor View

407

Guides View

414

Layers View

417

Library View

420

Message Log View

422

Panel View

423

Pitch Mode View

427

Script Editor View

428

Stage View

430

Storyboard View

436

Thumbnails View

438

Timeline View

440

Tool Properties View

446

Top and Side Views

447

398

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

3D Graph View
The 3D Graph view lets you view the sub-objects that make up your 3D model.

How to access the 3D Graph view
1. Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Windows > 3D Graph.

l

From any of the other views, click the Add View

button and select 3D Graph.

SectionDescription

3D Graph menu

Access commands through this menu.

3D model sub-object display area

Displays the parts (sub-objects) of the selected 3D model.

Selected sub-object hierarchy path

Displays the selected sub-object's parent hierarchy chain within the 3Dmodel.

Search bar

Use this field to search for a specific sub-object within the 3D model.

399

Chapter 6: Views

Sub-Object Icon

Type
In the 3D model sub-object display area, sub-objects with geometry
are preceded by this icon. Geometry sub-objects have a transformation.

In the 3D model sub-object display area, sub-objects with atransformation are preceded by this icon.
Sub-Object Text Colour

State

White

The sub-object shape is visible and the sub-object is enabled.

Red

The sub-object and its children are disabled.

Yellow

The sub-object shape is hidden.

Disabled

One of the sub-object parents is disabled.

400

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Camera View
Like the Stage view, the Camera view allows you to see and position elements in your scene. However, contrary
to the Stage view, the Camera view always displays elements from the point of view of the camera lens.
The difference is only visible when working on a 3D scene. If your scene contains 3D models or elements thatare positioned at different depths in the stage, panning, zooming and rotating the Stage view will makeelements appear in different positions relative to each other, whereas the Camera view will always display
elements in the position and proportions they are meant to appear from the camera's point of view, and hence,
the way they're mean to appear in the storyboard. This remains true even if you pan, zoom or rotate theCamera view. Furthermore, while the Stage view can be rotated on all axes, allowing you see your stage inperspective, the Camera view can only be rotated in 2D.
Hence, if you work in 2D, the Camera view is not useful. However, if you work in 3D, it is important to become
familiar with the difference between both views and to use the Stage view when you want to position
elements or the camera relative to each other in the 3D space, and the Camera view when you need to seeelements in your stage as they will appear in the exported storyboard, or to position elements relative to thecamera's point of view.

401Chapter 6: Views

NOTE
A status bar is located at the bottom of the Stage and Camera views, which contain toggle buttons
to hide and display different kind of indicators as well as to adjust the zoom level of the view.

How to access the Camera viewl

In a view area, click the Add View

Tool Name

Grid

Icon

button and select Camera.

Description
Displays a grid in the Stage and Camera views. The default sizeis the standard 12-field animation grid, but you can choose
another.
You can also select View > Grid > Show Grid or press Ctrl + G(Windows) or ⌘ + G (Mac OS X).

Action Safe Area

Displays the Title Safe Area frame inside the camera frame. Bydefault, this area is 20% smaller than the camera frame. It is
used as a guideline of the area that CRT displays might cropout of the picture. Visual elements such as text and logos
should be placed within this area.

402

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

NOTE
The size of this area can be changed in the Camera
tab of the Preferences dialog..

Displays a semi-transparent black mask covering the area
between the camera frame and the Title Safe Area frame.
Action Safe Area

NOTE

Mask

You can select the Action Safe Area Mask option byclicking and holding the Action Safe Area

buttonand selecting it from the pop-up menu.

Title Safe Area

Displays the Action Safe Area frame inside the camera frame.
By default, this area is 10% smaller than the camera frame. It is
used as a guideline of the area that CRT displays might cropout of the picture. Characters and action should be placed
within this area.

NOTE
The size of this area can be changed in the Camera
tab of the Preferences dialog..

Displays a semi-transparent black mask covering the area
between the camera frame and the Action Safe Area.
Title Safe Area
Mask

NOTE
You can select the Title Safe Area Mask option byclicking and holding the Title Safe Area

buttonand selecting it from the pop-up menu.

4:3 Safety

Shows or hides the TV safety zone and the centre of thecamera frame for a regular 4:3 resolution. If you are working on
a widescreen project, for example, you can easily plan inadvance the conversion of your project to a TV format. Thisway, you can create your project to fit both resolutions.
You can also select View > Extras > Show 4:3 Safe Area.

4:3 AreaShows or hides the 4:3 resolution zone without the centre of403

Chapter 6: Views

the camera frame and TV safety zone.
You can also select View > Extras > Show 4:3 Area.
Shows or hides a black mask around the scene’s frame to
avoid seeing anything outside the Camera frame. This is handy
when you are setting up the scene as it allows you to see thescene’s composition better.

Camera Mask

You can also select View > Extras > Camera Mask.
Displays the timecode of the current frame in the top-leftcorner of the view.
Timecode

The timecode is displayed in the HH:MM:SS:FF format, where
HH means hours, MM means minutes, SS means seconds and FF
means frames.
Resets any panning, zooming or rotation done in the Stageview and returns the display to its initial settings.
You can also select View > Reset View or press Shift + M.

Reset View

NOTE
This option works with the Camera View on page

401.

Resets any rotation done in the Stage or Camera view andreturns the display to its initial rotation settings.

Reset Rotation

You can also select View > Reset Rotation or press Shift + X.

Zoom Factor-

Lets you enlarge or reduce the Stage or Camera view display. If
you want the camera frame size to always match the size ofyour Stage view, select the Fit to View option.

Layer Name-

Displays the name of the selected layer of the current panel.

-

Displays the name of the selected tool. If you override a tool
using an overriding keyboard shortcut, the tool’s name turns
red.

Tool Name

Colour Picker

Displays the currently selected colour in the Colour View . You
can click the colour swatch to open the Colour view and select404

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guidea new colour.
The Layer panel is where a scene’s layers are superposed toform the final image.

Layer Panel-

When you import an image or draw in a panel, you are actuallyadding artwork to one of its layers. By default, each panel has
two layers; a background layer (BG) and a foreground layer (A).
As you add layers, they are automatically assigned subsequent
letters in alphabetical order, but you can rename them. They arealso placed on top of the selected layer or at the very top ofother layers if there is no layer selected in the panel.

Add Vector Layer

Adds a vector layer to the Layers list.

Add Bitmap Layer

Adds a bitmap layer to the Layers list.

Duplicate Selected Layers

Duplicates selected layers so you can quickly copy and paste
in one operation. Unlike copying a layer, you cannot paste
multiple copies of a layer on other panels. Duplicating layers isonly available within one panel. Duplicated layers retain theirnames and are appended with a number.

Group Selected Layers

Groups selected layers. The grouped layer is named Group andappended with an underscore and a number. For example,
Group_1. Each time you creat a group, the number isincremented.

Delete Selected Layers

Deletes the selected layers.

405

Chapter 6: Views

Colour View
The Colour view is where you create colours; it is also necessary for drawing and painting.

How to access the Colour view‣

In the Panel view, click the Add View

Icon
Current colour

button and select Colour.

Tool Name

Description--

Displays the currently selected colour swatch.

Display Mode menu

Lets you change the display mode to HSV or RGB.

Delete Colour

The Delete Colour button lets you delete a selectedcolour swatch from the Colour view.

Add Colour

Lets you create a new colour swatch from the current
colour. The new colour swatch is added at the end of
the colour swatches.

Colour view menu

Lets you create new colours and textures, delete
colours, switch the display mode from swatch to list,
import and export colours and save palettes.

Colour swatches

Displays the currently available colours. When you
create new colour swatches, they are added to the endof the list.

--

406

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Function Editor View
T-SBANIM-003-008
The Function Editor view lets you edit function curves and parameters. It contains a visual graph for adding,removing, and editing keyframes, as well as adjusting the velocity. The Function Editor view allows you todisplay multiple functions in the background as a reference.
A motion path is easy to manipulate. One important concept to understand is that a trajectory contains both
keyframes and control points. Both can be used to shape a path; each have their own behaviour, however only
keyframes appear in the Timeline view.
lKeyframes have a transformation value and a position in space at a given frame. Keyframes are locked in
time.

l

Control points have a position but no fixed frame or timing. It is mainly used to deform a trajectory.
There are no velocity handles available on a control point. The velocity segments are set between
keyframes only, making curves and trajectories much smoother. Control points can only be added on a
3D path.
NOTE
The Function Editor can be used with animated layers, groups and 3D objects, but does not workwith animated video clips.

407

Chapter 6: Views

There are two methods of working in the Function Editor — Ease type function and Bezier type function. The
use of these functions is a personal preference. When working with the Ease function, the ease in and ease out
values can be set in frame counts; Bezier does not have this capability.

408

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

How to access the Function Editor view
1. Do one of the following:‣

In a view area, click the Add View‣

Select Windows > Function Editor.

button and select Function Editor .

The Function Editor displays and is blank.
2. From the Stage or Camera view, select a layer that contains functions.

Parameter

Description

Function List

When selecting a layer, all the corresponding functions are displayed. Select all
the functions you want to see and edit; hide the ones you do not want to see nor
edit.
To display a function, select its check-box. To hide a function, deselect its checkbox.
You can change the color of the function by double-clicking the color box, andchoosing another color from the dialog box that displays.

Displays the current scene frame.

Displays the value of the selected keyframe.

409

Chapter 6: Views

Display Toolbar

Show Current
Frame

Allows you to modify how the editing area is displayed. You can hide the grid,disable the synchronization with the current frame, reset the zoom level andnormalize the function display by stacking them one over the other to comparethem regardless of their value range.

Displays the frame currently selected.

Toggle Grid

Diplays/hides the grid.

Reset View

Optimizes the horizontal and vertical view of your keyframes, for better viewing.

Reset View
Vertically

Optimizes the vertical view of your keyframes for better viewing.

Clicking the arrow gives access to various parameters enabling you to modify thelayer animation by adjusting the curve around the selected keyframe.

Right Angle

Available when paths other than velocity are selected. In Ease function, this is theangle value of the line on the right side of the selected keyframe. In Bezierfunction, this is the angle value of the handle on the right side of the selected
keyframe.

Left Angle

Available when paths other than velocity are selected. In Ease function, this is theangle value of the line on the left side of the selected keyframe. In Bezier function,
this is the angle value of the handle on the left side of the selected keyframe.

Right Ease Out

Applicable in Ease function.The velocity of the right ease out. The number offrames that will be included during the ease-out.

Left Ease Out

Applicable in Ease function. The velocity of the left ease out. The number offrames that will be included during the ease-out.

Right Length

Available when paths other than velocity are selected. The length value of the
Bezier handle on the right side of the selected keyframe.

Left Length

Available when paths other than velocity are selected. The length value of the
Bezier handle on the left side of the selected keyframe.

TensionAvailable when a velocity path is selected. Controls how sharply the path bends

410

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

as it passes through a control point or keyframe. The higher the value, the more
drastic the curve. The lower the value, the more gradual the curve.

Available when a velocity path is selected. Controls the smoothness of atransition between the segments joined by a point.

Continuity

Available when a velocity path is selected. Controls the slope of the path so it
flows towards one side of the motion point or the other.

Bias

Keyframe, Velocity andInterpolation Options

Add KeyframeThis toolbar lets you add and delete keyframes, adjust the velocity curve, adjust
the segments to motion or stop-motion keyframes and set the velocity to create
steps instead of a constant progression.

Adds a keyframe at the current frame.

411

Chapter 6: Views

Remove Keyframe

Deletes selected keyframes.

Hold Value Editor

Creates a stepped curve to hold the same value over a selected number of frames.
This works well when you are animating drawings on 2s, for example, and you
want to hold the same value for a function over those two frames.

Reshape to Stop
Motion Keyframe

Lock in Time

Apply Velocity

Converts a motion keyframe into a stop-motion keyframe.

Converts a keyframe into a control point, or a control point into a keyframe. Morespecifically, indicates whether the point is locked to a specific frame (keyframe) or
only locked to a specific position and the curve can flow through it freely as otherpoints are being added, moved, or adjusted (control point).
Gives access to the Velocity Editor dialog box. You can apply velocity on the x, y,or z axes, independently.

EditorDefines the ease-in ease-out type for your animation. Click the down arrow toaccess velocity pre-set choices.

Gives access to various Bezier handle manipulation options. Click the downarrow to choose a pre-defined option.
Enables you to enter a value for the tension on velocity movement. The higher thevalue, the more tension on the velocity curve.

Stop-Motion
Keyframe

Function List Filters

Converts a motion keyframe into a stop-motion keyframe. The same value isapplied to all frames until the next keyframe. Motion changes to the next
keyframe's position, when the next keyframe is reached.
Enables you to quickly select or deselect all functions within a category.

Show Motion

Displays the functions related to motion.

Show Rotation

Displays the functions related to rotation.

412

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference GuideShow Scale

Displays the functions related to scale.

Show Other

Displays other parameters not included in the Show Motion, Show Rotation andShow Scale filters.
Lets you display the Camera functions, add other editable functions and convert
to Bezier.

OperationsShow Camera
Functions

Add Editable
Functions

Convert to Bezier
Functions

Displays the functions related to the camera.

Enables you to view the functions of a layer that has no keyframes.

Enables you to switch from Ease function to Bezier function. Bezier curves
enables you adjust the ease in and ease out of each keyframe. The more thehandle is pulled out horizontally, the slower the animation will be. The more thehandle is pulled out vertically, the faster the animation will be.

Value Scale

Displays the value range for the displayed editing area. It can be referenced toknow the value of a keyframe.

Selected Keyframe

The selected keyframe is displayed in red. When selected, the keyframe values are
displayed in the corresponding fields.

Function Curve

The thin line going from keyframe to keyframe is the actual curve. The section of acurve located between two keyframes is called a segment.

Frame Scale

The Frame Scale displays the frame range for the displayed editing area. It can bereferenced to know the current frame of a keyframe.

413

Chapter 6: Views

Guides View
The Guides view enables you to manage drawing guides for a given storyboard panel. Use Drawing Guides toassist you in creating a drawing with perspective.
Guides can be added, selected, renamed, deleted, cut, copied, pasted and reordered. Guides can also beexported to a file and re-imported later.

Icon

Name

Description

Enable Guide

Enables or disables drawing guides.

Options

When enabled:l

Align with Guide

The Brush, Pencil, Line and (optionally) Eraser tools are constrained by
the Drawing Guide to draw/erase straight lines only.

When disabled:l

The drawing tools are not constrained by the Drawing Guide, allowing
you to do freehand strokes. The guide acts as a visual aid only.

Lock Guide

Locks the editing of a Drawing Guide to prevent its accidental modification while
drawing.

Enable Guide
with Eraser

Toggles the use of Drawing Guides with the Eraser tool.

414

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Icon

Name

Description

When enabled:lFull Cursor
DisplayShow ReferenceLines

Drawing Guide axes extend to the edge of the drawing area.

When disabled:lDrawing Guide axes are short.

lDrawing Guide axes disappear while drawing a stroke.

Toggles the display of a visual reference consisting of lines that converge
towards the vanishing point(s).
Adjusts the amount of reference lines to display.

Number of Lines

Guides List
Allows you to add a guide to the panel's guides list. You can add a guide of oneof the following types:

New Guidel

Square gridl1-point perspectivel2-point perspective

l3-point perspective (bird’s eye view)l3-point perspective (worm’s eye view)

Delete Guide

Deletes the selected Drawing Guide(s) from the panel's guides list.

Guides View
Menu

Opens a menu with the following commands:

RenameGuide

Renames the selected Drawing Guide.

Cut

Cuts the selected Drawing Guide(s) from the list and adds it to the clipboard.

Copy

Copies the selected Drawing Guide(s) to the clipboard.

415

Chapter 6: Views

Icon

Name

Description

Paste

Pastes Drawing Guide(s) from the clipboard to the panel's guides list. Pasted
guides are inserted under the selected guide.

ImportGuidesImports Drawing Guides from a source file and inserts them at the bottom of thepanel's guides list. Duplicate guides are filtered out to avoid cluttering the list.

ExportSelected
GuidesExports the selected Drawing Guide(s) to a destination file.

Displays the panel's list of guides and allows you to select which guide todisplay and use.
Drawing Guides
List

416

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Layers View
The Layers view is where a scene’s layers are superimposed to form the final image.
When you import an image or draw in a panel, you are actually adding artwork to one of its layers. By default,
each panel has two layers; a background layer (BG) and a foreground layer (A). As you add layers, they areautomatically assigned subsequent letters in alphabetical order, but you can rename them. They are also placed
on top of the selected layer or at the very top of other layers if there is no layer selected in the panel.

How to access the Layers view‣

Icon

In the Panel view, click the Add View

Tool Namebutton and select Layers.

Description

Selected Layer

OpacityLayer Alignment

Allows you to adjust the opacity of the layer, to make it opaque or semitransparent.
Allows you to select how the layer is aligned with the camera:l

No Alignment: The layer is independent of the camera.

417

Chapter 6: Views

Icon

Tool Name

Description

NOTE
If you change the alignment of a layer from Pin
to Camera to No Alignment, its animation will bediscarded and it will be in the position it is at thecurrent frame throughout the panel.

lFace Camera: The layer is oriented to face the camera, so it
rotates around its pivot point to always face the camera, butdoes not move with the camera.

NOTES
l

l

l

If you change the alignment of a layer from No
Alignment to Face Camera, its offset and scaletransformations and animations will bepreserved, but not its rotation angle
transformations and animations.
If you change the alignment of a layer from Pin
to Camera to Face Camera, its animation will bediscarded and it will be in the position it is at
the current frame throughout the panel.

Pin to Camera: The layer is oriented to the camera's
perspective. Essentially the layer always moves with the camera.

NOTE
When changing the alignment of a layer to Pin
to Camera, all its transformations and animation are
discarded.

.
The following options allow you to control whether the selected layer
appear in one of the three main export mediums for Storyboard Pro
projects:l

Export Tol

PDF: If enabled, the selected layer will show up in the exported
document when you export your storyboard in Photoshop
Document (.pdf) format.
Movie: If enabled, the selected layer will appear in the exported
image when you export your animatic as a movie or as an image
sequence.

418

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Icon

Tool Name

DescriptionlHarmony: If enabled, the selected layer will appear in theexported scenes when you export your animatic as Harmony
scenes.

LayersThe list of layers in the current panel.

Add Vector Layer

Adds a vector layer to the Layers list.

Add Bitmap Layer

Adds a bitmap layer to the Layers list.

Duplicate Selected Layers

Duplicates selected layers so you can quickly copy and paste in one
operation. Unlike copying a layer, you cannot paste multiple copies of alayer on other panels. Duplicating layers is only available within one
panel. Duplicated layers retain their names and are appended with anumber.

Group Selected Layers

Groups selected layers. The grouped layer is named Group andappended with an underscore and a number. For example, Group_1.
Each time you creat a group, the number is incremented.

Delete Selected Layers

Deletes the selected layers.

419

Chapter 6: Views

Library View
The Library view is used to create and manage templates, as well as the folders containing them.

The Preview window of the Library view lets you preview the contents of the selected template. Audio files
cannot be previewed in the Preview window of the Library view.

The Library List is used to navigate through the different libraries and subfolders. You can also open, close andcreate new libraries from here.

The Library view has two default Library folders:420Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guidel

Global: This is an empty folder you can use to organize your templates. This library is automaticallyshared between different projects. You can organize this library folder using subfolders. When you saveitems in the Global library, it is saved by default to a location in your Documents folder on your machine.

lTemplates: This folder contains default templates provided with Storyboard Pro and is stored on yourhard drive. The content of this Library is automatically shared between the different projects.
NOTE
To verify the path where files are being stored, hover your cursor over the folder to display the path

The templates contained in the selected Library list can be displayed on the right side of the Library view asthumbnails, in a list or as details.
In the Library view’s right side, right-click and select View > List, Thumbnails or Details.

How to access the Library view‣

In the Panel view, click the Add View

button and select Library.

421

Chapter 6: Views

Message Log View
The Message log view displays information gathered during a render task, such as which frames and at whattime they were each rendered. The view also contains a list of the colour recovery operations.

How to access the Message Log viewlSelect Windows > Message Log.

422

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Panel View
The Panel view displays the basic information about the currently selected panel. It also allows to view and edit
captions in the current panel, as well as to add sketches or voice annotations to the panel.

How to access the Panel view
‣

Icon

--

In the panel view area, click the Add View

button and select Panel.

Tool Name

Description

Panel Information

This section of the Panel view is where information,such as the duration of the current panel, name of thecurrent panel and name of the scene in which it is partof is displayed. It is possible to edit some of the field.
This collapsible section of the Panel view is where theinformation, such as the number of selected panels,
the in and out of the current selection, as well as theduration of the selected panels. These fields are forreference only; they cannot be edited.

Selection Information

Click the Collapse

button to hide the section andleave more room for the Script caption field. Once it is423

Chapter 6: Views

collapsed, you can click the Expand
display the entire section again.

button to

Voice Annotations

It is possible to add voice annotations to a panel. This
collapsible section is used to control and edit theseannotations.

Text Formatting

Displays the Text Formatting toolbar for formatting
the text in the Script caption area.
When there are two or more panels present, resizes
the panel in three different sizes: opens panel fully,
opens mid-sized panel or collapses the panel.

ResizeSeeLets you access commands for adding, importing,deleting and renaming captions. You can also importscripts created in Final Draft.

Caption Menu

There are several fields which are collectively known
as panel captions. Captions are a method by which
you can organize information in your project, and tie
that information to a panel. The types of captions foryour project are fully customizable. By default, a new
project will have the following type of captions:
l

l

l

--

Panel CaptionslDialogue: The lines of dialogue spoken by thecharacters in the current panel.
Action Notes: The actions performed by thecharacters in the current panel.
Slugging: Notes regarding the timing of
dialogues and actions in the current panel.
These can be added while creating thestoryboard to give instructions on how tocreate the animatic.
Notes: Any relevent information about thecurrent panel or the current scene, such as thescene heading, the characters and props,
ambient sounds, background and foregroundactions, continuity notes or, if working on alive action project, the cast, crew, props ormaterial required to complete the shot.

The caption fields are named by default, you can easily424

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guidechange the name of these fields by clicking theCaption Menu

button and selecting the Rename

Caption option. Once you have changed the names of
the captions and you are certain that you want to keepthese names throughout the project, you can set the
new names as default by selecting Caption > Save
Captions Layout as Default from the top menu.

How to display the Text Formatting toolbar
1. Click the Text Formatting

button.

The Text Formatting toolbar displays.

2. Format the text in the panel.

How to resize a panel
1. When there are two or more panels present, do one of the following:lClick on the Collapse / Expand

button.

The panel toggles between fully expanded, expanded and collapsed.

l

Hover over a bar between two panels. When the bar turns cyan and the resize cursor
appears, click and drag to resize the panel.

425

Chapter 6: Views

426

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Pitch Mode View
The Pitch Mode view is optimized for pitching your storyboard. When using the Pitch Mode view, the tools andfunctions that cannot be used are dimmed. You will no longer have access to your drawing layers. To return tothe normal mode, you must close the Pitch Mode view.
There is also a Pitch Mode workspace which is similar the Pitch Mode view. This workspace occupies the entire
screen and provides access only to a certain number of tools—see Pitch Mode Workspace on page 451.

How to access the Pitch Mode view
1. Do one of the following:lSelect Windows > Pitch Mode View.

l

In the Panel view, click the Add View

button and select Pitch Mode View.

427

Chapter 6: Views

Script Editor View
The Script Editor view supports Qt Script.
The Scripting view allows you to edit scripts to run in Storyboard Pro directly from the application. It displays alist of available scripts, from which you can select an existing script, edit it, test it and save it. The Script Editor
will highlight the syntax of your script for easy reading.

How to access the Script Editor view
Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Windows > Script Editor.

l

From any of the other views, click the Add View

button and select Script Editor.

Parameter

Description

ScriptEditormenu

The menu for this view—see Script Editor View Menu on page 248.

ScriptEditor

The toolbar for this view—see Script Editor Toolbar on page 268.

428

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

toolbar
The list of script files available. Selecting a script in this list will open it in the editor.

Script list

NOTE
The << Sandbox >> item at the top of the list does not correspond to an actual script file. It isa temporary container to type and test code, and its content cannot be saved.

Editor

SearchtoolbarA text field in which you can edit the selected script.

Allows you to type in a keyword and search for this keyword within the script. You can use the
Next button to go to the next instance of the keyword and thePrevious button to go to theprevious instance.

CancelIf you have made any changes to your script that you have not yet saved, this discards thosechanges and reloads the saved version.

VerifyVerifies that the script has no syntax error.

Save

Saves the modifications you made to the script.

429

Chapter 6: Views

Stage View
The Stage view can be used to position elements as well as the camera within the stage for each of your scene.
When working on 2D scenes, the Stage view has the same functionality as the Camera view. However, if you
are working on a 3D scene, the Stage view allows you to view the stage from any point of view in the 3D space,
whereas the Camera view always displays the stage from the point of view of the Camera lens. For more
information, see Camera View.

NOTE
A status bar is located at the bottom of the Stage and Camera views, which contain toggle buttons
to hide and display different kind of indicators as well as to adjust the zoom level of the view.

TIP
You can hide the status bar in the Stage view by opening the Preferences dialog, selecting the
Camera tab and disabling the Show Status Bar option.

430

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

How to access the Stage viewl

In a view area, click the Add View

Tool Name

Thumbnail

Grid

Icon

button and select Stage.

Description

Displays the thumbnail of a selected panel.

Displays a grid in the Stage and Camera views. The default size is the standard
12-field animation grid, but you can choose another.
You can also select View > Grid > Show Grid or press Ctrl + G (Windows) or⌘ + G (Mac OS X).
Displays the Title Safe Area frame inside the camera frame. By default, this area
is 20% smaller than the camera frame. It is used as a guideline of the area thatCRT displays might crop out of the picture. Visual elements such as text andlogos should be placed within this area.

Action Safe Area

NOTE
The size of this area can be changed in the Camera tab of thePreferences dialog..

431

Chapter 6: Views

Tool Name

Icon

Description

Displays a semi-transparent black mask covering the area between the camera
frame and the Title Safe Area frame.
Action Safe
Area Mask

NOTE
You can select the Action Safe Area Mask option by clicking andholding the Action Safe Area

button and selecting it from the pop-

up menu.

Displays the Action Safe Area frame inside the camera frame. By default, thisarea is 10% smaller than the camera frame. It is used as a guideline of the areathat CRT displays might crop out of the picture. Characters and action shouldbe placed within this area.
Title Safe Area

NOTE
The size of this area can be changed in the Camera tab of thePreferences dialog..

Displays a semi-transparent black mask covering the area between the camera
frame and the Action Safe Area.

Title Safe
Area Mask

Displays a semi-transparent black mask covering the area between the camera
frame and the Action Safe Area.

NOTE
You can select the Title Safe Area Mask option by clicking and holding
the Title Safe Area

4:3 Safety

button and selecting it from the pop-up menu.

Shows or hides the TV safety zone and the centre of the camera frame for aregular 4:3 resolution. If you are working on a widescreen project, for example,
you can easily plan in advance the conversion of your project to a TV format.
This way, you can create your project to fit both resolutions.
You can also select View > Extras > Show 4:3 Safe Area.

4:3 AreaShows or hides the 4:3 resolution zone without the centre of the camera frame
and TV safety zone.
You can also select View > Extras > Show 4:3 Area.

432

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Tool Name

Camera Mask

Icon

Description

Shows or hides a black mask around the scene’s frame to avoid seeing
anything outside the Camera frame. This is handy when you are setting up thescene as it allows you to see the scene’s composition better.
You can also select View > Extras > Camera Mask.
Displays the timecode of the current frame in the top-left corner of the view.

Timecode

Camera LabelThe timecode is displayed in the HH:MM:SS:FF format, where HH means hours,
MM means minutes, SS means seconds and FF means frames.
Shows or hides the IN and OUT indications in the top-left corner of the camera
frames, on the start and end position of a camera move for the current panel.
When the Camera tool is selected, the labels switch to alphabetical labels thatclearly show the different camera keyframes.
Displays all the related camera keyframes and paths in a scene. When thisbutton is deactivated, the Stage view displays only keyframes that arecontained in a panel.

Complete Camera
Path

You can also access this feature by selecting View > Show Complete Camera
Path.

NOTE
This option is not available in Camera by Panel Compatability mode.

Resets any panning, zooming or rotation done in the Stage view and returns
the display to its initial settings.
You can also select View > Reset View or press Shift + M.
Reset View

NOTE
This option works with the Stage View on page 430.

Reset Rotation

Resets any rotation done in the Stage or Camera view and returns the display
to its initial rotation settings.
You can also select View > Reset Rotation or press Shift + X.

Look At Selected(3D Only)

When rotating 2D layers in 3D space, you may find that the Stage view is nolonger perpendicular to a drawing layer, making it impossible to draw on it.

433

Chapter 6: Views

Tool Name

Icon

Description

This option makes the Stage view perpendicular to a selected drawing layer,allowing you to draw on it.

NOTEThis option is used when working in 3D space.

Point of View-

The Point of View menu lets you determine the level at which the current
position of the Stage view (zoom, pan and rotation) is remembered when you
flip through the panels. The current Point of View mode will also affect thedifferent Reset View commands’ behaviour as they will reset according to the
Point of View mode.—see Point of View Menu on page 247.

Zoom Factor-

Lets you enlarge or reduce the Stage or Camera view display. If you want thecamera frame size to always match the size of your Stage view, select the Fit toView option.

Layer Name-

Displays the name of the selected layer of the current panel.

Tool Name-

Displays the name of the selected tool. If you override a tool using anoverriding keyboard shortcut, the tool’s name turns red.
Displays the currently selected colour in the Colour View . You can click thecolour swatch to open the Colour view and select a new colour.

Colour Picker

The Layer panel is where a scene’s layers are superposed to form the final
image.

Layer Panel-

When you import an image or draw in a panel, you are actually adding artwork
to one of its layers. By default, each panel has two layers; a background layer(BG) and a foreground layer (A). As you add layers, they are automaticallyassigned subsequent letters in alphabetical order, but you can rename them.
They are also placed on top of the selected layer or at the very top of otherlayers if there is no layer selected in the panel.

Add Vector Layer

Adds a vector layer to the Layers list.

Add Bitmap Layer

Adds a bitmap layer to the Layers list.

434

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Tool Name

Duplicate Selected
LayersGroup Selected
LayersDelete Selected
Layers

Icon

Description

Duplicates selected layers so you can quickly copy and paste in one operation.
Unlike copying a layer, you cannot paste multiple copies of a layer on otherpanels. Duplicating layers is only available within one panel. Duplicated layers
retain their names and are appended with a number.
Groups selected layers. The grouped layer is named Group and appended withan underscore and a number. For example, Group_1. Each time you creat agroup, the number is incremented.

Deletes the selected layers.

435

Chapter 6: Views

Storyboard View
The Storyboard view displays basic information about your project. It also allows you to write, import, view andedit the script for your storyboard.

How to access the Storyboard view
1. Do one of the following:‣

In a view area, click the Add View‣

Select Windows > Storyboard.

button and select Storyboard.

Icon

Tool Name

Description--

Project Information

A collapsible section that displays the following
information: duration, number of acts, sequences,
scenes, panels, and transitions.

Text Formatting

Displays the Text Formatting toolbar for formatting
the text in the Script caption area.

ResizeWhen there are two or more panels present, resizes
the panel in three different sizes: opens panel fully,

436

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

opens mid-sized panel or collapses the panel.
Lets you access commands for adding, importing,deleting and renaming captions. You can also importscripts created in Final Draft.

Caption Menu--

Like panel captions, storyboard captions are fully
customizable. The difference is that the information
you store here is relevant for the entire storyboard,

Script Caption

rather than for a specific panel. This default caption
field is specifically there for your script.

437

Chapter 6: Views

Thumbnails View

The Thumbnails View displays all the panels of your project in chronological order. You can use this view tonavigate through your storyboard, rearrange panels and scenes, and select the panel to display in the Stageview.
By default, it is not possible to draw in the Thumbnails view and there are no browsing buttons. But you canchange these settings in the Preferences dialog box.

How to access the Thumbnails view
1. Do one of the following:‣

In a view area, click the Add View‣

Select Windows > Thumbnails.

button and select Thumbnails View.

How to enable drawing in the Thumbnails view
1. Do one of the following:‣

Select Edit File > Preferences (Windows) or Storyboard Pro > Preferences (macOS).

‣

Press Ctrl + U (Windows) or ⌘ + , (Mac OS X).

2. In the Preferences dialog box, select the General tab.
3. In the General section, deselect the Forbid drawing on panel thumbnails option.

How to display the next and previous thumbnails
1. In the Preferences dialog box, select the Global UI tab.

438

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

2. In the Thumbnails View section, select the Display Next and Previous Buttons option.
Two buttons appear on the Thumbnails view to let you display the next and previous thumbnails.

How to keep the current panel centered
1. In the Preferences dialog box, select the Global UI tab.
2. In the Thumbnail View section, select the Keep Current Panel Centred option.

439

Chapter 6: Views

Timeline View
In Storyboard Pro, you can create an animatic from your storyboard by using the Timeline view. The Timelineview is very much like the timeline in a video editing software. Among other things, it allows you to visually
adjust the timing of each panel, to import, cue and clip sound and video clips, to animate camera movements, toanimate layers and to add transitions between scenes. Hence, it will accompany you in each step towards
making your animatic.

Functionality

Description

Current
timecode

The timecode of at which the timeline cursor is. You can click and drag the timecode to movethe timeline cursor.

Length ofproject

The total length of the animatic.

Video track

Video tracks can be added below or above the Storyboard track to show images or videos inoverlay or underlay.

Cameraanimation track

For scenes where the camera is animated, this allows you to see and manipulate the keyframesof the camera movements. A dark grey bar displays between camera keyframes to indicate thatthe camera moves.

440

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Functionality

Description

Icon

Functionality

Description

Previous Keyframe

Moves the timeline cursor to the previous keyframeon the track

Add / Remove Keyframe

If no keyframe is at the current frame, this adds a
keyframe. If a keyframe is at the current frame, thisdeletes the keyframe.

Next Keyframe

Moves the timeline cursor to the next keyframe on the
track.

The track containing the panels and scenes of your storyboard.
Storyboard track

Contrary to the Thumbnails view, the width of each panel and scene is relative to their length
in the animatic.

Current
sequence

The number of the sequence in which the timeline cursor is.

Current scene

The number of the scene in which the timeline cursor is.

Current panel

The number of the panel in which the timeline cursor is.
If the currently selected layer is animated, this allows you to see and manipulate the keyframesof the layer. A dark grey bar displays between layer keyframes to indicate that the layer moves.
Icon

Layer animation
track

Functionality

Description

Previous Keyframe

Moves the timeline cursor to the previous keyframeon the track

Add / Remove Keyframe

If no keyframe is at the current frame, this adds a
keyframe. If a keyframe is at the current frame, thisdeletes the keyframe.

Next Keyframe

Moves the timeline cursor to the next keyframe on the
track.

441

Chapter 6: Views

Functionality

Description

NOTE
The name of the currently selected layer is displayed in the layer animation track, justright of L:.

Audio tracks

Where you can put sound clips to play sound along with your animatic. Your project can haveseveral audio tracks.

Sound
Scrubbing

When enabled, the part of the soundtrack that is at the current frame will play every time you
move the timeline cursor, allowing you to navigate the timeline of your animatic by sound. This
makes it easier to synchronize the action and the audio in your animatic.

Snapping

Enable this option to make sound clips align with the beginning and end of panels in the
animatic when you move or resize them.

Overwrite
Sound Clips

Enable this option to be able to move a video or sound clip over another video or soundclip. The part of the target clip that meshes with the clip being moved will be cut out.
Opens a menu containing the following options:
OptionDescription

Show Camera Track

Show or hide the Camera movement track above theStoryboard track.

Show Layer Track

Show or hide the Layer animation track beneath the Storyboard
track.

Show Waveform

Displays a waveform inside the audio clip, allowing you to see
where the audio peaks so you can sync the action with it.

Show Volume

Displays a volume envelope throughout the sound clip. By
default, this envelope is a straight line in the middle of the clip,
indicating that the volume of the clip is neutral all throughout.
You can add keyframes to the envelope, and move them up or
down to modulate the volume of the sound clip as it plays.

Show Sound Clip Names

Displays the name of the audio file inside each sound clip.

Timeline menu

442

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Functionality

Description

OptionDescription

Overwrite Clips

Enable this option to be able to move a video or sound clip overanother video or sound clip. The part of the target clip thatmeshes with the clip being moved will be cut out.

Change Frame
When Clicking on Tracks

Enable this to automatically move the timeline cursor to theposition of the mouse cursor when you click on a video or audio
track. By default, the timeline cursor only moves when you clickon the timeline ruler or on the camera, storyboard or layer track.

Snapping

Enable this option to make sound clips align with the beginningand end of panels in the animatic when you move or resizethem.

If acts are enabled, these markers indicate when a new act starts as well as the number of thisact.
New act

NOTE
Acts are disabled by default, and can be enabled in the General tab of the Preferences
dialog.

Video clip

A video clip can contain a still image or a video. Each video clip is defined by a teal rectangle ina video track. You can change the duration of still images and clip videos by clicking anddragging the left or right edge of video clips. You can also click and drag video clips to movethem backward or forward in time, or to move them from one video track to another.
This indicates transitions between two scenes. The transition will have a specific appearance
depending on the type of transition used:
Preview

Transition TypeTransition
Dissolve443

Chapter 6: Views

Functionality

Description

Preview

Transition Type

Edge Wipe

Clock Wipe

Slide

Allows you to select a point in your timeline to work on your animatic.
Timeline cursor

Dragging the timeline cursor displays the animatic at the precise point in time where the cursor
is in the Stage and Camera views, allowing you to scrub through your animatic. It will also
automatically set the current panel to the panel the cursor is over, allowing you to edit thatpanel.

Scene

Scenes are defined by rounded rectangles with their upper and lower edges visible above andbelow their panels.

Cameramovement

Each keyframe in the Camera animation track defines a position for the camera. If two or morecamera keyframes are in the same scene, the camera will be animated from each keyframe to
the next keyframe, creating a camera movement.

New sequence

If your project contains sequence, each sequence is defined in the Timeline view by a purple
bar above the scenes the sequence contains. A new sequence is indicated by a break in the
purple bar.

Reset zoom

Sets the zoom level of the Timeline view to its default value.

Timeline zoom
sliderAllows you to change the zoom level of the Timeline view. The Timeline view only zooms
horizontally, meaning zooming in will make panels, animations and sound clips span overmore horizontal space, but they will take the same amount of vertical space.

444

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Functionality

Description

Layer animation

Each keyframe in the Layer animation track defines a position for the currently selected layer. If
two or more layer keyframes are in the same panel, the layer will be animated from each
keyframe to the next keyframe, creating a layer animation.

Panel

Each panel displays a thumbnail and is separated by a black vertical bar in the storyboard track.
You can change the length of each panel by clicking and dragging its right edge.
Each sound clip is defined by a teal rectangle in an audio track. You can clip sound clips byclicking and dragging their left or right edge. You can also click and drag sound clips to movethem backward or forward in time, or to move them from one audio track to another.

TIP
Sound clip

You can enable the Show Waveform option to get a visual idea of the content ofsound clips, which can help you synchronize the action with the audio. You can alsoenable the Show Volume option to display a volume envelope on each sound clip, towhich you can add keyframes and modulate the volume of sound clips as they play.
These options are available in the Sound top menu, in the right-click menu of audio
tracks and in the Timeline menu

at the bottom left of the Timeline view.

How to access the Timeline view
1. Do one of the following:l

In the top-right corner of a view, click on the Add Viewl

Select Windows > Timeline.

445

button and select Timeline.

Chapter 6: Views

Tool Properties View
The Tool Properties view contains the options and operations available for the currently selected tool. Whenyou select a tool in the Tools toolbar, the Tool Properties view updates to display its available options.

For information on specific tools, see Tool Properties on page 284.

How to access the Tool Properties view
1. Do one of the following:‣

In a view area, click the Add View‣

Select Windows > Tool Properties.

button and select Tool Properties View.

446

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Top and Side Views
When working in 3D, you can use the Stage view to look at your stage from any point of view and any angle,
allowing you to see how objects are positioned in space, and you can use the Camera view to look at your stage
from the point of view of the camera. However, you may often need to have precise control over how objects
and layers are positioned on the z-axis.
The Top and Side views allow you to view the stage from its top and from its side, respectively. Because theseviews do not apply perspective to the stage, they can be used to position elements with more precision. Using
the Side view, you can view and position layers and objects on the front-back (z) axis , as well as on the northsouth (y) axis. Using the Top view, you can view and position layers and objects on the front-back (z) as well as
the east-west (x) axis. Hence, both views combined can help you position objects on the z-axis without losing
sight of their position on the other axes.

Status Bar
The status bar is located at the bottom of the Top and Side views and contains tools for helping you view 3D
objects, identify the layer name, the current tool and access the Colour Picker tool.

Axes
The Top and Side views provide you with the following information:

447

Chapter 6: Viewsl

Top View: Displays the position of layers and objects on the Front-Back (Z) axis, as well as on the EastWest (X) axis.

lSide View: Displays the position of layers and objects on the Front-Back (Z) axis, as well as on the
North-South (Y) axis.

How to access the Top and Side views
1. Do one of the following:‣

In a view area, click the Add View

button and select Top View or Side View.

‣

Select Windows > Top View or Side View.

448

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

449

Chapter 7: Workspaces

Chapter 7: Workspaces
The Storyboard Pro workspace is comprised of several views. You can customize your workspace to suit yourwork style, save it as a new workspace, and load it from the Workspace toolbar.
The first time you open Storyboard Pro, the default Drawing workspace is loaded. There are a total of eight
ready-made workspaces.
Workspace

Icon

Description

Drawing

This workspace is designed to enable you to draw your storyboard efficiently. The main
space is the large Stage view and the Thumbnails view is at the bottom. This workspace
also gives you quick and easy access to all your tools, as well as the Panel and Storyboard
views.

Timeline

This workspace is designed with the process of animatic creation in mind. The main
space is the large Stage view and the Timeline view is at the bottom, where you can easily
edit the timing of panels, transitions and sounds. This workspace also gives you quick
and easy access to all your tools, as well as the Panel and Storyboard views.

Overview

This workspace is designed to provide an organized overview of your project. The main
space is the Thumbnails view where you can efficiently reorganize the order of yourpanels.

Horizontal

This workspace displays your project as a classic horizontal paper storyboard layout. The
main space displays three panels at a time, with the panel information shown below eachone.

VerticalThis workspace displays your project as a classic vertical paper storyboard layout. The
main space displays two panels at a time, with the panel information shown at the side of
each.

Pitch Mode

This workspace displays your project with a different set of views than the otherworkspaces. Access is only given to a certain number of features. This maximizes theviewing space to focus solely on the story being pitched.
The Pitch Mode workspace occupies the entire display screen. There are no toolbars or
top menu available.

PDF View

This workspace displays your project with the views required to quickly set up your PDF
export.

3D View

This workspace displays your project with the views appropriate for working with 3D
objects, including the Camera, Top, Timeline, and Layers views.

450

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Pitch Mode Workspace
The Pitch Mode workspace contains a different set of views than the other workspaces, and occupies the entire
display screen. Access is only given to a certain number of features. This maximizes the viewing space byremoving any unnecessary distractions such as toolbars and buttons, allowing your audience to focus solely on
the story being pitched. It also has an easy comment feature that is not available in the other workspaces. The
views in this workspace do not have tabs or names. You cannot add or remove views. However, you can hide
the side views temporarily to maximize the Camera view.
There is also a Pitch Mode view that behaves in almost the same way as the Pitch Mode workspace, but
provides access to the other views and menus.

How to access the Pitch Mode workspace
Do one of the following:l

In the View toolbar, click on the Pitch Modebutton.

451

Chapter 7: WorkspaceslFrom the Workspace toolbar, select Pitch Mode .

l

In the top menu, select Windows > Workspace > Workspace > Pitch Mode.

How to exit the Pitch Mode workspacel

In the Control Panel view, click the Exit Pitch Modebutton.

NOTE
To exit the workspace, you can also switch to another workspace using the top menu.

452

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Thumbnails View
The Thumbnails view is very similar to the Thumbnails view found in the other workspaces and the View menu.
It allows you to see the scenes, panels, and transitions in your storyboard. The main difference is that you
cannot see the drawing layers included in the panel, only the composited image of all your layers—see
Thumbnails View on page 438.
You can easily navigate through the thumbnails without clicking on them by using the default keyboard
shortcuts A and F.

453

Chapter 7: Workspaces

Control Panel
The Control Panel view is where you play back the storyboard, see the dialogue or selected caption for thecurrent panel, and access the comments settings and tools

454

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Playing Back the Storyboard
The Playback toolbar lets you play back your storyboard. When you create an animatic with transitions andsound, you can play it back in real time to check the timin.

455

Chapter 7: Workspaces

Navigating the Camera View
If you want to zoom in and out or pan in the Camera view, you can use the View tools in the Control Panel view.

‣ To navigate in the Camera view, deselect the Camera Mode
Iconbutton in the Control Panel view.

Tool Name

Keyboard Shortcut

Zoom In2

Zoom Out

1

Pan

Spacebar

2 for zoom in
1 for zoom out

Zoom Tool

When the Zoom tool is selected, hold Alt as you click
to zoom out.

456

Storyboard Pro 6.0 Reference Guide

Panel View

The Panel view displays the captions related to the current panel. You can see the dialogue, action notes or any
other caption available in your storyboard. You can also add, remove or edit Comments captions.

457